Home

ANSI/NSF 50 – 1999 - NSF International

1. sise 37 11 4 Motors Ni eee easeaaaaaaeeaeeeeeeeeneaaaaeseaseeeeeasenssaaeneaeeeess 38 E W el Oe le 5 nn minis EE 38 11 6 Protection against overdosing 38 11 7 Flow indicating device sise 38 11 8 Operation and installation instructions 38 EE DE Wate GIE L PP e 39 Filta OM MOC E Ee TTT 39 12 1 AEE ONEI LEIALAK O l PRE PP EP TOR PIE 39 12 2 Sand and alternate sand type filter media 40 Ozone te e le 41 Ee ET 41 vi 13 2 Ozone Componente eee e eee eteeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeteeaaaaeeeeeeeeeseceaaaaeeaaeeeeeeeeeeecssaeeeeeees 41 13 3 Ozone oenerator iii 41 13 4 Injection methods sie 41 13 5 Gas flow meter iii 42 13 6 Valve and component identification 42 13 7 Cle arrability s sehecetesesetaheneeseeeeebeeesssctecepeeteeeedesuancedeeteeeadesuaecedeeveesesceasauedaed aeaa aaa E 42 13 8 Ozone resistant materials sise 42 13 9 Compatible materials for operation 42 13 10 Design pressure pressure vessels ceeeeeeeeeeee eee eee eeeccaeee sees ee eeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeeneee 44 TBAT AFCA DEE 44 19 12 Water low Metel srini catania oE A a ani RANKA een os cabana ACATA ANAI EAA AA 44 13 13 Oxidation reduction potential ORP monitoring 44 13 14 Warning devices GO iii 44 13 15 Operational protection MM 44 13 16 Ozone destruict CON iii 44 13 17 Ozone output Ci ON iii 44 ME CC Un W 45 13 19 Disinfection effic
2. 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 Annex J informative Equipment recommendations for installation and operation di Introduction The purpose of this annex is to provide general recommendations for the installation and operation of process equipment to obtain satisfactory performance The actual method of installation and operation should comply with the manufacturer s recommendations and with the applicable state and local laws and regulations J 2 Pool water balance In order to ensure the satisfactory performance of the process equipment it is important to maintain a balanced pool water chemistry Specific devices may have special needs in relation to the pool water balance The operation and installation instructions provided with the device should be consulted J 3 Testing frequencies Testing of the pool water should be conducted on a routine and frequent basis to ensure that appropriate parameters are being maintained and also to provide an adequate record of the daily operation of the pool The regulatory agency having jurisdiction should be consulted to determine the minimum frequency of testing that is required J 4 Electrical equipment Manufacturers and installers should exercise due diligence in the design production and installation of electrical products to achieve compliance with the National Electrical Code NEC NFPA 70 or other ap plicable national or local requirements J 5 in line electrolytic and brine
3. Alkalinity PH Sanitizer 1 80 15 mg L as CaCO 6 8 7 4 Free Chlorine 8 12 mg L as Cl 2 160 15 mg L as CaCO3 7 8 8 2 Free Chlorine 8 12 mg L as Cl NOTE The test temperature may be obtained by heating or cooling the test water solution or by heating or cool ing the ambient temperature around the automated controller equipment N 1 2 1 All controllers except those labeled to be for swimming pools only shall be tested at the spa hot tub water temperature N 1 2 2 Four separate probes sensors are required and run parallel for this testing N 1 2 3 In order to maintain concentrations or stability of the testing chemical solutions seal the solution container with a lid and insert probes through the lid N 1 3 Method a Expose all normally wetted parts of the probe sensor to each of the chemical solutions in Annex N section N 1 2 for a period of 100 d 6 h at the ambient temperature specified in Annex N section N 1 2 b Rinse the exposure solution from the probe sensor components and operate the automated controller under normal conditions e g pH 7 5 ORP 700 mV for 24 h 1 h according to the manufacturer s instructions c After the 24 h period evaluate the controller as specified under 18 5 1 N1 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 N 1 4 Acceptance criteria After chemical exposure automated chemical controller components shall show no signs of erosion or structural def
4. Bather load The sanitizer demand increases as the number of bathers increase Exposure to vegetation and airborne debris Dense landscaping increases nitrates which introduce nitrogen These nitrogen compounds react with chlorine and consume it thereby reducing chlorine available for disinfection and maintenance of sanitation Aeration splashing straying of water and features such as waterfalls These things increase the demand for sanitizer by creating very high water and air mixing Surface area A larger surface area enables more disinfectant consumption Use of a pool or spa cover helps to minimize air water mixing and introduction of debris Volume Greater volume dilutes the disinfectants Average water temperature The demand for sanitizer changes as the temperature increases or decreases Amount of direct sunlight UV exposure Sunlight exposure increases the rate at which sanitizer is consumed indoor pools may be unaffected by this factor Level of cyanuric acid CYA in water CYA slows down the destruction of chlorine by the sun s ultraviolet rays but excessive CYA levels negatively affect the oxidation ability of chlorine Chemical dilution due to rainfall backwashing etc The loss of water containing sanitizer also creates loss of sanitizer Pump and filter runtime Sanitizer is only introduced when the pump is running and water is being circulated otherwise no disinfectant is
5. R 2 5 2 allergic reaction Adverse reaction to a chemical resulting from previous sensitization to that chemical or to a structurally similar one R 2 5 3 chronic effect An effect that occurs as a result of repeated or long term chronic exposures R 2 5 4 chronic exposure Multiple exposures occurring over an extended period of time or a significant fraction of an animal s or individual s lifetime R 2 5 5 chronic toxicity The capability of a substance to cause adverse human health effects as a re sult of chronic exposure R 2 5 6 irreversible toxicity Toxic effects to a tissue that cannot be repaired R 2 5 7 local toxicity Effects that occur at the site of first contact between the biological system and the toxicant R 2 5 8 reversible toxicity Toxic effects that can be repaired usually by a specific issue s ability to re generate or mend itself after chemical exposure R2 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 R 2 5 9 systemic toxicity Effects that are elicited after absorption and distribution of a toxicant from its entry point to its target tissue R 2 6 lowest observed adverse effect level LOAEL The lowest exposure concentration at which statistically or biologically significant increases in frequency or severity of effects are observed between the exposed population and its appropriate control group U S EPA 201 1a R 2 7 margin of exposure MoE The LED or other point of departure divided by the environmen
6. f EF 11 to lt 16 years Competitive Mean value from ACC 2002 which assumed 4 events week x 52weeks year x 11 months year 12 months year S EF 6 to lt 11 years Competitive Mean value from ACC 2002 assumed 2 5 events week x 52 weeks year x 6 month year 12 months year BW Adult The average body weight of adult males and females is 70 kg which is the average of the median male and female body weights U S EPA 1997 BW Child The body weight is 54 kg for children age 11 to lt 16 years and 29 kg for children age 6 to lt 11 years based upon Tables 8 4 and 8 5 of the Child Specific Exposure Factors Handbook U S EPA 2008 These values are the average of the 50 percentile body weights for males and females R 5 5 Swimming pool inhalation exposures R 5 5 1 Short term swimming pool inhalation exposures The following equation is taken from U S EPA SWIMODEL 2003a and shall be used to calculate post application short term inhalation exposures PDD VpxIRxET BW Where PDD Potential daily dose mg kg day Vp Chemical vapor concentration see equation below IR Inhalation rate m hr ET Exposure time hrs day BW Body weight kg Vp CwxH x 1 000 L m Where Vp Chemical vapor concentration mg m Cw Chemical concentration in pool water mg L H Henry s Law constant unitless R11 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Cw Chemical concentration in pool water
7. 13 16 Ozone destruct The injection and mass transfer components of an ozone generation system shall be equipped with a method of collecting undissolved gaseous ozone and destroying it before it is vented to atmosphere The gaseous ozone concentration at the outlet of the ozone destruct system vent shall be 0 mam 0 07 ppm 13 17 Ozone output Ozone generation systems shall be tested for ozone concentration and output rate in accordance with Annex H 2 44 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 13 18 Life test When tested in accordance with the life test described in Annex I a minimum of 8000 operating hours shall be accumulated among the three units no less than 3000 operating hours shall be accumulated on one of the three units At the conclusion of the testing the units with 3000 operating hours shall be evaluated to the output pressure and disinfection efficacy requirements of this section 13 19 Disinfection efficacy Process equipment designed for secondary disinfection such as copper and or silver ion generators ozone and ultraviolet light equipment shall demonstrate a 3 log inactivation of influent bacteria when tested according to Annex H 1 Ozone systems claiming reduction of Cryptospordium parvum shall be evaluated according to 13 20 Ozone equipment shall carry the following information in the installation and use instructions Level 1 NSF ANSI 50 section 13 19 disinfection efficacy testing for 3 log 99 9 or gre
8. D15 2015 NSF pressure indicator temperature indicator return to pool port check for leakage test section pump test specimen DA e i Deg T e H filter tank i adjustable Ap g I D i d _ ee S b Figure D7 Backwash valve differential pressure leakage test on empty filter tank D16 NSF ANSI 50 2015 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Annex E normative Test methods for the evaluation of recessed automatic skimmers NOTE The test conditions specified in this annex are not intended to represent recommended field use conditions E 1 Negative pressure test E 1 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to verify the structural integrity of a recessed automatic skimmer housing if the skimmer is closed during part of the operating cycle E 1 2 Apparatus vacuum source capable of producing a vacuum of 85 kPa 25 in Hg and vacuum gauge accurate to 1 and scaled to yield the measurement within 25 to 75 of scale E 1 3 Negative pressure test method a Assemble skimmer in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions b Close the skimmer equalizer inlet Attach the vacuum source to the skimmer outlet and apply an internal vacuum of 25 1 in Hg 85 3 4 kPa Hold the vacuum for at least 5 min c Slowly release the vacuum and examine the skimmer housing for evidence of structural failure or other permanent deformation E
9. Differential Pressure Gauge Reading psi Pressure cu Effluent Pressure Reading psi Pressure mt Influent Pressure Reading psi Note If the influent is under vacuum the influent pressure readings are negative Fin the operating point full speed TD on the pump curve then find and record the corresponding flow rate full speed flow P 2 1 2 Procedures using pump speed for single level bodies of water Speed is proportional to flow Speed is expressed in revolutions per minute rpm a Formula to determine flow based on known speed full speed flow full speed x known speed unknown flow b Formula to determine speed based on desired flow full speed x desired flow full speed flow unknown speed P 2 1 3 Procedures using TDH for single level bodies of water Friction head TDH is proportional to flow rate squared a Formula to determine TDH based on desired flow rate Full speed TDH x desired flow rate full speed flow unknown TDH b Formula to determine flow rate based on measured TDH at lower speed SQRT measured TDH x full speed flow full speed TDH unknown flow P 2 1 4 Procedures using TDH for multi level bodies of water Multi level bodies of water include a static head requirement that is constant and does not change proportional to flow Static head is the height the water must be lifted and is the elevation difference between two bodies of water The friction loss portion of a s
10. Li Purpose The purpose of this test is to evaluate the durability of equipment used in pool and spa hot tub applications 1 2 Apparatus pump capable of delivering a sufficient back pressure pressure gauge meeting ANSI ASME B40 100 Grade 3A specifications and sized to yield the measurement within 25 to 75 of scale temperature indicating device accurate to 1 C 2 F and recirculation tank 1 3 Water temperature si swimming pools hot tubs spas water temperature 75 10 F 24 6 C 102 5 F 39 3 C NOTE 1 All feeders except those labeled to be for swimming pools only shall be tested at the spa hot tub water temperature NOTE 2 If scientific evidence exist that temperature may affect the efficacy of a technology the worse case scenario shall be used 1 4 Method a Assemble three units according to the manufacturer s instructions b Connect the units to a re circulating tank filled with water conditioned to the applicable temperatures specified in Annex section 1 1 3 Adjust the pressure source to obtain a pressure that is 80 0 5 of the maximum rated pressure Set the output rate to deliver a minimum of 80 of the rated output specified by the manufacturer c Start the units and allow them to operate continually for a period of 3000 h Maintain the units in accordance with the manufacturer s maintenance instructions Manufacture shall not specify parts replacement as m
11. increased microbiological risk scale formation cloudy water eye discomfort If pH is too low the pool may have or cause rapid dissipation of sanitizer plaster and concrete etching eye discomfort corrosion of metals vinyl liner wrinkling 2 Total alkalinity buffering ppm as CaCO3 a minimum 60 b ideal 80 100 c maximum for calcium hypochlorite lithium hypochlorite and sodium hypochlorite 100 120 for sodium dichlor trichlor chlorine gas and bromine compounds 180 If total alkalinity is too low the pool may have or cause pH bounce corrosion tendency If total alkalinity is too high the pool may have or cause cloudy water increased scale formation increased pH These values are based on the carbonate alkalinity 3 Total dissolved solids ppm a 1 500 greater than TDS at spa startup Where startup TDS includes source water TDS and any other inorganic salt added at startup an increase in TDS may indicate an accumulation of impurities during the course of Q2 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 operation Excessively high TDS may lead to hazy water corrosion of fixtures and may inhibit sanitation TDS should be periodically reduced by draining 4 Calcium hardness ppm as CaCO3 a minimum 100 b ideal 150 250 c maximum 800 Lower alkalinity and lower pH should be used with calcium above ideal levels 5 Heavy metals If excessive heavy metals are present s
12. 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 0 5 0 2 27 2C 7 6 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 1 0 0 5 27 2C 7 6 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 0 2 0 1 39 2C 7 6 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 0 5 0 2 39 2C 7 6 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 1 0 0 5 39 2C 7 6 0 1 100 10 NOTE TDS NaCl removed from pH FC CC water challenge due to lack of impact on results at target levels 018 2015 NSF Table 0 4 Free and Total Bromine NSF ANSI 50 2015 DI water mL Calcium Cal Magnesium Bromine ppm Temperature C pH hydrochloric Total Alkalinity ppm MgCl acid sodium hy Sodium Bicar Ppm droxide bonate NaHCO HCI NaOH ppm 1000 220 30 80 10 3 0 0 5 27 1 7 6 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 9 0 0 5 27 1 7 6 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 16 0 0 5 27 1 7 6 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 3 0 0 5 39 1 7 6 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 9 0 0 5 39 1 7 6 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 16 0 0 5 39 1 7 6 0 1 100 10 Table O 5 Hardness Testing CH or TH pH hydro wa Sodi Calcium Magnesium FAC Sodium Temperature chloric ac m Bicar Iron Ferric Copper DI water mL CaCl ppm MgCl Hypochlorite C id sodium borate Chloride Chloride 2 PP ppm NaOCI ppm hydroxide NaHCO
13. 1 gpm 4 LPM or 2 of reading whichever is greater water tank and pump system capable of delivering water at the design flow rate and proper temperature through the filter pressure measurement taps sized to the filter s inlet and outlet and Tor testing the initial head loss of an alternate sand type media the media shall be installed in a 24 in 624 mm diameter sand type filter for which the head loss with sand is known B 3 3 Challenge water D SE swimming pool spa hot tub filters water temperature 75 10 F 24 6 C turbidity SANTU B 3 4 Method a Install a pressure measurement tap at the filter inlet and the filter outlet The taps should be connected by a hose to the pump outlet and return Determine the head loss due to any restriction between the filter inlet or outlet and the installed pressure measurement taps This head loss should be subtracted from the head loss measured during operation b Condition filter per the manufacturer s instructions and initiate a filter cycle at the design flow rate c Operate the unit at the design flow rate for 300 30 s See special instructions in Annex B section B 3 4 f for testing sand filters d Measure and record the inlet and outlet static pressures e Calculate the head loss using one of the following equations HLF P4 Ps Z x 9 81 W 1000 HLP HLF 144 x P4 P2 W Z HLP where B1 2015 NSF or where HLF
14. BALANCING J FEEDER TANK r OZONE SYSTEM COMPONENTS e lA a ITEM DESCRIPTION 00 A OZONE GENERATOR C n B INJECTOR INJECTOR MANIFOLD O ABNT a ri T C OZONE REACTION TANK CONTROLLER O D OZONE DEGAS VALVE E_ UNDISSOLVED GASEOUS OZONE DESTRUCT wy OZONE F OZONE ORP MONITOR CONTROLLER E S r GENERATION SYSTEM OZONE MANAGEMENT SYTEM G AMBIENT OZONE MONITOR CONTROLLER a S A OZONE GENERATOR E NETR a B IN z OZONE Gag gt INJECTOR S j OZONE GAS FEED MEDD gt z n z Ej S ee J 5 fx EG deu MAIN CIRCULATION PUMP e TANK C OZONE REACTION TANK N J BOOSTER di PUMP VA ke YY J f A ag H d Ya GE F OZONE ORP Vy POO MONITOR LLL LL A I 0 f HEATER CONTROLLER MAIN FILTERS CONTROLLER o OZONE ORP 7 f ONE ORP A 4 Y Ki e e pi S d PROBE A Ek 4 J A AA i e OZONE JZON XI e SIDESTREAM SO REM A 25 NOMINAL RETURN NOTES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED J ALLOW MINIMUM PIPE LENGTH OF 5 FT BETWEEN SIDESTREAM RETURN TO MAIN LINE AND CHLORINE FEED INSTALL OZONE ORP PROBE IMMEDIATELY AFTER SIDESTREAM RETURN J 6 7 2 Components shall be installed in the exact configuration as noted in their certification J 6 7 3 The ozone generating equipment should be designed sized and controlled utilizing an ORP monitor controller independent of and in addition to any halogen ORP monitor controller The ORP probe should be placed in the pool reci
15. F 2 2 F 2 3 F 2 4 F 2 4 1 Apparatus pump capable of delivering a minimum 138 kPa 20 psi back pressure pressure gauge meeting ANSI ASME B40 100 Grade 3A specifications and sized to yield the measurement within 25 to 75 of the scale temperature indicating device accurate to 2 F 1 C diatomaceous earth and adequately sized recirculation tank and agitation system Test conditions swimming pools hot tubs spas 75 5 F 24 3 C 102 5 F 39 3 C All feeders except those labeled to be for swimming pools only shall be tested at the spa hot tub water temperature Method Slurry feeders a Assemble the feeder in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions and set it to deliver the maximum rated output b Fill the recirculation tank with water conditioned to the applicable temperatures specified in Annex F section F 2 3 Add an appropriate amount of diatomaceous earth to the water to obtain a 5 0 5 by volume solution c Start the circulating pump agitation system and adjust the throttling valve until the injection head manifold pressure is 138 3 kPa 20 0 5 psi d Start the mechanical chemical feeder and allow it to operate continuously for a period of 2500 h Follow the manufacturer s maintenance instructions excluding parts replacement for the duration of the test e Record the maximum output rate per the following schedule start of test sample 1 480 h sam
16. Products which protrude 1 2 in 13 mm or more from the mounting surface shall comply with the sheer load requirements of ANSI APSP 16 Products for public use shall be tested for head loss in accordance with ANSI APSP 16 Products for public use installation in the wall of a pool or spa shall comply with the horizontal load and deformation test of ANSI APSP 16 water return fittings Products for public use installation in the floor of a pool or spa shall comply with the vertical load and deformation test of ANSI APSP 16 Products for use in both floor and wall applications need only comply with the vertical load requirements for public use water return fittings Products that meet the above requirements shall be marked in accordance with the following manufacturers name or trademark and model number or trade designation Product packaging installation or use instructions shall contain the following manufacturer s name or trademark model number or trade designation product installation instructions testing standard reference NSF ANSI 50 and certification mark use conditions residential use only commercial residential use use conditions wall use only floor wall use maximum rated pressure if applicable and rated head loss curve if applicable If the website address is visible on the fitting the instructions may be on the website 21 2 Surface or dec
17. The test temperatures may be achieved by heating or cooling the test water solution or by heating or cooling the ambient temperature around the chemical feeding equipment Chemical resistance test method NOTE The method described here is primarily intended for the testing of basic erosion type flow through chemical feeders Some modification may be required when evaluating differing types of flow through chemical feeder designs However the intent of the method shall be maintained when these modifications are made a Fill the flow through chemical feeder to the maximum level with the applicable chemicals or subject feeder parts to the specified chemicals by immersion If the chemical is a dry type fill the feeder to the manufacturer s maximum recommended chemical level and then fill it to the maximum water level b Ensure that the chemical solution is in contact with each surface that is to be exposed c Seal all inlet and outlet ports with the exception of one port above the flood level to allow any generated gases to escape d Expose the normally wetted parts to the chemical s for 100 d 6 h e Examine the feeder weekly and check for any signs of leakage damage or any other noticeable changes Once the test period has elapsed drain and examine the feeder Acceptance criteria Wetted parts of the feeder shall show no signs of deterioration or structural deformation G1 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 G 2 Hydrosta
18. gt 100 HP 75 kW the required pressure shall be held for 10 min 30 s d The pump housing shall be examined for leakage during the test period C 2 5 Acceptance criteria There shall be no evidence of rupture leakage burst or permanent deformation of the pump housing C 3 Self priming capability C 3 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to verify the manufacturer s claim of self priming capability C 3 2 Apparatus suction line essentially as shown in Annex C figure C1 elapsed time indicator accurate to within 0 1 min gauge pressure indicating device temperature indicating device and barometric pressure indicating device C3 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 C 3 3 Pumps C 3 4 f C 3 5 Test conditions po swimming pool O hot tubs spa water temperature 75 10 F 24 6 C 102 5 F 39 3 C turbidity lt 15 NTU lt 15 NTU except those labeled to be for swimming pools only shall be tested at the hot tubs spa temperature Self priming capability test method The pump shall be installed and operated according to the manufacturer s instructions except that the suction line shall be essentially as shown in Annex C figure C1 The pump shall be turned on and the timer started The elapsed time to steady discharge gauge reading or full discharge flow shall be recorded This is the measured priming time MPT The pump shall be shut off and all lines drained of water Th
19. head loss due to filter ft P inlet static pressure psig P outlet static pressure psig W specific weight of water DCH Z height of inlet centerline above outlet centerline ft and HLP head loss due to piping from P to Pz ft NOTE conversions HLF m x 9 81 HLF kPa HLF ft x 0 4335 HLF psi P psi x 2 307 P ft HLF head loss due to filter kPa P inlet static pressure kPa P gt outlet static pressure kPa W density of water kg m Z height of inlet centerline above outlet centerline m and HLP head loss due to piping from P to Pz kPa NSF ANSI 50 2015 This analysis assumes that the inlet and outlet piping are of the same size material and general condition If this is not the case these factors shall be taken into account When testing sand filters operate the filter at the design flow rate for an additional 6 h Slowly reduce the flow to zero shut down the system and slowly drain the filter Sudden reductions in flow can invalidate this test as the water surge including reversal of flow can re settle the sand bed Examine the surface of the filter media bed for conformance to 5 3 5 3 B 3 5 Acceptance criteria The measured head loss shall not exceed the design head loss specified by the filter manufacturer B 4 B 4 1 Filter media cleanability test Purpose The purpose of this test is to verify the effectiveness of the manufactu
20. in a specified adverse response BMD Curve fitting models shall be selected based on the characteristics of the response data in the observed range The model shall be selected to the extent possible based on the biological mode of action of the substance taken together in a weight of evidence evaluation of the available toxicological and biological data The selected model shall be used to determine the BMDL R 6 4 2 3 Margin of exposure evaluation Following determination of the Point of Departure either by the NOAEL LOAEL approach or the BMDL approach the Point of Departure shall be utilized to perform a margin of exposure MoE analysis with the PDD calculated in Annex R section R 5 The PDD shall be divided by the RSC to account for exposure to the chemical from other sources outside of swimming pool water Default RSC values are used in the absence of quantitative data to determine the swimming pool water contribution of a substance Thus a default RSC of 80 shall be used if no other applications for the chemical outside of pool water uses can be identified If other uses can be identified a default RSC of 20 shall be used The MoE shall be calculated as follows MoE Point of Departure mg kg day PDD mg kg day systemic all routes RSC An acceptable MoE shall be determined based on the uncertainty factors as set forth in Table R5 A default value of 10 shall be used for individual areas of uncertainty when adequate data
21. skimmers shall be installed with a vacuum vent line externally vented to atmosphere on the suction piping from the skimmer housing whether integral to the spa or not 20 5 5 2 3 Skimmer strainer basket shall be easily removable for cleaning 20 5 5 2 4 One skimmer shall be provided for each 150 surface square feet or portion thereof 20 5 5 2 5 Skimmer strainer basket volume shall comply with this Standard 20 5 5 2 6 Open area dimensions shall comply with this Standard 20 5 5 2 7 Skimmer trimmer valves when used shall comply with this Standard 20 5 5 2 8 Skimmer weir A non recessed skimmer shall have a weir that operates freely with continuous action and automatically adjusts to variation in water levels over the manufacturer prescribed operating water level at the maximum flow rate of the spa 20 5 5 2 9 The skimmer system shall be evaluated for entrainment of air through the simmer system The skimmer system shall be capable of 50 of flow to the filter without air entrainment when the system is operated at the spa manufacturer s recommended operating water level 20 5 5 2 10 Systems shall be marked either on the skimmer face or shell structure with the operating wa ter level or acceptable range of water level 70 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 20 5 5 3 Perimeter overflow grating or gutter system 20 5 5 3 1 All recessed perimeter overflow grating or gutter system shall meet the requirements of this Standard 20 5 5 3
22. 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 74 0 1 200 20 50 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 39 1 74 0 1 40 10 100 20 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 39 1 74 0 1 100 10 100 20 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 39 1 74 0 1 200 20 100 20 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 39 1 74 0 1 40 10 200 40 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 39 1 74 0 1 100 10 200 40 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 39 1 74 0 1 200 20 200 40 NOTE A high FAC will skew TA results NOTE Varying the CYA level will help indicate impact of CYA on TA testing 020 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Table O 7 Cyanuric Acid un memneum FACSodum wn Lo ee tote alkainty Sodium alcium agnesium S emperature P odium Bicar cyanurate DI water mL CaCl MgCl ppm Hypochlorite C id sodium hy borate CNN a 0 NaOCl ppm droxide NaHCO i HCI NaOH 3 ppm pp 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 74 0 1 100 10 30 5 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 74 0 1 100 10 50 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 74 0 1 100 10 100 20 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 74 0 1 100 10 200 40 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 39 1 74 0 1 100 10 30 5 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 39 1 74 0 1 100 10 50 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 39 1 74 0 1 100 10 100 20 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 39 1 74 0 1 100 10 200 40 NOTE When testing CYA leve
23. 20 4 3 2 1 Spa steps shall be marked with color contrasting edge markings 20 4 3 2 2 Steps and stepping surfaces within the activity spa intended primarily for ingress egress foot ing shall be slip resisting as defined by the requirements of the following ASTM F462 Testing shall be performed with the traditional soapy water solution and the tap water treated with 2 0 ppm of free available chlorine or ASTM D1894 20 4 3 3 Water Depth 20 4 3 3 1 Spas shall be marked with color contrasting depth markings 20 4 3 3 2 Spa water depth at any seat or bench intended for use as a step when entering or exiting the spa shall not exceed 24 in 62 cm 20 4 3 3 3 Spas with multi level seating to address tall users shall not exceed 28 in 71 cm water depth for any seat or sitting bench as measured from the waterline 20 4 3 3 4 Special use spas such as those designed for exercise such as swimming therapy or other special purpose may exceed a depth of 48 in 122 cm 20 4 3 4 Floor Slope Spa floors shall have a slope not exceeding one inch per foot maximum pitch 1 12 20 4 4 Steps handholds and handrails 20 4 4 1 If the spa is designed with steps for entering step treads shall have a minimum unobstructed horizontal depth of 10 in 25 4 cm and a minimum unobstructed surface area of 240 in 1550 cm 20 4 4 2 Riser heights shall be consistent and no less than 7 in 17 78 cm and no greater than 12 in 30 48 cm If the bott
24. 30 psi 0 pressure cycles and a hydrostatic pressure equal to 2 0 times the rated working pressure for 60 seconds When polymeric materials are used to make fittings for use in outdoor pool and spa applications they shall undergo UV exposure in accordance with ASTM G154 for UV resistance and 70 strength requirements as referenced in section 3 of ANSI APSP 16 When polymeric material products are offered in multiple colors the colors with the highest and lowest colorant loading of colorant within the formulation shall be tested If colorants are used at differing percentages within the formulations test both the highest and lowest colorant loading levels as well as the lightest and darkest colors The worst case recorded values shall be used for all further tests and calculations Fittings that are only rated for indoor use need not comply with UV exposure requirements Manufactured sumps and other assembly components that are not exposed to natural UV radiation when fully assembled and installed according to the manufacturer s instruction are not included in the Ultraviolet Light Exposure Test Products that meet all requirements shall be marked in accordance with the following manufacturer s name or trademark model number or product designation or size standard reference s NSF ANSI 50 certification mark and use conditions indoor use only Indoor indoor outdoor use Outdoor Product packa
25. Annex NN SE ME C1 Annex D nanas ge EN D1 Annex E 07 SE 207 Nm E1 ANnex EF faste nn tt tt EEEE n de F1 AnnexG Re me EEN MEET G1 Annex ere ER nn fe Re H1 L a WEG WEN EN l1 ANNEXE Len WT Ji PEN VOUS D K1 Lu EEN EE L1 TATA eege M1 Lu ei WE N1 Line WEE O7 LE P1 ANNEXE E E E E TE ET Q1 Foreword The purpose of this Standard is to establish minimum materials design and construction and performance requirements for components products equipment and systems related to public and residential recreational water facility operation If a value for measurement is followed by a value in other units in parenthesis the second value may be only approximate The first stated value is the requirement In this edition of NSF ANSI 50 the following revisions were incorporated Issue 74 This issue addresses requirements for heat exchangers heaters coolers and solar water heating systems Issue 77 This issue addresses pump efficiency and pump performance in pools spas hot tubs and other water recreational facilities Issue 91 This issue updates language in Section 1 5 Normative References Section 3 2 Materials and Section 4 5 PVC hoses Issue 100 This issue is a revision of section 3 Materials Issue 107 This issue is an editorial revision of the entire standard Suggestions for improvement of this Standard are welcome This Standard is maintained on a Continuous Maintenance sch
26. H13 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 H 4 8 2 Procedure the a Once the water has been balanced in the tank a negative sample shall be collected The pump connected to the test tank shall be turned on and the flow rate set to manufacturer s recommended flow rate If applicable water shall be directed to the ozone generator system from the main line at the manufacture s recommended flow rate If the manufacturer requires the installation of the sample in a side stream then the unit shall be setup per figure H2 The flow ratio of the side stream to the flow through the unit shall be provided by the manufacturer If no side stream is required then all the flow will be directed through the unit b The flow shall be stopped and cryptosporidium oocysts shall be added to the tank and mixed for 10 min c After 10 minutes of mixing a positive control shall be collected from the test tank d Flow shall be reintroduced to the ozone generator system and directed to the drain The ozone generator system shall be turned on and checked for proper function The flow rates shall be verified and a stopwatch started e After reaching steady state when at least two volumes of water have passed through the unit under test three effluent samples 1000 ml each minimum shall be collected Each of the three samples collected after at least a complete volume has passed through the sample and no less than 2 minutes apart The samples shall be collected 30
27. NSF shall not incur any obligation or liability for damages including consequential damages arising out of or in connection with the use interpretation of or reliance upon this Standard NSF Standards provide basic criteria to promote sanitation and protection of the public health Participation in NSF Standards development activities by regulatory agency representatives federal local state shall not constitute their agency s endorsement of NSF or any of its Standards Preference is given to the use of performance criteria measurable by examination or testing in NSF Standards development when such performance criteria may reasonably be used in lieu of design materials or construction criteria The illustrations if provided are intended to assist in understanding their adjacent standard requirements However the illustrations may not include all requirements for a specific product or unit nor do they show the only method of fabricating such arrangements Such partial drawings shall not be used to justify improper or incomplete design and construction Unless otherwise referenced the annexes are not considered an integral part of NSF Standards The annexes provided as general guidelines to the manufacturer regulatory agency user or certifying organization 1 The information contained in this Disclaimer is not part of this American National Standard ANS and has not been processed in accordance with ANSI s requirements for a
28. See Annex D figures D2 and D3 Observe and collect leakage from the open port s over a test period of 5 min 5s Record and report the following static pressures psi kPa volume of leakage from auxiliary port s ml and valve inlet port pressure P1 psi kPa Move the following connections 1 move the pressure measurement device DPI from the valve or manufactured manifold first port tested to the next port Connect the test specimen without reducers or other attached devices in accordance with piping requirements in Table 1 see applicable Annex D figures D2 and D3 The test specimen shall be in the full open position for each test and 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 2 secure and make any additional connection that may be necessary to conform to any unique design features specified by the manufacturer g Fill the valve with water conditioned to the applicable temperature specified in Annex D section D 3 3 and bleed off any entrapped air h Place the test specimen in the next operating position and adjust the flow to the maximum design flow rate 1 gpm 3 8 LPM and adjust valve V2 until the pressure P1 is 24 1 psi 165 6 9 kPa i Observe and collect any leakage from the open port s over a test period of 5 min 5s j Record and report the following volume of leakage from auxiliary port s ml static pressures psi kPa valve inlet port pressure P1 psi kPa and elevations fe
29. Since less sunlight is found in indoor spas typically cyanuric acid is not needed Cyanuric acid does not stabilize bromine sanitizers Q3 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Q 5 Oxidation Regular oxidation is recommended for spas with normal bather load as a preventative measure 1 Chlorine products This is added to spa as needed at the end of each day facility is used Determined by bather load weather conditions etc Some high use spas may require oxidation several times per week Regular oxidation is recommended to prevent the buildup of contaminants maximize sanitizer efficacy minimize combined chlorine and improve water clarity Chlorine should not be used to oxidize a spa sanitized by PHMB 2 Potassium Monopersulfate Added to spa as needed at the end of each day facility is used Determined by bather load weather conditions etc Some high use spas may require oxidation several times per week Regular oxidation is recommended to prevent the buildup of contaminants maximize sanitizer efficacy minimize combined chlorine and improve water clarity Potassium monoperfulfate will measure as combined available chlorine in DPD test system Refer to test kit manufacturer s instructions Potassium monopersulfate should not be used to oxidize a spa sanitized by PHMB 3 Hydrogen peroxide This is added to spa monthly as needed Determined by bather load weather conditions etc Hydrogen per
30. The exposure times for non competitive and or recreational swimmers are based on NHAPs mean values U S EPA 1996a EF Adult Competitive Mean values for master s and collegiate swimmers ranged from 187to 238 days year For collegiate swimmer ACC 2002 assumed 5 events week x 52 weeks year x 11 months year 12 months year d EF Non Competitive Mean yearly frequency values obtained from NHAPS U S EPA 1996a EF 11 to lt 16 years Competitive Mean value from ACC 2002 which assumed 4 events week x 52weeks year x 11 months year 12 months year f EF 6 to lt 11 years Competitive Mean value from ACC 2002 assumed 2 5 events week x 52 weeks year x 6 month year 12 months year 9 SA Adult The body surface area exposed to pool water is 18 200 cm which represents the entire body including the head This value is the mean of the 50 percentile values for males and females listed in Tables 6 2 and 6 3 of the Exposure Factors Handbook U S EPA 1997 n SA Child The body surface areas exposed to pool water is10 500 cm for children age 6 to lt 11 years and 15 700 cm for children age 11 to lt 16 years based on the Child Specific Exposure Factors Hand Book Table 7 7 U S EPA 2008 BW Adult The average body weight of adult males and females is 70 kg which is the average of the median male and female body weights U S EPA 1997 BW Child The body weight is 54 kg for children age 11 t
31. Wastewater within 1 h of collection d Obtain a separate geometric mean for all triplicate samples taken at each individual time point e Determine the log reduction at each sample time by using the following equation Log Reduction logi9 Ns No Ns sample geometric mean No calculated target challenge concentration mean of triplicate samples from Annex H section H 1 6 2 e H 1 6 4 Acceptance criteria After each of five complete turnovers the test unit shall achieve a 3 log reduction for challenge organisms Performance shall be noted in the manufacturer s installation and operating instructions and be noted in Certification listings per 11 7 NOTE If the test unit does not turn the water over the samples taken at 30 min shall demonstrate a 3 log reduction H4 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 en vm FLOW DIRECTION SUPPLY TANK LOCATION OF POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE CONTROLS FOR ALL EFFICACY TESTS FLOWMETER VALVE be MAIN PUMP em MIXING PUMP FLO CUIAG ION GENERATOR seen DISINFECTION EFFICACY SAMPUNG POINT UNIT UNDER TEST OZONE OUTPUT UV amp OZONE DISINFECTION EFFICACY SAMPLING POINT FIGURE H1 APPARATUS TO ILLUSTRATE SAMPLING POINT H 2 Ozone level test H 2 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to verify that an ozone process device does not allow for the passing of ozone into the pool and spa hot tub water above acceptable limits H 2 2 Appartatus Se
32. d Fully prime the mechanical chemical feeder according to the manufacturer s instructions e Start the recirculation pump and adjust the back pressure to the maximum pressure specified by the manufacturer s delivery output curve 0 25 f Note the weight W in lb or Kg on the scale while starting the stopwatch Allow the mechanical feeder to operate for 1 h 6 min Note the weight We in lb or Kg on the scale g Calculate the delivery as follows delivery gpm W W2 8 33 time or delivery LPM W W 1 Kg 1 L J time h Repeat steps in Annex F section F 5 4 c through g at 25 50 and 75 of the feeder s rated capacity F5 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 F 5 5 Acceptance criteria Mechanical chemical feeders shall deliver chemicals at an output rate that is 10 of the feed rate indicator setting over deliveries from 25 to 100 rated capacity F 6 Suction lift test F 6 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to determine the amount of chemical delivered by a positive displacement mechanical feeder that is subject to a suction lift of 4 ft 1 2 m in order to verify the delivery rate claimed by the manufacturer F 6 2 Apparatus 5 gal 19 L container stopwatch injection manifold with pressure tap and throttling valve pressure gauge meeting ANSI ASME B40 100 Grade 3A specifications and sized to yield the measurement within 25 to 75 of scale measuring device accurate to
33. electrolytic batch or off line chlorine bromine generators see section 16 or automatic chemical controller see section 18 20 8 1 3 Water sanitation equipment integral to the spa shall meet the requirements of section 20 8 1 but a separate date plate and operational instructions are not required if the information is contained with in the spa data plate 20 8 1 4 Spa or swim spas utilizing a non self contained skid pack with a chemical treatment sys tem s shall comply with the requirements of section 20 8 1 NOTE Always consult and comply with the local regulatory authority having jurisdiction regarding chemical feeding requirements and system sizing Some jurisdictions require Level 1 sized chemical treatment systems and or automatic controllers 72 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 20 8 2 Supplemental water sanitation and treatment NOTE Spa or swim spas utilizing a non self contained skid pack with supplemental treatment equipment shall comply with the requirements of this section 20 8 2 1 The applicable requirements of this Standard shall apply to any equipment supplied by the spa manufacturer for use in treatment of spa water including ozone see section 13 UV light systems see section 14 and copper and silver ion generators see section 17 20 8 2 2 Supplemental water treatment equipment integral to the spa shall meet the requirements but a separate data plate and operational instructions are not requir
34. tested No diatomaceous earth is added to the challenge slurry when testing a diatomite type filter B 4 4 Method a Install and condition the filter in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions b Operate the filter at the design flow rate c Challenge the unit with the appropriate challenge slurry Continue to operate diatomite type and cartridge type filters at the design flow rate until the pressure differential across the filter is equal to the manufacturer s recommended pressure differential for cleaning Continue to operate sand filters until the pressure differential across the filter is equal to the manufacturer s recommended pressure differential for cleaning or 15 psi 103 kPa whichever is greater d Upon reaching the desired pressure differential during the testing of sand filters slowly reduce the flow to zero shut down the system and slowly drain the filter Sudden reductions in flow can invalidate this test as the water surge including reversal of flow can re settle the sand bed Examine the surface of the filter media bed for conformance to 5 3 e Clean the unit per the manufacturer s instructions Examine the filter media elements or cartridges for soil organics and filter aid f Operate the unit in accordance with the test method in Annex B section B 3 4 and determine the head loss at the design flow rate B 4 5 Acceptance criteria The filter media or elements shall be visibly free of soil organics
35. 0 0625 in 1 6 mm recirculation tank with a pump capable of delivering sufficient back pressure and scale accurate to 0 01 Ib 0 005 kg F 6 3 Water temperature CE swimming pools hot tubs spas 75 5 F 24 3 102 5 F 39 3 C All feeders except those labeled to be for swimming pools only shall be tested at the spa hot tub water temperature F 6 4 Method NOTE The method described here is primarily intended for the testing of high flow peristaltic pumps Some modification may be required when evaluating other types of mechanical feeder designs including those whose feed rates are not continuous over the course of operation Modifications may be made so that the intent of the method is maintained a Assemble the mechanical chemical feeder in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions and set it to deliver 100 of its capacity b Attach the mechanical chemical feeder discharge line to the injection manifold c Fill the 5 gal 19 L container with water conditioned to the temperature specified in Annex F section F 6 3 Place the container on the scale and position the mechanical chemical feeder 4 ft 1 2 m above the water level in the container F6 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 d Fully prime the mechanical chemical feeder according to the manufacturer s instructions e Start the recirculation pump and adjust the back pressure to 80 of the maximum pressure specified on the manufactu
36. 1 2 F 1 3 F 1 5 Apparatus pressure gauges meeting ANSI ASME B40 100 Grade 3A specifications sized to yield the measurement within 25 to 75 of scale hydrostatic pressure station and thermometer accurate to 1 F 0 5 C Test conditions pid Swimming pools hot tubs spas 75 5 F 24 3 C 102 5 F 39 3 C NOTE All feeders except those labeled to be for swimming pools only shall be tested at the spa hot tub water temperature Method a Install the feeder in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions b Fill the feeder with water conditioned to the applicable temperatures specified in Annex F section F 1 3 and bleed off all entrapped air c Uniformly increase the pressure to obtain 1 5 times the working pressure and hold the pressure for no less than 5 min Examine the feeder and components for signs of leakage during the test period Use appropriate protective equipment when examining the feeder d Slowly release the pressure and examine the unit Acceptance criteria The mechanical chemical feeder and its integral components shall not rupture leak burst or sustain permanent deformation F1 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 F 2 F 2 1 Erosion resistance slurry and dry chemical feeders only Purpose The purpose of this test is to verify that the materials used in the construction of slurry and dry chemical mechanical feeders have acceptable erosion resistance
37. 1 4 Acceptance criteria There shall be no evidence of structural failure or permanent deformation of the skimmer housing E 2 Weir opening E 2 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to verify that a weir will automatically adjust to changes in the water level when operating at the maximum design flow rate E 2 2 Apparatus turbidimeter scaled in nephelometric turbidity units NTU accurate to 2 NTU temperature indicating device accurate to 2 F 1 C adequately sized tank and pump to deliver required flow and flow measuring device accurate to 3 E1 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 E 2 3 Test water pC swimming pools hot tubs spas water temperature 75 10 F 24 6 C 102 5 F 39 3 C turbidity lt 15 NTU lt 15 NTU E 2 4 Weir opening test method a Install the skimmer to the test tank in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions b Connect a flow meter to the skimmer s outlet port c Fill the tank to the skimmer s normal operating level and set the flow at the maximum design flow rate d Slowly raise the water level in the tank until it reaches the maximum level at which the weir shall operate Record this level e Slowly lower the water level in the tank while observing the water flow over the weir When the velocity of water traveling over the weir is no longer sufficient to sustain a normal operating level i e lowest overflow level of the weir in the skimmer
38. 45268 lt www epa gov gt 5 ASME 3 Park Avenue New York NY 10016 5990 lt www asme org gt Association of Pool and Spa Professionals 2111 Eisenhower Avenue Alexandria VA 22314 lt www apsp org gt 7IAPMO 5001 E Philadelphia St Ontario CA 91761 lt www iapmo org gt 8 UL Underwriters Laboratory 2600 N W Lake Rd Camas WA 98607 8542 lt www ul com gt American Public Health Association 800 Street NW Washington DC 20001 lt www APHS org gt 10 ASTM International 100 Barr Harbor Drive West Conshohocken PA 19428 2859 lt www ASTM org gt 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 ASTM D2466 2006 Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings Schedule 40 ASTM D2467 2006 Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings Schedule 80 ASTM D3739 2010 Standard Practice for Calculation and Adjustment of the Langelier Saturation Index for Reverse Osmosis ASTM E11 2009 Standard Specification for Wire Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes 2009 ASTM F1346 03 Standard Performance Specification for Safety Covers and Labeling Requirements for All Covers for Swimming Pools Spas and Hot Tube ASTM F2049 10 Standard Guide for Fences Barriers for Public Commercial and Multi Family Residential Use Outdoor Play Areas ASTM F2208 2008 Standard Safety Specification for Residential Pool Alarms ASTM F2387 2004 Standard Specification for
39. Chlorine Stock Solution Dilute 1 ml of a 5 25 sodium hypochlorite solution to 100 ml Determine actual Chlorine concentration by dilution and amperometric titration or DPD methods Standard Method 4500 CL Gi e Ammonium Chloride solution Dissolve 0 1 g NH Cl in 100 ml DI water f General test water solution add about 1 L DI water to a 2 L volumetric flask Add 20 ml NaHCO solution 44 ml CaCl H2O solution and 14 ml NaCl solution and dilute to 2 L This solution will have approximately the following characteristics O8 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 0 3 alkalinity 100 ppm as CaCO Standard Method 2320B calcium hardness 220 ppm as CaCO Standard Method 2340B TDS 1100 ppm Standard Method 2540C pH 8 3 Standard Method 4500H Test procedure for pH Always prepare a volume of test water to allow for not only the test system check at each sample point but also for verification testing Two liters of water is typically sufficient When test strips are being tested that are designed for in situ testing a fresh aliquot shall be removed from the general test water sample to immerse each test strip Do not immerse the test strip into the general test water sample 0 3 1 0 4 Determine the pH levels for the test in accordance with 19 2 a Adjust the general test water pH using acids or bases typically used in the industry to the highest level to be tested as measured by the lab meter when adjusting pH u
40. Copper silver and copper ion generators A 56 17 1 General 0 NN En 56 17 2 Cleanability EE RM eee ND 56 17 3 Design pressure pressure vessels ANERER 56 17 4 Flow meter ER Ef ARM eee e eee e eee eeeeeaeaaaaaaeneseeeeseeesaeaeeeeeeens 56 17 5 Performanceindication ff St eecennaeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeesaeaseaeeeens 56 17 6 Operation and installation instructions 57 17 7 Data polate ge E D 57 17 8 Disinfection liicac tte 98 OR 7 58 17 9 Valve and component identification 58 17 10 Operating temperatures and pressures ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetececaaeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeenees 58 17 11 Warning devices O eanna EEE iii 58 17 12 Chemical resistant materials tiie th iii 58 WAED OULU EEN mt EEN A 59 17 AGES TCS o E E M ii 59 174E Uniformity OF OU OUT D iii 59 Automated Controllers S m res 59 LOT SR SO dt tea ade cues M nn ns tn tr eee 59 18 2 Chemical resistant materals esesineeeneoenssrnneensinsannnassnetnnannnasaneonraennnesnnosnaannnesanotanedannn 59 18 83 MONITOWMBRRSDIAY REN WT 59 18 4 Life test W 60 18 5 Performance A7 iii 60 18 6 Failure sensing and signaling devices eeessssssssseririssssssrrirrrttsssnrirnrstsssnrnnnnnesssstnnnnnnn 61 18 7 Operational protection sisi 61 18 8 Operation and installation instructions 61 18 9 Date E E a a TRS En nee En Re nn 61
41. D section D 2 4 steps b and c D 2 5 Acceptance criteria The valve or manufactured manifold and its integral components shall not rupture leak burst or sustain other deformation that negatively impacts form function or performance D 3 Differential pressure leakage test D 3 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to determine the ability of a multiport valve to seal off ports not in use during the filter and backwash cycles Note This test may be conducted on a valve mounted on the filter vessel In which case the valve s filter inlet and outlet should remain unblocked when it is connected to the filter vessel D 3 2 Apparatus equipment pressure gauges meeting ANSI ASME B40 100 Grade 1A specifications measurement within 25 to 75 of scale pumping station thermometer accurate to 1 F 0 5 C turbidity meter scaled in nephelometric turbidity units NTU Note In general a single differential pressure indicating device is more accurate than separate devices for measuring differences in pressure 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 D 3 3 Test waters The test waters shall meet the following requirements swimming pools hot tubs spas water temperature 75 10 F 24 6 C 102 5 F 39 3 C turbidity lt 15 NTU lt 15 NTU Valves and manufactured manifolds except those labeled to be for swimming pools only shall be tested at the spa hot tub water temperature D 3 4 Test
42. ET Non Competitive Swimmers The exposure times for non competitive and or recreational swimmers are based on NHAPs 90 percentile exposure durations U S EPA 1996a BW Adult The average body weight of adult males and females is 70 kg which is the average of the median male and female body weights U S EPA 1997 f BW Child The body weight is 54 kg for children age 11 to lt 16 years and 29 kg for children age 6 to lt 11 years based upon Tables 8 4 and 8 5 of the Child Specific Exposure Factors Handbook U S EPA 2008 These values are the average of the 50 percentile body weights for males and females A 5 5 2 Long term swimming pool inhalation exposures The following equation is taken from U S EPA SWIMODEL 2003a and shall be used to calculate post application short term inhalation exposures ADD VpxIRxETx EF BW x 365 day yr Where ADD Average daily dose mg kg day Vp Chemical vapor concentration see equation below IR Inhalation rate m hr ET Exposure time hrs day EF Exposure frequency events year BW Body weight kg Vp CwxH x 1 000 L m R12 2015 NSF Where Vp Chemical vapor concentration mg m Cw Chemical concentration in pool water mg L H Henry s Law constant unitless NSF ANSI 50 2015 Cw Chemical concentration in pool water mg L is chemical specific and based on label rates H The unitless Henry s Law constant is chemical sp
43. G154 for a period of 750 h Detachable logo labels or plates shall be removed for this test E 5 2 2 Test method Specimens shall be mounted inside the test apparatus with the normally exposed surface of the specimens facing the UV lamps and positioned so they receive exposure approximating an installed cover After exposure the skimmer covers shall be kept at ambient temperature and atmospheric pressure for at least 16 h and not more than 96 h The skimmer covers shall then be visually examined for deterioration E 5 2 3 Acceptance criteria No specimen shall exhibit crazing or cracking Discoloration shall not be considered unacceptable deterioration Skimmer covers passing the UV exposure test shall be tested for structural integrity in accordance with Annex E section E 5 3 E4 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 E 5 3 Structural integrity Six 6 covers which have passed the ultraviolet light exposure test shall be subjected to a Point load and deformation test Detachable logo labels or plates shall be removed for this test E 5 3 1 Test equipment A point load machine capable of recording a minimum reading of 5 Ib 2 2 Kg and suitably motorized to apply loads at a rate of 0 20 to 0 25 in min 5 08 to 6 35 mm min Load application accessories include a 2 in 51 mm diameter steel Tup with a 2 in 0 5 51mm 12mm in spherical nose radius And a 2 in 51 mm diameter x 0 5 in 12mm thick Buna N pad of 60 5 hardness Durometer S
44. H 4 9 1 3 The laboratory shall maintain records to define the quality of data that is generated H 4 9 2 Micropipette calibration H 4 9 2 1 Micropipettes shall be sent to the manufacturer for calibration annually Alternatively a qualified independent technician specializing in micropipette calibration shall be used Documentation on the precision of the recalibrated micropipette shall be obtained from the manufacturer or technician H 4 9 2 2 Internal and external calibration records shall be kept on file in the laboratory s QA logbook H 4 9 2 3 If a micropipette calibration problem is suspected the laboratory shall tare an empty weighing boat on the analytical balance and pipette the following volumes of reagent water into the weigh boat H18 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 using the pipette in question 100 of the maximum dispensing capacity of the micropipette 50 of the capacity and 10 of the capacity If the weight of the water records within 1 of the desired weight mL the pipette shall be acceptable for use H 4 9 2 4 If the weight of the reagent water is outside the acceptable limits the manufacturer s instruction manual troubleshooting section shall be consulted and the steps described in H 4 9 2 3 shall be repeated If problems with the pipette persist the laboratory shall send the pipette to the manufacturer for recalibration H 4 10 Analyst verification H 4 10 1 At least once each month in which microscopic examina
45. Manufactured Safety Vacuum Release Systems SVRS for Swimming Pools Spas and Hot Tub ASTM F2409 1 0 Standard Guide for Fences for Non Residential Outdoor Swimming Pools Hot Tubs and Spas ASTM F2699 08 Standard Guide for Fences for Commercial and Public Outdoor Water Spray Play Areas ASTM G154 06 Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials CEC 400 2009 Title 20 California Energy Commission 2009 Appliance Efficiency Regulations DVGW 2006 U V disinfection devices for drinking water supply requirements and testing DVGW W294 1 2 and 3 IAPMO PS 33 2010c Flexible PVC Hose for Pools Hot Tubs Spa and Jetted Bathtubs NFPA 70 Article 30 2005 National Electrical Code NEC NSF ANSI 14 Plastics piping system components and related materials NSF ANSI 42 Drinking water treatment units Aesthetic effects NSF ANSI 51 Food equipment materials NSF ANSI 60 Drinking water treatment chemicals Health effects NSF ANSI 61 Drinking water system components Health effects NSF EPA ETV Generic Protocol for Development of Test Quality Assurance Plans for Ultraviolet UV Reactors 1 California Energy Commission 1516 Ninth St Sacramento CA 95814 lt www energy ca gov gt 12 German Gas and Water Management Union DVGW Bonn Germany lt www dvgw de english pages gt 13 National Fire Protection Association 1 Batterymarch Park Quincy MA 02269 lt
46. NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 F 5 2 F 5 3 Apparatus 5 gal 19 L container stopwatch injection manifold with pressure tap and throttling valve pressure gauge meeting ANSI ASME B40 100 Grade 3A specifications and sized to yield the measurement within 25 to 75 of scale pump capable of delivering sufficient back pressure and scale accurate to 0 01 Ib 0 005 kg Water temperature pid swimming pools hot tubs spas water temperature 75 5 F 24 3 C 102 5 F 39 3 C All feeders except those labeled to be for swimming pools only shall be tested at the spa hot tub water temperature F 5 4 Method NOTE The method described here is primarily intended for the testing of high flow peristaltic pumps Some modification may be required when evaluating other types of mechanical feeder designs including those whose feed rates are not continuous over the course of operation Modifications may be made so that the intent of the method is maintained a Assemble the mechanical chemical feeder in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions and set it to deliver 100 of its capacity b Attach the mechanical chemical feeder discharge line to the injection manifold c Fill the 5 gal 19 L container with water conditioned to the temperature specified in Annex F section F 5 3 Place the container on the scale and position the mechanical chemical feeder even with the water level in the container
47. R13 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 substance is available to be utilized in assessing the acceptability of the estimated swimming pool chemical exposure If a published and peer reviewed risk assessment is not currently available for the chemical being assessed the Total Allowable Concentration TAC values as contained in NSF ANSI 60 and NSF ANSI 61 may be utilized if available by converting the TAC value into a mg kg day rate by incorporating default body weight and drinking water consumption assumptions 70 kg and 2 L respectively U S EPA 2012 The resulting mg kg day rate may be compared with the estimated total systemic exposure all exposure routes to determine acceptance unless the endpoint of concern identified is a local effect If an NSF ANSI 60 61 TAC value or other published risk assessment value is unavailable a risk assessment for the specific chemical constituent or contaminant may be conducted in accordance with the procedures outlined in Annex R 6 4 H an NSF ANSI 60 61 TAC value or other published risk assessment value is unavailable and there is insufficient toxicity data from which a risk assessment may be performed in accordance with Annex R 6 4 the chemical exposure cannot be assessed and presence of the chemical in the formulation is precluded at a concentration greater than 10 ug L at or below the maximum recommended dose R 6 2 Utilization of published risk assessment Evaluation of
48. Skimmers may be installed in public swimming pools on the basis of 500 IC 46 5 m of water surface area per unit or fraction thereof for residential swimming pools on the basis of 800 ft 74 4 m of water surface area per unit or fraction thereof or for spas or hot tubs on the basis of 100 ft 9 3 m of surface area or fraction thereof Where unusual shapes of pools are encountered special consideration should be given to the number of skimmers used The required skimmers should be distributed to ensure effective skimming of the entire surface Their location should also take into consideration the pool spa or hot tub shape prevailing winds and circulation patterns in the pool spa or hot tub Return inlets should be sized to provide an inlet velocity of at least 10 ft 8 m per second for good mixing and proper dispersal of return water Return inlets should provide circulation patterns toward skimmers to improve surface drift Skimmers should be built into the pool spa or hot tub walls with no protrusions beyond the face except for the faceplate or above the deck The throat of flap type weirs should not be narrower than the skimming weir Skimmers should be accurately positioned to ensure that the average operating water level occurs at the midpoint of weir operating range Piping for skimmers should have a minimum capacity of 80 for public and 50 for residential pools spas or hot tubs of the required filter flow and it should
49. The sampling depth shall 12 6 inches 30 15 cm below the water surface H 3 Ozone production test This test is to verify the ozone concentration and output rate of an ozone generator H7 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 H 3 1 Analytical equipment test setup Test Apparatus All material in direct contact with the feed gas and ozone gas shall be impervious to moisture permeation and resistant to ozone degradation H 3 1 1 Analytical devices All analytical devices shall be calibrated using accepted calibration procedures such as those published by the International Ozone Association IOA for high concentration ozone analyzers An ultraviolet UV absorption ozone concentration analyzer as described in Guideline for Measurement of Ozone Concentration in the Process Gas from an Ozone Generator Ozone Science and Engineering 18 3 209 229 1996 shall be utilized H 3 1 2 Feed gas flow meters Test apparatus flow meters shall be accurate within 5 at the measured flow rate The measured feed gas flow rate shall be corrected to standard pressure and temperature one Atm 14 7 psi and 68 F 20 C Gas flow correction factor is Qs Q x P2 Py x T2 T Where Q Observed flow meter reading temperature and pressure calibrated at 1 Atm and 68 F 20 CH Q Actual feed gas flow corrected for temperature and pressure P Standard atmospheric pressure 14 7 psi P Actual pressure 14 7 pressure in psi inside th
50. These materials are recommended for use with dry gas with a maximum temperature of 104 F 40 C Alternate materials may be used for ozone generators if material compatibility is demonstrated see section 13 18 Life test The material supplier shall provide documentation of compatibility 13 9 1 For use of alternate materials at a minimum the supplier shall confirm compatibility with end use Other materials may be used for construction of ozone generators if proper material compatibility is demonstrated Acceptable documentation shall include component material manufacturer s compatibility charts or written warranty statement Ozone resistant materials not in Tables 13 9 2 and 13 9 3 shall be tested in accordance with annex G section G 1 42 2015 NSF 13 9 2 Components and piping NSF ANSI 50 2015 NOTE Abbreviations for components piping gasket and seals are in accordance with ASTM D4000 Ozone Gas Ozone Gas lt 2500 ppm gt 2500 ppm Glass X X Ceramics X X PVC X NR CPVC X NR UPVC unplasticized X NR Aluminum x X 4 wt max 304L stainless steel X X 316L stainless steel X X Superalloys such as Inconel and Hastelloy C X X Titanium X X Perfluoroalkoxy resin PFA such as Teflon or equivalent X X Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene FEP such as Teflon or equivalent X X Polytetra
51. Turnover Turnover will vary depending on classification of pool spa or hot tub bathing load and use in the following ranges heavily used public pools not more than 6 h other public pools not more than 8 h residential pools not more than 12h public spas or hot tubs not more than 30 min and residential spas or hot tubs not more than 1 h M 1 2 Pumps Pumps should be selected to meet design flow backwash rates under use conditions including sufficient reserve head to overcome friction losses in piping and appurtenances through which the water flows after discharge from the pump in returning to the pool spa or hot tub In installations of one to three units pump characteristics are usually determined by design backwash requirements M 1 3 Gauges and flow rate indicators Pressure gauges with an appropriate range should be provided on the effluent and influent lines of all filter systems A flow rate indicator with an appropriate range should be provided for public pools spas or hot tubs A flow rate controller is recommended for public pool spa or hot tub systems M 1 4 Location Filters should be readily accessible for cleaning operation maintenance and servicing Tanks should be positioned for adequate air circulation underneath and on all sides if necessary to reduce corrosion and permit cleaning When filters are buried they should be protected against corrosion and installed acco
52. X2 1 of ASTM G154 for a period of 750 h see Annex E section E 5 2 The sample shall experience no crazing cracking or geometrical deformation 9 5 2 2 Skimmer covers that pass the UV exposure test shall be tested for structural integrity in accordance with E 5 3 A skimmer cover shall not deflect more than 0 35 in 9 0 mm permanently deform crack or lose material exclusive of plating or finish when subjected to a point load of 300 Ib 5 Ib 136 kg 2 2 kg 9 5 2 3 Requirement for evaluation of exposed ridges After all structural testing is completed the covers shall be evaluated for exposed ridges Ridges shall be considered exposed when open to the atmosphere Exposed ridges shall conform to 9 5 3 9 5 3 Skimmer cleanability 9 5 3 1 The cover shall be designed to be easily cleanable Covers with interior exposed structural ridges shall conform to the following Non exposed structural ridges are exempt from 9 5 3 1 1 9 5 3 1 2 and 9 5 3 1 3 9 5 3 1 1 Ridges with a height of less than 1 4 in 0 25 in 6 4 mm are exempt from radius or fillet requirements 9 5 3 1 2 Ridges with a height greater than or equal to in shall have a minimum radius of 4 in 0 25 in 6 4 mm or provide a 135 degree 4 in 0 25 in 6 4 mm fillet at the base of the ridges See figure 1 9 5 3 1 3 Ridges forming an open box triangle or any shape shall not have a depth greater than the internal width of the shape 9 6 Trimmer valves Trimmer v
53. all published risk assessments shall include review of the written risk assessment document and a determination of whether additional toxicity data exists that was not considered in the assessment If additional toxicity data are identified that were not considered in the risk assessment the risk assessment shall be updated in accordance with Annex R section R 6 4 The following shall be documented when utilizing an existing risk assessment the source of the risk assessment identification and discussion of any data not addressed by the assessment and comparison and contrast of the existing risk assessment to the requirements of Annex R section R 6 4 with respect to selection of uncertainty factors or other assumptions R 6 2 1 Evaluation of multiple published risk assessments When multiple published assessments are available for a chemical being assessed the available assessments shall be reviewed and a rationale shall be provided for the selection of the assessment considered to be the most appropriate for the evaluation of human exposure to recreational water treatment chemicals Factors used to determine the appropriate assessment shall include but not be limited to the following completeness and currency of the data review of each assessment technical competence of the organization s that sponsored the assessment and species and route s of exposure for which the assessment was performed When multiple p
54. and or contami nants that exceed the 10 ug L threshold at or below the maximum recommended dose require additional evaluation as described below R5 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 R 5 Swimming pool exposure assessment methodology R 5 1 General requirements For chemical concentrations in the pool water that exceed 10 ug L at or below the maximum recommend ed dose an exposure assessment shall be performed as detailed in Annex R section R 5 For chemicals present in swimming pools there is the potential for post application dermal oral and inhalation expo sures To address potential systemic effects associated with dermal inhalation and incidental oral expo sures exposures are estimated using equations from U S EPA SWIMODEL software 2003a U S EPA SWIMMODEL software was developed as a screening tool to conduct exposure assessments of pesti cides found in swimming pools and spas It utilizes screening exposure assessment equations to calcu late the high end exposure for swimmers expressed as a mass based intake value mg event NOTE Depending on the properties of the specific chemical being assessed available toxicity data and sound scientific judgment determination of the contribution of inhalation or dermal exposures to the total exposure dose may not be required Inhalation Chemical properties to consider when assessing the contribution of inhalation exposure include but are not limited to volatility water solu
55. applied dose was reported in terms of mass per unit area i e g cm a film thickness approach shall be used to calculate the exposure in terms of g cm as shown in the following equation Exposure Cw x FT Where Exposure Chemical concentration on skin exposed to treated pool water ug cm Cw Chemical concentration in pool water mg L ug cm FT Film thickness of water on the skin cm R9 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Assumptions Cw Chemical concentration in pool water mg L ug cm is chemical specific and based on label rates FT The film thickness of water on the skin of 0 0049 cm is based on the value EFAST users manual U S EPA 2007 NOTE Identical exposures for adults and children and competitive and non competitive swimmers are as sumed because the exposure duration is not a factor considered when using the film thickness approach R 5 4 Swimming pool oral exposures R 5 4 1 The following equation is taken from U S EPA SWIMODEL software 2003a and shall be used to calcu late post application short term oral exposures PDD CwxIRxET BW Where PDD Potential daily dose mg kg day Cw Chemical concentration in pool water mg L IgR Ingestion rate of pool water L hr ET Exposure time hrs day BW Body weight kg Cw Chemical concentration in pool water mg L is chemical specific and based on label rates Table R3 Assumptions for short term swimming pool o
56. are modified by addition or omission of known amounts of chemical The concentration or value of the test solution is verified by approved analytical methods and the results compared to the WQTD result WQTD s with fixed working ranges such as indicator strips or color comparators will be tested at three points within the working range specified by the manufacturer s instructions One test is near the low end of the range one near the middle and one near the high end The lowest and highest concentrations tested shall be at least one increment of measure for that test system away from the operating range minimum and maximum WAQTD s with theoretically very wide ranges such as titration kits shall be checked at one point below and one point above the optimum concentration for each parameter 0 1 1 2 Temperature for the test solution Unless otherwise noted the solutions for testing shall be at 80 2 F 27 1 C and 102 2 F 39 1 C If a manufacturer only claims functionality for one temperature testing may be conducted at just that temperature and testing and listing noted as such Otherwise testing shall be conducted at both solution temperatures due to specific water chemistry parameters and product related variables having an impact on results Test solution temperature shall be maintained throughout each test of aWQTD 0 1 1 3 Synthetic pool water characteristics Unless otherwise noted testing at the following wate
57. as determined by computational fluid dynamics modeling including intensity and flow modeling 2 test the unit with the lowest power to highest flow rate 3 test one unit of each configuration if family range contains U and S reactors test each 4 test one unit of each UV lamp type if alternate lamp types or suppliers test each or 5 test one unit of each UV sensor type if alternate UV sensor types or suppliers test each NOTE The above variables require that multiple UV systems are tested in order to validate a range of products 14 18 2 Testing Products shall be tested to confirm single pass inactivation equivalent to 3 log 99 9 or greater of Cryptosporidium parvum in accordance with NSF EPA ETV Generic Protocol for Development of Test Quality Assurance Plans for Ultraviolet UV Reactors Only full stream testing shall be acceptable there shall be no partial or side stream treatment testing The manufacturer of a reactor validated for performance under one of the following protocols shall submit details of the testing for evaluation and validation 50 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 1 US EPA UV DGM 2 DVGW W 294 Parts 1 3 or 3 ONorm 5873 1 and 2 Validation of a range of reactors with pre existing test data shall include testing of at least one 1 unit at one 1 set point to evaluate for potential changes in design suppliers and corroborate previous data 15 In line electrolytic chlorinator or b
58. at the hot tubs spa temperature C 1 4 Performance curve verification method a Pump shall be installed and operated according to the manufacturer s instructions The manufacturer shall state the inlet conditions under which the published performance curves were established and barometric pressure b Air leaks shall be avoided in the suction line Piping shall be clean and free of scale burrs etc c The suction pipe end shall be submerged a distance of at least ten pipe diameters Liquid around the suction pipe shall be relatively quiet without entrained air swirls etc from recirculated discharge d The suction and discharge gauge manometer lines shall be purged so that the suction gauge line is free of water and the discharge gauge line is free of air C1 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 e The test shall be conducted with normal rated voltage 10 at motor terminals f The connection pipe shall be the same size as the pump suction and discharge tappings A minimum of ten pipe diameters shall precede the gauges a minimum of five pipe diameters shall follow the gauges g Discharge pressures shall be measured by a gauge or manometer to obtain results accurate to 0 25 psi 3 kPa The vacuum shall be measured by a manometer or gauge to obtain results accurate to 0 5 in 12 mm of mercury h Readings shall be taken at the center line of the pump impeller or corrected to the center line i The total dynamic
59. being circulated into the body of water Circulation patterns and speeds within the pool spa or wave pool If the pump speed is reduced or turned off to save electrical energy there is a decreased or elimination of filtration and introduction of disinfectant into the water When the pump speed is increased or turned on chlorine demand may be increased If the disinfectant level falls below that which is required by the local jurisdiction having authority the operator may need to manually add disinfectant and other adjustment chemicals to quickly adjust the water chemistry levels to meet the requirement J 5 1 1 1 Sizing a pool chlorinator system Chlorine chemical generators and feeders for pool chlorinator systems should be capable of supplying no less than 3 Ibs 1 4 Kg of chlorine per day per 10 000 gal 37 8 KL J2 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 J 5 1 1 2 Sizing a spa chlorinator system Chlorine chemical generators and feeders for spa chlorinator systems should be capable of supplying no less than 3 Ibs 1 4 Kg of chlorine per day per 1 000 gal 3 8 KL J 5 2 Installation Due to the varied designs available it is difficult to provide general installation guidelines The system should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions and state and local regulatory agency regulations To avoid the release of chlorine gas or potential equipment corrosion it is important to protect the system from los
60. damage The fitting shall show no signs of damage such as cracking component separation or loss of material Fittings that do not close are not subject to the pressure testing above When polymeric materials are used to make fittings for use in outdoor pool and spa applications they shall undergo UV exposure in accordance with ASTM G154 for UV resistance and 70 strength requirements of section 3 as referenced in ANSI APS 16 When polymeric material products are 75 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 offered in multiple colors with the highest and lowest colorant loading of colorant within the formulation shall be tested If colorants are used at differing percentages within the formulations test both the highest and lowest colorant loading levels as well as the lightest and darkest colors The worst case recorded values shall be used for all further tests and calculations Fittings that are only rated for indoor use or fittings that do not protrude more than 1 2 in need not comply with the UV exposure requirements NOTE Manufactured sumps and other assembly components that are not exposed to natural UV radiation when fully assembled and installed according to the manufacturer s instruction are not to be included in the Ultraviolet Light Exposure Test Products shall comply with the pull load requirements of ANSI APSP 16 Products shall comply with the finger and limb entrapment requirements of ANSI APSP 16
61. eeecaaee teste eee eecaaaeeeeeeeeeeeecaaaeeeeeeeeenee 51 Ke E le nt 51 15 5 Performance INGICAtON et sescesesavedennenssaveeeesus vaunt sa esvaveus vanes sneseneeassuaus i rap least agen setae 51 15 6 Operation and installation instructions 51 1027 M EE E EE 52 15 9 Valve and component identification 52 15 10 Operating temperatures and pressures tees eee eeecaaeeeeeeeeeteeeaaeeeeeeeeeneee 52 15 11 Operational protection issues 52 15 12 Chemical resistant materials 53 T59 EIDA Eeer 53 15 14 Pressure requirements ie 53 vii 20 15 15 Uteieet E AEE A 53 15 16 Salt level sise 53 15 17 Head loss sise 53 Brine batch type electrolytic chlorine or bromine generators sssesssseseessssesssrrrrrssssrrrrrrnesssssrnnns 53 16 41 General eiet aa eee eat re aa ahaaa a ibenetret ete de canne tte dudit ENNEN 53 10 22 CICANADINTV EE 53 16 3 Design pressure pressure vessels cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaee teste eeeeecaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeetenee 54 10 4 FIQW ME EE rene esters AE deed egeegede edeg 54 16 5 Performance indication sise 54 16 6 Operation and installation instructions 54 EE RE Wel EN rare er a Ms enr 54 16 8 Valve and component identification 55 16 9 Operating conditions MN 55 16 10 Injection methods Ne 55 16 11 Operational protection Sn 55 16 12 Chemical resistant materials 55 16 13 Output rate CO nd isisscccccscessssseneeennee 55 16 15 Life test 2 NN iii 56
62. f Repeat d and e at 50 of the output rate control mechanism setting G3 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 g Calculate the net output concentration at each sampling interval by subtracting the influent concentration from the effluent concentration Convert the net output concentration to the units with which the manufacturer specifies the output rate for the feeder h Calculate the average output rate for both the 50 and 100 tests i Calculate the individual sample variance 6 of each output rate from the average output rate F for the 50 and 100 tests where nr Individual Sample Variance 6 x 100 j Calculate the average of the absolute values of the variances from average 6 where abs 6 Average Absolute Variance A 3 Es Do this for both the 50 and 100 tests Example Results Variance from Average 1105 g hr Sample 1 984 g hr 11 0 Sample 2 1135 g hr 2 71 Sample 3 1081 g hr 2 17 Sample 4 1189 g hr 7 60 Sample 5 1135 g hr 2 71 Avg Variance 11 0 2 71 2 17 7 60 2 71 5 4 24 G 3 4 2 Acceptance criteria Z abs 5 Average Absolute Variance A 5 and A lt 10 G 3 4 2 1 At each test setting of the output rate control mechanism individual output rates shall be within 20 of the manufacturer s claim Individual Sample Output Deviation cames x 100 and s lt 20 Lost SEE claimed
63. for adequate air circulation underneath and on all sides if necessary to reduce corrosion and permit cleaning When filters are buried they should be protected against corrosion and installed according to the manufacturer s recommendations L 1 5 Multiple unit installations If more than one filter is needed to provide the required flow rate filters should be installed in parallel Each filter should provide at least 20 of the total L 2 Operation and maintenance For maximum performance to be obtained from a diatomite type filter several factors should be monitored L 2 1 Filter aid The correct grade of filter aid is an important factor Too fine a material will remove suspended particles but will shorten the filter cycle Too coarse a grade of filter aid will allow small particles to pass through and with a small orifice septum the particles may become enmeshed and be difficult to remove by normal cleaning The grade of filter aid should be consistent with the type and size of suspended matter being removed degree of clarity required and length of filter run desired L 2 2 Flow rate Flow rate through the diatomite type filter determines the total output Too high a flow rate will reduce filter runs disproportionately The opposite is true of lower filter rates Slurry or body feeding may permit an increase by breaking up or diluting removed particles L 2 3 Routine cleaning Regular and thorough cleaning of the filter is necessary
64. for maintenance of a pool spa or hot tub This will result in labor savings extended life of equipment and water clarity The following should be routine a Clean all strainers regularly particularly before and after the pool is vacuum cleaned and before the filter is cleaned b Lubricate the pump and motor according to the manufacturer s recommendations c Keep the pump shaft and valve stem packings in good condition d Annually inspect the filter elements and the inside of the filter tank and make any necessary repairs or adjustments e Repair leaks immediately f Protect surfaces from corrosion by painting or cleaning them regularly g Clean the filter and filter elements regularly and thoroughly following the manufacturer s instructions h Inspect and clean the air relief system regularly L2 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Annex M informative Sand type filters recommendations for installation and operation This is not a basic part of the Standard nor the responsibility of the manufacturer For proper results the following limitations should be considered in overall hydraulic design of the pool spa or hot tub Sand type filters fabricated according to this Standard will perform satisfactorily when installed and connected according to the manufacturer s recommendations Installation and operation should comply with the applicable state and local laws and regulations M 1 Recommended installation M 1 1
65. from Barnes et al 1995 R 2 17 reference dose RfD An estimated with uncertainty spanning perhaps an order of magnitude of a daily oral exposure to the human population including sensitive subgroups that is likely to be without an appreciable risk of deleterious effects during a lifetime It can be derived from a NOAEL LOAEL or benchmark dose with uncertainty factors generally applied to reflect limitations of the data used General ly used in EPA s non cancer health assessments Durations include acute short term subchronic and chronic and are defined individually in this glossary U S EPA 2011a R 2 18 regulated substance A substance for which a quantitative human health risk assessment has been performed and utilized in promulgation of a statutory concentration limit for drinking water R3 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 R 2 19 short term exposure level STEL A maximum concentration of a contaminant that is permitted for an acute exposure R 2 20 total allowable concentration TAC The maximum concentration of a non regulated contami nant allowed in a public drinking water supply R 2 21 toxicodynamics Variations in the inherent sensitivity of a species or individual to chemical induced toxicity resulting from differences in host factors that influence the toxic response of a target or gan to a specified dose TERA 1996 R 2 22 toxicokinetics Variations in absorption distribution metabolism and excret
66. ft downstream from the ozone generator system mainline remix if applicable point see location B figure H2 Take an influent sample at location A in figure H2 f A fourth effluent sample shall be collected directly downstream of the ozone generator system prior to being introduced to the mainline see location C in figure H2 g To concentrate the oocysts for processing the water samples shall be transferred to 250 ml concial centrifuge tubes and centrifuged for 15 minutes at 2000 x g The supernatant shall be aspirat ed by vacuum The pellet shall be re suspended in deionized water and purified by immunomagnetic separation IMS Oocysts shall be triggered for infectivity by incubation in trypsin h Cryptosporidium oocysts shall be inoculated onto HCT 8 cell monolayers in 8 well chamber glass cell culture slides and incubated in a 5 CO atmosphere at 98 6 F 37 C for 48 hr Viable Cryptosporidium shall be enumerated by the Foci Detection Most Probable Number Method with following modifications Briefly cell monolayers were fixed and stained with fluorescent labeled antibody specific for the reproductive stages of the Cryptosporidium lifecycle specifically sporozoites Infectious foci were observed by UV epifluroescence microscopy Individual wells were scored as positive or negative for infections and results are calculated using a most probable number MPN statistical analysis Results were reported as MPN of infectious oocys
67. hazard may be expressed A characterization of the expression of such effects shall also be included as well as the consideration of the substance s apparent mode of action R16 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 R 6 4 1 1 Data requirements for quantitative risk assessment Toxicity testing requirements for the quantitative risk assessment procedure are defined in Annex R Ta ble R7 A minimum data set consisting of a gene mutation assay a chromosomal aberration assay and a subchronic toxicity study shall be required for the performance of a quantitative risk assessment The re quired studies and preferred criteria are defined in Annex R Table R4 Modifications to the minimum data set shall be permitted when well supported by peer reviewed scientific judgment and rationale NOTE Modifications may include but are not limited to acceptance of studies using alternate routes of exposure alternate assays of genetic toxicity and supplemental studies other than those specified Required studies additional studies and available supplemental studies shall be reviewed in order to per form a quantitative risk estimation in accordance with Annex R 6 4 2 Additional studies for the evaluation of reproductive and developmental toxicity as specified in Annex R Table R2 shall be required to be reviewed when results of the required minimum data set studies and any supplemental studies indicate toxicity to the reproductive or endocrine ti
68. indicator temperature V1 ingicator test section test specimen aux port check for leakage Figure D2 3 way valve differential pressure leakage test D11 NSF ANSI 50 2015 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 test section test specimen aux port aux port check for leakage check for leakage Figure D3 Valve differential pressure leakage test D12 2015 NSF differential pressure indicator Seel ene waste port check for leakage test section test specimen filter specimen pressure indicator differential pressure indicator Figure D4 Backwash valve differential pressure leakage test on simulated filter D13 NSF ANSI 50 2015 2015 NSF temperature return to pool port check for leakage Sa I test section test specimen lt filtertank adjustable Ap I 1 1 1 1 H differential pressure ndicator Figure D5 Backwash valve differential pressure leakage test on symulated filter tank D14 NSF ANSI 50 2015 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 differential pressure indicator temperature V1 nd Dr waste port check for leakage test section test specimen filter tank adjustable Ap Figure D6 Backwash valve differential pressure leakage test on empty filter tank
69. life within specified use ranges 19 2 1 Temperature of room used for testing Testing shall be conducted at laboratory ambient air temperature and humidity with the stock and test solutions noted in Annex O 19 2 2 Temperature of solution used for testing The WQTD shall be tested at one or both solution temperatures of pool and spa as noted in Annex O section O 1 1 2 and based upon the manufacturer s recommendation 19 2 3 Test parameters For each parameter tested it shall meet the applicable requirements in annex O The WQTD shall be used to analyze test solutions within each range shown annex O see table below if the parameter falls within the WQTDs operating range for that parameter Test solutions shall be divided equally to test the WQTD three times at each concentration for each unit of the WQTD under test All test points shall be used to determine accuracy and the three test results shall be averaged to determine compliance with annex O for that parameter The data points for each unit shall determine repeatability data shall be compared between units to determine reproducibility 62 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Parameter Annex O accuracy level Test solution table pH 0 12 1 Table O 1 Chlorine 0 122 Free Table 0 2 free and combined See Combined Table 0 3 Bromine free and total 0 12 3 Table 0 4 Hardness 0 12 4 Table O 5 Total Alkalinity 0 12 5 Table 0 6 Cyanuric Acid 0
70. min m hr through the feeder Y bid kg d chemical output the chemical feeder shall be supplied with a flow indicating device or instructions for installing such a device for the full range of flow rates specified by the manufacturer 11 7 3 Head loss The manufacturer shall make available a head loss claim at the maximum and minimum settings for systems installed in the main line The actual head loss shall not exceed the claimed head loss by more than 10 11 8 Operation and installation instructions The manufacturer shall supply the following operation and installation instructions with each flow through chemical feeder diagrams and a parts list to facilitate the identification and ordering of replacement parts 38 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 installation operation and maintenance instructions model number of the unit caution statement to address potentially hazardous conditions due to chemical overdosing see 11 6 and caution statements regarding the recommended use chemicals prominently displayed 11 9 Data plate The data plate on flow through chemical feeders shall be permanent easy to read and securely attached cast or stamped onto the feeder at a location readily accessible after installation The data plate shall contain the following information manufacturer s name and contact information address phone number website or prime supplier feeder model serial num
71. normalized extraction concentration of a potential contaminant shall not exceed the Total Acceptable Concentration TAC established by NSF ANSI 61 The color rating of the extraction water as determined in accordance with APHA Standard Method 2120B shall not exceed that of the exposure water control Certification listings and manufacturer s literature for swimming pool materials excluding components and devices shall contain surface area to volume restrictions associated with the evaluation A3 This page is intentionally left blank 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 B 1 B 1 Annex B normative Test methods for the evaluation of filters NOTE The test conditions specified in this annex are not intended to represent recommended field use conditions Hydrostatic pressure test pressure service filters 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to verify the hydrostatic integrity of a pressure service filter tank B 1 B 1 B 1 2 Apparatus a pressure testing rig capable of delivering and regulating hydrostatic pressure on a filter tank temperature indicating device required accuracy 2 F 1 C timer required accuracy 0 5 s and pressure gauges sized to yield the measurement within 25 to 75 of full scale required accuracy 2 of reading or 1 psi 7 KPA whichever is greater Electronic transducers may be used for recording test data Transducers shall meet the ac
72. not be less that 20 gom 75 6 LPM per skimmer In pools spas or hot tubs having capacities of less than 16 000 gal 60 480 L and surface areas of less than 500 ft 46 5 m flow rates should not be reduced even if the total turnover period of the pool spa or hot tub is shortened In multiple installations each skimmer should not be individually adjustable for flow Single skimmers without integral trimmer valves should be installed to facilitate the balancing of flow between the skimmer and the main outlet Strainer baskets when provided should be cleaned regularly for proper performance Clogged baskets impair the flow and free action of the weir resulting in nonperformance Skimmer weirs should be checked routinely for attachment to housing and proper action Direct addition of acids alum chlorine solution or powders and other chemicals may corrode valves tanks screens and other metal parts of skimmers and related circulation components and should not be performed 2 The information contained in this Annex is not part of this American National Standard ANS and has not been processed in accordance with ANSI s requirements for an ANS Therefore this Annex may contain material that has not been subjected to public review or a consensus process In addition it does not contain requirements necessary for conformance to the Standard 30 This subject is currently under review by the American Public Health Association APHA J
73. obtained that allows for the identification of all unique chemical components of the product as well as the concentrations of each component Additionally the maximum recommend dose rate of the product shall be provided Based on formulation information and label or use instructions the concentration of each swimming pool treatment chemical and or contaminants in the swimming pool water following dosing at the maximum recommended dose rate shall be calculated As an initial toxicity screening evaluation any chemical constituent or contaminant in the product formu lation that has a concentration in the swimming pool water of lt 10 ug L at the maximum recommended dose does not require further toxicology evaluation This threshold value shall not apply to any substance for which available toxicity data and sound scientific judgment indicate a significant increase in risk for an adverse health effect at a swimming pool water concentration at or below 10 ug L All chemical constitu ents or contaminants that exceed the 10 ug L threshold at or below the maximum recommended dose require additional evaluation For chemical constituents or contaminants with concentrations in the swimming pool water that exceed 10 ug L at or below the maximum recommended dose and exposure assessment shall be performed uti lizing equations and assumptions described in Annex R section 5 Following the determination of exposure levels in mg kg day for chemical c
74. of average cake density and average D Arcy permeability shall be within 10 for density and 20 for permeability of the manufacturer s claim B8 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Permeability Test Setup Graduated permeability cylinder Vacuum source or pump Vacuum relief valve Vacuum gauge Location of filter paper Vacuum flask Figure B 1 Permeability test set up B9 This page is intentionally left blank 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 C 1 C 1 Annex C normative Test methods for the evaluation of centrifugal pumps NOTE The test conditions specified in this annex are not intended to represent recommended field use conditions Performance curve verification 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to verify the accuracy of the manufacturer s pump performance curve as required in 6 6 C 1 C 1 2 Apparatus pressure indicating device e g mercury manometer vacuum indicating device pressure gauges meeting ANSI ASME B40 100 Grade 3A specifications and sized to yield the measurement within 25 to 75 of scale turbidimeter scaled in nephelometric turbidity units NTU variac electrical supply system and flow meter 3 Test conditions swimming pool hot tubs spa water temperature 75 10 F 24 6 C 102 5 F 39 3 C turbidity lt 15 NTU lt 15 NTU Pumps except those labeled to be for swimming pools only shall be tested
75. or other obstructions that create an entanglement hazard e g a ladder that stands off from the wall a few inches where entrapment could occur in the bathing area Spas marked as indoor use only shall have the exterior surfaces of spa sealed to prevent leakage or splashing of spa water into the mechanical equipment areas in accordance with ANSI UL 1563 Water exposure test section 54 2 Splashing and 54 3 Seal test 20 4 2 Accessibility Water and air circulation system components including pumps motors blowers and filters shall be accessible for inspection maintenance repair and or replacement 20 4 3 Spa shell or tub 20 4 3 1 Surface material strength and slip resistance Plastic activity spa shells comply with the following requirements ANSI Z124 1 2 section 5 2 Stain resistance and ANSI Z124 7 Section 4 3 Surface testing Section 4 4 Subsurface testing Section 5 1 Colorfastness testing Section 5 2 Wear and cleanability Section 5 3 Cigarette test Section 5 4 Chemical resistance Section 6 1 2 Hydrostatic load requirements Section 6 2 Empty unity loading test Section 6 3 Point impact testing upon rim and seat Section 7 1 Flammability UL 94 HB or HBF rating or Section 5 6 Ignition of ANSI JAAPMO Z124 1 2 Section 8 1 Water resistance and Section 8 2 Thermal Shock 65 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 20 4 3 2 Step surfaces
76. pH to 7 0 as measured by the laboratory pH meter f Record the readout of the automated controller sensor and pH meter g Add 1 N sodium hydroxide drop wise until the laboratory pH meter reads a pH between 7 1 and 7 5 Allow the sensor and pH meter to equilibrate and record the readout of the laboratory pH meter Record the readout of the automated controller sensor h Repeat the previous step this time bringing the laboratory pH meter reading to a pH between 7 5 and 8 0 Again record the readouts i Repeat the previous step again this time bringing the laboratory pH meter reading to a pH between 8 0 and 8 2 Record the readouts N2 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 N 2 3 1 2 Controller output accuracy a Prepare a sample of test water listed under Annex N section N 2 2 and adjust pH to 7 0 using 1 N sulfuric acid b Attach the sensor under test to the automated controller per manufacturer s instructions c Set the automated controller to a set point of 7 5 d Attach two indicators sized for the appropriate voltage into each output terminal of the automated controller e Place the sensor under test or controller influent tube in the pH 7 0 solution with a total alkalinity range of 80 120 ppm f Record the pH level indicated on the display of the automated controller Record the operation status of the automated controller g Slowly add 1 N sodium hydroxide solution until the controller actuates and recor
77. placed in hood b The cell medium in the chamber slides shall be aspirated and the sample dilution shall be added 10X dilutions 150 uL per well of each dilution shall be pipette in chamber slides 5X dilutions 133 uL per well of each dilution shall be pipette in chamber slides When using six well replicates two negative controls shall be located at bottom of the wells near label c Slides shall be placed in incubator for 90 min d After incubation slides shall be removed from incubator and 4 drops of pre warmed growth medium shall be added to each well using a 10 mL pipette Slides shall be placed in incubator for 48 hr H 4 8 4 Fixing and staining cells H 4 8 4 1 Cell fixing a Slides shall be removed from incubator and medium shall be aspirated b Slides shall be washed with 1 X PBS 0 8 mL of 100 methanol shall be added to each well and left on for 10 min c Methanol shall be aspirated Wells shall be removed using the well removal tools provided NOTE Proceed slowly to avoid breaking slides H 4 8 4 2 Labeling slides with antibodies H 4 8 4 2 1 Blocking Blocking buffer shall be poured over slides Slides shall be rocked at room temperature for 30 min If slides cannot be processed within 24 hours blocking buffer shall be added to completely cover the slides Slides shall be placed on a tray covered with aluminum foil and placed in a 39 F 4 C refrigerator H 4 8 4 2 2 Primary antibody a Block
78. pressures at P1 at 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 and 100 of the maximum design flow rate 1 gpm 3 8 LPM j Using the data generated according to Annex D section D 4 4 1 steps g through i calculate the head loss due to the valve or manufactured manifold at each flow rate according to the equation in step f D 4 4 2 Acceptance criteria The measured head loss through a valve or manufactured manifold itself shall not exceed the manufacturer s published head loss by more than 5 for each published valve operating position s D 5 Waste port leakage test for filter system valves D 5 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to determine the valve or manufactured manifold waste port leakage D 5 2 Apparatus equipment pressure source pressure indicating device meeting ANSI ASME B40 100 Grade 1A specifications measurement within 25 to 75 of scale 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 sight glass assembly thermometer accurate to 1 F 0 5 C and turbidity meter scaled in nephelometric turbidity units NTU D 5 3 Test waters The test waters shall meet the following requirements pid swimming pools hot tubs spas water temperature 75 10 F 24 6 C 102 5 F 39 3 C turbidity lt 15 NTU lt 15 NTU Valves and manufactured manifolds except those labeled to be for swimming pools only shall be tested at the spa hot tub temperature D 5 4 Waste port leakage test me
79. priming pump If the pump is self priming the maximum vertical lift height shall be specified 6 9 2 The proper direction of impeller rotation shall be clearly indicated by an arrow on the data plate on a separate plate or cast onto the pump 6 10 Motors 6 10 1 Motors shall be open drip proof or totally enclosed They shall be constructed electrically and mechanically to perform satisfactorily under the end use conditions 6 10 2 Motors shall be capable of operating a pump under full load with a voltage variation of 10 from data plate rating 6 10 3 Single phase motors with a power rating less than 3 HP 2 24 kW shall have built in thermal overloads to provide locked rotor and running protection All other motors shall have built in thermal overload protection magnetic line starters with overload relays or installation instructions specifying that magnetic line starters with overload relays shall be provided upon installation 6 10 4 Each motor shall have a permanent data plate that contains the following information motor manufacturer s name and contact information address phone number website or prime supplier model number power rating kilowatt or horsepower or both speed voltage frequency phase service factor 27 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 maximum load amps or full load amps service factor amps serial number or date code or bot
80. pump that contain water under pressure shall be capable of withstanding a hydrostatic pressure test at 150 of the working pressure 6 3 Strainers 6 3 1 Strainers shall be designed so that solids will not bypass the strainer basket during normal operation nor drop into the strainer pot when the strainer basket is removed for cleaning 6 3 2 Strainer baskets shall be readily removable and easily cleanable 6 3 3 Openings in the strainer basket shall not exceed 0 05 in 0 3 cm in area 6 3 4 The ratio of the open area in the strainer basket to the cross sectional area of the strainer inlet connection shall be 4 1 or greater The open area in the strainer basket shall be no less than 10 in 65 cm 6 3 5 Strainers with an inlet connection with a nominal pipe size of 1 5 in 38 mm or less shall have a strainer basket with a minimum internal volume of 25 in 410 cm Strainers with an inlet connection with a nominal pipe size of 2 in 51 mm or greater shall have a strainer basket with a minimum internal volume of 90 in 1475 cm 6 3 6 Strainer covers shall be designed to be opened manually and shall have a gasket that creates a tight seal when tightened by hand 25 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 6 3 7 A non integral strainer shall meet the requirements of 7 6 4 Drain plugs A pump shall have sufficient drain holes with plugs to drain the pump housing and strainer body if applicable without disconnection of the pump or i
81. reading at set point f Slowly add 1 N sodium hypochlorite solution until the controller de actuates Record the ORP display on the controller g Slowly add 1 N sodium thiosulfate solution until the controller actuates Record the ORP display on the controller N 2 4 Life test Using a signal generator feed each of the sensors that directly control an output The signal should mimic that of the sensor circuit being tested alternating between a demand for feed for a period of 1 second and off for 9 seconds A resistive load rated at 100 of the manufacturer s rated load shall be connected to each of the automated controller outputs A counter shall measure the number of cycles performed each cycle consists of a complete on off sequence N 2 5 Acceptance criteria N 2 5 1 Monitor display accuracy N 2 5 1 1 pH At each of the four pH points tested the difference between the pH level indicated on the monitor display of the automated controller and the laboratory pH meter reading shall not exceed the tolerance level given in Table 17 1 The pH on the monitor display for each actuation and de actuation shall not vary by more than 0 2 pH units from the average value of each set of actuation and de actuation readings N 2 5 1 2 Chlorine Bromine At each of the four available chlorine concentrations tested the difference between the chlorine or bromine concentration indicated on the monitor display of the automated controller and the concent
82. rodents or other species preferably an oral study in rats The critical study shall be used to calculate a Short Term Exposure Level STEL in accordance with An nex R section R 6 4 4 2 Selection of uncertainty factors for calculation of a STEL shall consider the quality and completeness of the database for assessing potential short term effects Selection of uncertainty factors shall also consid er data that quantify interspecies and intraspecies variations Other parameters that shall be considered in the determination of a STEL include identification of any sensitive subpopulations the potential for ad verse taste and odor and solubility limitations at the calculated STEL A 6 4 4 2 Risk estimation for short term exposure The STEL shall be calculated using the following equation STEL _ _NOAEL or LOAEL mg kg day mg kd day UF NOTE When other than daily dosing was used in the critical study the STEL calculation shall be adjusted to reflect the dosing schedule The calculated STEL shall be rounded to one significant figure Where NOAEL Highest NOAEL for the critical effect in a study of less than or equal to 90 d duration see Annex R section R 5 if an NOAEL is not defined the LOAEL shall be used with a corresponding adjustment to the uncertainty factor see Annex R Table R4 R 7 References American Chemistry Council ACC 2002 An Analysis of the Training Patterns and Practices of Competitive Swimmers P
83. selection and installation operation and maintenance instructions a statement of the manufacturer s warranty applicable caution statements prominently displayed ventilation requirements if applicable cross connection protection if the unit is physically connected to a potable water supply maximum daily operation time if not designed for continuous operation and 47 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 a warning if the potential exists for release of high dosages of substances that may endanger bathers 14 6 2 UV systems claiming inactivation of cysts the installation and operational instructions or product manual shall contain the following 14 7 reactor configuration type U S etc number of lamps per reactor lamp designation or model number sensor designation or model number UVT of water minimum value or a range of UVTs under which validation was performed organism used in testing correlation between test organism and Cryptosporidium parvum effective log inactivation of organism at maximum flow rate or validated flow rates and effective UV dose delivered at specified wavelength and flow rate Data plate Data plate shall be permanent easy to read and securely attached cast or stamped onto the unit at a location readily accessible after normal installation Data plate s shall contain the following equipment name and function s manufacturer s name and contact i
84. shall be evaluated at 100 of the maximum chemical output The output of a flow through chemical feeder shall be within 20 of the output specified by the manufacturer at each test setting of the output rate control mechanism For each test setting the output of the flow through chemical feeder shall be repeatable within 10 when tested in accordance with Annex G section G 3 11 6 Protection against overdosing The manufacturer shall provide printed materials warning the user of the potential for elevated chemical concentrations and hazardous gas introduction into the pool or spa At a minimum the printed materials shall describe the conditions that may result in such potentially hazardous conditions such as backwash and periods of no flow in the recirculation system The steps to be taken during installation and or operation to prevent such conditions shall be included Feeders designed to be self draining shall be exempt from this requirement 11 7 Flow indicating device 11 7 1 Flow through chemical feeders shall be provided with a flow indicating device on the unit or the installation instructions shall provide for the installation of a flow indicating device for the full range of flow rates Flow through chemical feeders operated by an automated controller shall be exempt from this requirement 11 7 2 When the chemical output of a flow through chemical feeder is specified relative to the flow rate of water through the feeder i e X gal
85. tested at the spa hot tub water temperature F 4 4 Method a Assemble three feeders according to the manufacturer s instructions b Connect the feeders to a recirculating tank filled with water conditioned to the applicable temperatures specified in Annex F section F 4 3 Adjust the pressure source to obtain an injection head manifold pressure that is 80 0 5 of the maximum rated pressure Set the output rate to deliver the maximum rated output specified by the manufacturer c Start the feeders and allow them to operate continually for a period of 3000 h Maintain the feeders in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions except for parts replacement Tubing in a peristaltic feeder may be replaced every 500 h or at 120 of the rated life expectancy whichever is greater F 4 5 Acceptance criteria At least one of the three mechanical chemical feeders shall complete 3000 satisfactory operating hours and a minimum of 8000 satisfactory operating hours shall be accumulated among the three units At the conclusion of the testing the units shall perform as intended by the manufacturer and shall continue to conform to the uniformity of output requirements in Annex F section F 5 F 5 Uniformity of output test F 5 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to verify that the chemical delivery rates of mechanical feeders are consistent with delivery rates claimed by the manufacturer at the various feed rate indicator settings F4 2015
86. the feeder requiring cleaning and maintenance shall be accessible 11 2 Chemical resistance Flow through chemical feeders exposed to the applicable chemicals per Annex G section G 1 for a test period of 100 d shall show no signs of erosion or structural deformation 11 3 Hydrostatic pressure Flow through chemical feeders shall show no evidence of rupture leakage burst or permanent deformation when subjected to a hydrostatic pressure 1 5 times the manufacturer s maximum pressure rating see Annex G section G 2 37 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 11 4 Motors Motors if provided shall be continuous duty and shall conform to the requirements of Article 430 of NFPA 70 NEC 11 5 Output rate 11 5 1 The flow through chemical feeder shall have an output rate control mechanism that is adjustable in at least four increments over the full operating range The mechanism for regulating the output rate shall be readily accessible when the feeder is installed in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Chemical feeders designed for one output rate or intended for use with a separate automated controller shall be exempt from this requirement 11 5 2 The uniformity of output for a flow through chemical feeder shall be tested and evaluated at settings of the output rate control mechanism equivalent to 50 and 100 of the rate of maximum chemical output recommended by the manufacturer Chemical feeders designed for one output rate
87. the inlet water temperature of 122 F 50 C is acceptable per ANSI UL 1563 20 7 2 Temperature limits The temperature control system when used or integrated into a spa shall be in conformance with ANSI UL 1563 including requirements for limiting the water at the inlet to the tub to a maximum of 104 F 50 C and tolerance at the maximum temperature setting of not more than 5 F 3 C 20 7 3 Temperature display The temperature control system when used or integrated into a spa shall be in conformance with ANSI UL 1568 including requirements for a display in one degree increments F or C reflecting the spa water temperature This display shall be located on the top surface or side of the spa and shall be readily 71 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 visible to persons prior to entry The display shall conform to ANSI UL 1563 Section 35 4 2 display toler ances of 2 F 1 C 20 7 4 Heater The heater shall be stable and stationary after plumbing and electrical connections are completed The minimum clearances to combustible materials as specified by the heater manufacturer shall be main tained All electric heaters and system components shall meet the requirements of this Standard and ANSI UL 1261 20 8 Sanitation and treatment systems 20 8 1 Water sanitation via chlorine and bromine Water sanitation in the spa shall be accomplished using chemicals registered by the United States Envi ronmental Prote
88. throat and no entrained air observed in suction line close the drain valve and record the water level in the tank E 2 5 Acceptance criteria The difference between the maximum water level and the minimum water level at which the skimmer functions shall be at least 4 in 102 mm or 3 in 76 mm if an auto fill pool water level control device is used E 3 Equalizer leakage test E 3 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to verify that the leakage of water through the equalizer does not exceed 10 of the total flow through the skimmer under normal operating conditions E 3 2 Apparatus turbidimeter scaled in NTU accurate to 2 NTU temperature indicating device accurate to 2 F 1 C adequately sized tank and pump to deliver required flow and two flow measuring devices accurate to 1 5 or 1 gal min 4 L min whichever is greater E2 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 E 3 3 E 3 4 E 3 5 Test water pd swimming pools hot tubs spas water temperature 75 10 F 24 6 C 102 5 F 39 3 C turbidity lt 15 NTU lt 15 NTU Equalizer leakage test method a Install the skimmer to the test tank in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions b Connect one flow meter to the skimmer s equalizer inlet port and one to the skimmer outlet port c Fill the tank to the skimmer s normal operating level and set the flow at the maximum design flow rate d Measure the flow ra
89. to 28 d exposure subchronic toxicity 90 day exposure reproductive toxicity developmental toxicity immunotoxicity neurotoxicity chronic toxicity including carcinogenicity and human data clinical epidemiological or occupational when available For a fuller understanding of the toxic potential of the substance supplemental studies shall be reviewed including but not limited to mode or mechanism of action pharmacokinetics pharmacodynamics sensitization endocrine disruption and other endpoints Structure activity relationships physical and chemical properties and any other chemical specific information relevant to the risk assessment shall also be reviewed Toxicity testing shall be performed in accordance with the most recently adopted toxicity testing protocols such as those described by the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development OECD U S Environmental Protection Agency U S EPA and U S Food and Drug Administration U S FDA All studies shall be reviewed for compliance with Good Laboratory Practice 21 CFR PART 58 40 CFR PART 792 NOTE Review of the study according to the approach suggested in Klimisch et al 1997 may also be used to determine the quality of reported data A weight of evidence approach shall be employed in evaluating the results of the available toxicity data This approach shall include considering the likelihood of hazard to human health and the conditions under which such a
90. to account for elevation differences f Move the following connections 1 move the pressure measurement device DPI from the filter system valve or manufactured manifold return to pool port to the waste port Connect the test specimen without reducers or other attached devices in accordance with piping requirements in Table 1 see applicable Annex D figures D5 and D7 The test specimen shall be in the full open position for each test and 2 secure and make any additional connections that may be necessary to conform to any unique design features specified by the manufacturer 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 g Fill the valve with water conditioned to the applicable temperatures specified in Annex D section D 3 3 and bleed off any entrapped air h Place the test specimen in the backwas position and adjust the flow to the maximum design flow rate 1 gpm 3 8 LPM and adjust valve V3 or equivalent until the pressure differential between the filter inlet port and waste port is 10 1 psi 70 6 9 kPa i Observe and collect any leakage from the filter system valve return to pool port over a test period of5min 5s j Record and report the following volume of leakage from return to pool port ml static pressures psi kPa filter system valve inlet port pressure P1 differential pressure valve inlet to outlet ports DP 1 filter system valve waste port pressure P2 elevations feet all from wat
91. to dislodge the filter aid and accumulated dirt and carry them to waste 2 5 alternate sand type media Granular material s specified to be used instead of sand in a sand type filter 2 6 amps The current in amperes under the motor data plate horsepower at rated volts 2 7 analyte Parameter that is a subject of the water analysis such as pH or free chlorine 2 8 automated controller A system of at least one chemical probe a controller and auxiliary or integrated component that senses the level of one or more swimming pool or spa hot tub water parameters and provides a signal to other equipment to maintain the parameter s within a user established range 2 9 backwash Flow of water through filter element s or media in a reverse direction to dislodge accumulated dirt and or filter aid and remove them from the filter tank 2 10 backwash cycle Time required to thoroughly backwash the filter system 14 Beuth Verlag GmbH 10772 Berlin Germany lt http www beuth de langanzeige OENORM 5873 1 en 41105768 html gt 15 SAE International 400 Commonwealth Drive Warrendale PA 15096 001 lt www sae org gt P Superintendent of Documents U S Government Printing Office Washington DC 20402 lt www gpo gov gt 17 Skoog D A West D M Fundamentals of Analytical Chemistry 27 ed Holt Rinehart and Winston Inc 1969 p 26 4 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 2 11 backwash rate Rate of application of water through a filter duri
92. to those who performed the work It includes an in depth assessment of the assumptions calculations extrapolations alternate interpretations methodol ogy acceptance criteria and conclusions pertaining to the work product and the documentation that sup ports the conclusions reached in the report Peer review is intended to ensure that the work product is technically adequate competently performed properly documented and that it satisfies established re quirements U S EPA 1998a R 2 12 point of departure A data point or an estimated point that can be considered to be in the range of observation The standard point of departure is the LED which is the lower 95 confidence limit on a dose associated with 10 extra risk adapted from Barnes et al 1995 R 2 13 quantal data A dichotomous measure of effect each animal is scored normal or affected and the measure of effect is the proportion of scored animals that are affected U S EPA 1995 R 2 14 quantitative risk assessment An estimation of the risk associated with exposure to a sub stance using a methodology that employs evaluation of dose response relationships R 2 15 range of extrapolation Doses that are outside the range of empirical observation in animal studies human studies or both adapted from Barnes et al 1995 R 2 16 range of observation Doses that are within the range of empirical observation in animal stud ies human studies or both adapted
93. treated on a daily basis when used 4 Clarification Flocculation As needed follow manufacturer s instructions 5 Algaecides When needed use EPA registered products Follow manufacturer s instructions Use of some algaecides may cause foaming 6 Foam control As needed foam may harbor persistent microorganisms If foaming is not adequately controlled consider daily shock treatment water replacement or an appropriate anti foam agent Follow manufacturer s instructions Q 7 Temperature Personal preference but typical maximum setting is 104 F 40 C If temperature is too low bather discomfort If temperature is too high excessive fuel requirement increased evaporation bather discomfort Q5 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 increased scaling potential increased use of sanitizers Overexposure to hot water may cause nausea dizziness and fainting Q 8 Water clarity Water clarity The deepest part of the spa and or main drain shall be visible and sharply defined If water is turbid sanitizer level may be low filtration circulation system may require maintenance improper chemical balance Q 2 consult remedial practices Q 6 Q 9 Ozone Ozone concentration in air above spa water ppm Ideal level is 0 1 ppm over 8 hour time weighted average See OSHA standard Ozone serves as oxidizer of water contaminants This should be used with an EPA registered sanitizer Ind
94. type and quality of feed gas source shall be in accordance with the manufacturer s specifications 3 Aminimum of two feed gas flow rates shall be tested Feed gas flow rate shall be set according to the manufacturer s instructions The feed gas flow rate shall be recorded in volume per unit time NOTE If the gas flow rate of the generator is not adjustable the ozone generator may be tested at its specified gas flow rate H9 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 4 For an ozone generator with a liquid coolant the coolant specified by the manufacturer shall be used The coolant flow rate shall be set in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions 5 Generator power supply voltage frequency and maximum amperage shall be set according to the manufacturer s instructions 6 The ozone generator shall be operated for the time specified by the manufacturer or 2 h whichever is greater prior to measurements taken The ozone concentration in the product gas shall be measured at one minute intervals using an ozone gas analyzer meeting the requirements of H 3 1 1 until the average percent difference in ozone concentration among three consecutive measurements is 3 or less equilibrium If equilibrium is not achieved within 10 min 11 measurements the test shall be terminated 7 The ozone concentration shall be recorded as the weight percent of ozone in the product gas 8 The output rate shall be recorded 9 Steps 1 through 9 s
95. type chlorine generators J 5 1 Pool chemistry Before the chlorine generator is placed into service the pool should be chemically balanced In line systems will require a minimum chloride level as specified by the manufacturer Stabilizing of the chlorine residual may be accomplished with the use of cyanuric acid which prevents the rapid breakdown of chlorine Applicable state or local regulations should be consulted pertaining to the use of cyanuric acid 28 The information contained in this Annex is not part of this American National Standard ANS and has not been processed in accordance with ANSI s requirements for an ANS Therefore this Annex may contain material that has not been subjected to public review or a consensus process In addition it does not contain requirements necessary for conformance to the Standard J1 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 J 5 1 1 Sizing a chlorinator system When sizing a chlorinator system for a pool or spa one should consider the typical and worst case loads on the pool spa disinfection system One should account for relevant variables which impact disinfectant demand and consumption Following are some common variables which will affect demand for disinfectant such as chlorine or bromine Local code requirements should be consulted to know the target level typically in ppm such as 1 ppm free chlorine and ensure compliance with the minimum level of residual disinfectant in the water
96. units repeat the analysis of the test solution two additional times If applicable rinse the test units with de ionized water between tests e Assess the results of testing based upon the resolution of the device f Average test results to determine compliance with each accuracy level in 0 12 0 10 Test procedure for total dissolved solids a For each total dissolved solids TDS concentration to be tested i e 1200 2000 ppm prepare the appropriate test solution see Table O 8 Verify and record the test solution values for all parameters listed in the table b Verify and record the TDS concentration of the test solution using one of the following methods 012 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Standard Method 2450C or conductivity meter calibrated with a sodium chloride based standards solution c A sample of the test solution shall be analyzed with the WQTD units under test in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions d Using the same test units repeat the analysis of the test solution two additional times If applicable rinse the test units with de ionized water between tests e Assess the results of testing based upon the resolution of the device f Average the test results to determine compliance with each accuracy level in 0 12 0 11 Test procedure for salinity a For each salinity concentration to be tested i e 3000 4500 ppm prepare the appropriate test solution see Table 0 9 Verify
97. water circulation Spas that utilize submerged suction outlets shall comply with ANSI APSP 16 Each suction fitting shall be installed in accordance with its certified ratings as it relates to 68 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 installation orientation floor or wall installation configuration single or dual and maximum flow rating for the specific opening to which the fitting is affixed 20 5 3 3 Suction outlet fittings for use in exercise spa therapy spa or resistance system Spas that utilized submerged suction outlets for use in exercise or resistance systems shall comply with the requirements of ANSI APSP 16 20 5 3 3 1 The fitting as installed in the spa tub unit shall be tested to the applicable requirements of the ANSI APSP 16 including finger and limb entrapment horizontal and vertical load corrosion resistance fastener testing pull load vacuum impact if system can generate vacuum UV light exposure fitting design and materials point load to excess shear load etc 20 5 3 3 2 Suction fittings for use in spa equipment shall be tested in the exercise spa to verify that the suction fitting and pumping system propeller paddlewheel centrifugal pump etc do not exceed the ac ceptable hair entrapment and body block hold down forces when tested in accordance with ANSI APSP 16 Where the system has power controls or adjustability the system shall be tested under worst case condition of m
98. when tested at 102 5 F 39 3 C 15 15 Life test When tested in accordance with the life test described in Annex a minimum of 8000 operating hours shall be accumulated among the three units no less than 3000 operating hours shall be accumulated on one of the three units At the conclusion of the testing the units shall perform as intended by the manufacturer to the output pressure and operational protection requirements of this section 15 16 Salt level In line electrolytic chlorinator or brominators shall be designed to operate satisfactorily on the dissolved salt concentration range specified by the manufacturer 15 17 Head loss The manufacturer shall make available a head loss claim for systems installed into the main line The actual head loss shall not exceed the claimed head loss by more than 10 16 Brine batch type electrolytic chlorine or bromine generators 16 1 General Batch and process type electrolytic brine chlorine or bromine generators covered by this section are intended for use in circulation systems of public and residential swimming pools and spa hot tubs 16 2 Cleanability Parts of process equipment requiring cleaning and maintenance shall be accessible 53 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 16 3 Design pressure pressure vessels Units and components of process equipment that are subjected to pressure shall meet a working pressure of 50 psi 33 kPa or be equipped with a pressure reducing valve
99. with adjoining fittings or parts of the circulation system Such fittings shall be electrically nonconductive and shall conform to the applicable requirements of 3 1 and 3 2 3 6 Piping materials 3 6 1 Galvanized steel pipe and galvanized iron pipe with cast or malleable iron fittings and bronze or iron bodied bronze fitted valves are acceptable for use without a protective coating If such materials have a steel housing then no insulating fittings are required Otherwise all metal pipe with a dissimilar metal housing shall have insulated fittings 3 6 2 Piping intended for use in water applications with conductivity greater than or equal to 600 ppm shall be made from one of the following materials aluminum brass UNS C68700 copper nickel 10 UNS C70600 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 copper nickel 30 UNS C71500 nickel copper alloy Monel 400 UNS N04400 or thermoplastics or thermoset pipes conforming to the applicable sections of NSF ANSI 14 4 Design and construction This section contains general requirements that apply to all equipment covered under the scope of this Standard 4 1 Installation of piping valves and fittings If circulation system components are not supplied with the required piping valves and fittings installed the manufacturer shall provide a piping diagram a parts list and installation procedures 4 2 Assembly Piping assemblies shall be capable of being disassemb
100. www NFPA org gt 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 ONORM M 5873 1 Plants for the disinfection of water using ultraviolet radiation Requirements and test ing Low pressure mercury lamp plants 2001 SAE Steel Numbering System USEPA 1993 Methods for the Determination of Inorganic Substances in Environmental Samples USEPA 1990 Methods for the Determination of Organic Compounds in Drinking Water Supplement USEPA 600 4 79 020 Methods for the Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes March 1983 USEPA Ultraviolet Disinfection Guidance Manual for the Final Long Term 2 Enhanced Surface Water Treatment Rule November 2006 2 Definitions 2 1 accessible Fabricated to be exposed for cleaning and inspection using simple tools screwdriver pliers open end wrench etc 2 2 accuracy The nearness of a measurement to the accepted or true value The accuracy is expressed as a range about the true value in which a measurement occurs i e 0 5 ppm It can also be expressed as the recovery of a known amount of analyte in a determination of the analyte i e 103 5 2 3 agitation Mechanical or manual movement to dislodge filter aid and dirt from the filter element 2 4 air assist backwash A compression of air in the filter effluent chamber using an air compressor or water pressure from the recirculating pump When released it rapidly decompresses and forces water in the filter tank through the elements in reverse direction
101. 0 25 ppm Between 1 and 3 0 5 ppm Between 3 and 5 1 0 ppm Between 5 and 10 2 5 ppm L3 Between 0 and 1 0 25 ppm Between 1 and 3 0 5 ppm Between 3 and 5 1 0 ppm Between 5 and 10 2 5 ppm Strip or comparator Within 1 increment of the expected value 0 12 3 Accuracy levels for Bromine total and free Range of operation 0 to 20 ppm L1 Between 0 and 6 0 4 ppm Between 6 and 14 1 4 ppm Between 14 and 20 3 0 ppm L2 Between 0 and 6 1 0 ppm Between 6 and 12 2 0 ppm Between 12 and 20 3 0 ppm L3 Between 0 and 12 2 0 ppm Between 12 and 20 4 0 ppm Strip or comparator Within 1 increment of the expected value 0 12 4 Accuracy levels for hardness Range of operation 250 to 1000 ppm L1 Between 250 to 1000 ppm 5 L2 Between 250 to 1000 ppm 10 L3 Between 250 to 1000 ppm 50 Strip or comparator Within 1 increment of the expected value 014 2015 NSF 0 12 5 Accuracy levels for alkalinity Range of operation 40 to 200 ppm NSF ANSI 50 2015 L1 Between 40 to 200 ppm 10 L2 Between 40 to 200 ppm 20 L3 Between 40 to 200 ppm 50 Strip or comparator Within 1 increment of the expected value 0 12 6 Accuracy levels for Cyanuric Acid Range of operation 0 to 200 ppm L1 Between 0 and 30 15 Between
102. 0 4 in 1 cm or longer or filter photometer equipped with a filter having maximum transmission in the wavelength range of 490 to 430 nm and providing a light path of 0 4 in 1 cm or longer c A sample of the test solution shall be analyzed with the WQTD units under test in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions d Using the same test units repeat the analysis of the test solution two additional times If applicable rinse the test units with de ionized water between tests e Assess the results of testing based upon the resolution of the device f Average test results to determine compliance with each accuracy level in 0 12 0 9 Test procedure for Cyanuric Acid a For each Cyanuric Acid concentration to be tested i e 30 50 100 200 ppm prepare the appropriate test solution see Table 0 7 Verify and record the test solution values for all parameters listed in the table b Verify and record the Cyanuric Acid concentration of the test solution using one of the following methods Spectrophotometer for use at a wavelength of 515 nm and providing a light path of 0 4 in 1 cm or longer or filter photometer equipped with a filter having maximum transmission in the wavelength range of 490 to 530 nm and providing a light path of 0 4 in 1 cm or longer c A sample of the test solution shall be analyzed with the WQTD units under test in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions d Using the test
103. 0 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 74 0 1 100 10 3000 300 0 0 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 74 0 1 100 10 3500 350 0 0 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 74 0 1 100 10 4500 450 0 0 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 74 0 1 100 10 6500 650 0 0 NOTE Outdoor pools may use or have CYA most spas do not CYA may read via dessication method but not via conductivity meter O22 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Annex P informative Variable speed pumps recommendation for installation and operation This is not a basic part of the standard nor the responsibility of the manufacturer The purpose of this annex is to provide general recommendations for the installation and operation of add on variable speed control to single speed pumps and on board control of variable speed pumps to obtain satisfactory per formance The actual method of installation and operation should comply with the manufacturer s recom mendations and with the applicable state and local laws and regulations It is not recommended to decrease turnover rate if water quality is not within recommended levels Use of automated controllers and chemical feeders may assist with moderating water quality to proper levels Di Recommended installation P 1 1 Turnover rate Turnover rates are maintained according to state and local laws and regulations Turnover rate varies depending on classification of pool spa or hot
104. 007 Stainless Steel Drainage Systems for Sanitary DWV Storm and Vacuum Applications Above and Below Ground ANSI ASME A112 6 3 2001 R2007 Floor and Trench Drains ANSI ASME A112 6 4 2003 R2008 Roof Deck and Balcony Drains ANSI ASME A112 19 17 2010 Safety Vacuum Release Systems SVRS for Residential amp Commercial Swimming Pool Spa Hot Tub Wading Pool Suction System ANSI ASME B40 100 2005 Pressure Gauge and Gauge Attachments ANSI IAPMO Z124 7 1997 Prefabricated Plastic Spa Shells ANSI IAPMO Z124 1 2 2005 Plastic Bathtub and Shower Units ANSI IAPMO 21033 2015 Flexible PVC Hoses and Tubing for Pools Hot Tubs Spas and Jetted Bathtubs ANSI UL 1081 2011 Swimming Pools Pumps Filters and Chlorinators ANSI UL 1261 2011 Electric Water Heaters for Pools and Tubs ANSI UL 1563 2009 Standard for Electric Hot Tub Spas and Associated Equipment ANSI UL 2017 2011 General Purpose Signaling Devices and Systems APHA Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater twentieth edition ASTM C136 2006 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates 2004 ASTM D1894 11e1 Stand Test Method for Static and Kinetic Coefficients of Plastic Film and Sheeting ASTM D2464 2006 Standard Specification for Threaded Poly Vinyl Chloride PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings Schedule 80 4 USEPA Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory Cincinnati OH
105. 1 3 Septa shall be maintained in such a position as to preclude surface contacts that reduce effective filtration area 5 2 2 Turbidity limits precoat operation During the pre coat operation the average turbidity of the filter effluent returning to the pool or spa hot tub shall not exceed 10 nephelometric turbidity units NTU over the first 60 s of flow as determined in accordance with Annex B section B 6 except filters designed to re filter the effluent during the pre coat operation or discharge it to waste without returning it to the pool or spa hot tub are exempt from this requirement 5 2 3 Spacing of elements 5 2 3 1 Filters shall be designed to provide a minimum clearance between adjacent filter elements equal to the thickness or diameter of the element or 1 in 25 mm whichever is less 5 2 3 2 The clearance between filter elements shall be sufficient to prevent contact between the septa during backwashing operations 5 2 4 Baffles A pre coat media type filter shall have a baffle or other water deflecting device that prevents incoming water from eroding the filter aid during filtration 5 2 5 Removal of waste from filter tank A pre coat media type filter shall be designed so that wash water dislodged filter aid and dirt may be removed from the filter tank 5 2 6 Installation and operating instructions The manufacturer shall provide a manual with each filter The manual shall include operating instructions cleaning in
106. 12 6 Table O 7 TDS 0 12 7 Table O 8 Salinity 0 12 8 Table 0 9 19 2 4 Accuracy within operating range Level 1 2 and or 3 Testing shall be conducted based upon the manufacturers recommended claimed use range and the operating ranges to evaluate conformance with level L1 L2 and or L3 requirements for each parameter 19 2 5 Repeatability or precision and reproducibility Test two lots of production to verify production lot variability and consistency in product performance To assess reproducibility testing of the two separate lots should occur with separate test solutions made on different days 19 2 6 Shelf Life The shelf life for the reagents and components of a WQTD shall be at least as long as specified by the manufacturer when the reagents and components are tested in accordance with Annex O section 0 14 When tested with reagents and components stored for the manufacturer specified shelf life the accuracy repeatability and reproducibility of the WQTD shall be within 10 of the initial accuracy repeatability and reproducibility For test strip comparators the result shall be within the limits stated in Annex O After initial testing of the WQTD it shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions and retested after the manufacturer s prescribed shelf life for compliance to these requirements in 19 and Annex O 19 3 Operation and use instructions The manufacturer shall provide operatio
107. 2 Systems shall be marked either on the gutter overflow system or shell structure with their ideal operating water level and acceptable range 20 6 Air blower and air induction systems The requirements of this section apply to integral systems that induce or allow air to enter the spa either by means of a power pump or passive design 20 6 1 Air blower systems shall prevent water backflow toward the device via one or more of the following mechanisms backflow prevention valve Hartford loop i e piping loop to prevent water backflow or installation height of the blower is above the water line 20 6 2 Air intake sources shall not introduce water dirt or contaminants from outside the spa unit into the spa 20 6 3 Integral air passages shall be able to withstand 150 of the manufacturers maximum rated work ing pressure for a minimum of 5 min 20 6 4 Air blower tubing shall meet or exceed the tubing performance requirements of this Standard or IAPMO PS 33 20 7 Temperature control systems heaters and controls 20 7 1 Temperature control The temperature control system when used or integrated into a spa shall be in conformance with ANSI UL 1563 including requirements for maximum set point corresponding to a water temperature of 104 F 40 C in the tub and tolerance at the maximum temperature of not more than 5 F 3 C NOTE In order to heat spa temperature to maximum 104 F 40 C in the tub
108. 20 10 3 Installation instructions Installation instructions shall include at a minimum site preparation ventilation instructions if installed indoors spa leveling procedure and electrical requirements and precautions 20 10 4 Operating instructions Operating instructions shall include at a minimum start up and refill procedures and frequency jet control operations temperature adjustment operations and lighting control if appropriate 20 10 5 Spa care and maintenance instructions Maintenance instructions shall include at a minimum draining instructions filter system maintenance including filter cartridge removal cleaning and installation care instructions for spa shell exterior and cover instructions for winterizing and prevention of freezing and vacation care instructions 74 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 20 10 6 Water quality and maintenance instructions Water quality instructions shall include at a minimum methods for testing the spa water methods for adding chemicals to the water methods for maintaining the proper water chemistry recommended water quality parameters shown in the information annex O basic chemical safety guidelines recommended test frequency Statement specifying use of EPA registered chemicals for spa sanitation and statement reading Maintaining your sanitizer at the recommended levels at all times may decrease the occu
109. 31 and 50 12 Between 51 and 70 10 Between 71 and 100 10 Between 101 and 200 15 L2 Between 0 and 200 20 Between 0 and 200 50 Strip or comparator Within 1 increment of the expected value 0 12 7 Accuracy levels for TDS Range of operation 7 to 4000 ppm L1 Between 700 to 4000 ppm 5 L2 Between 700 to 4000 ppm 10 L3 Between 700 to 4000 ppm 50 Strip or comparator Within 1 increment of the expected value 0 12 8 Accuracy levels for salinity Range of operation 1500 to 6500 ppm L1 Between 1500 to 6500 ppm 5 L2 Between 1500 to 6500 ppm 10 L3 Between 1500 to 6500 ppm 50 Strip or comparator Within 1 increment of the expected value 0 13 Repeatability or precision testing Conduct testing on product from two or more separate lots of production The results from testing two or more separate lots of product shall be within the acceptable range If one of the products achieves less accuracy in the water chemistry testing the lesser of the results will be considered the result for the product O15 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 0 14 Shelf life testing To verify shelf life open or use product as required for the above testing Upon completion of use of product close seal turn off and store in accordance with manufacturer s instructions or store at 50 relative humidity at 73 8 F 23 4 C f
110. 365 day yr Where ADD Average daily dose mg kg day Cw Chemical concentration in pool water mg L R10 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 IgR Ingestion rate of pool water L hr ET Exposure time hrs day EF Exposure frequency events year BW Body weight kg Table R4 Assumptions for long term swimming pool oral exposure and dose estimate Age Adult 11 to lt 16 years 6 to lt 11 years Type of Swimmer Non Non Non Comp Comp Comp Comp Comp Comp IgR L hr 0 0125 0 025 0 025 0 05 0 05 0 05 ET hr day 3 EE 2 0 5 12 0 5 EF events year 238 88 189 72 65 9 102 BW kg 70 54 29 IgR The ingestion rates are based on the values used in EPA s Residential SOPs U S EPA 2000 and an EPA pilot study as discussed in ACC s swimmer survey ACC 2002 P ET Competitive Swimmers The exposure times for competitive swimmers are based on the ACC s swimmer sur vey ACC 2002 ET Non Competitive Swimmers The exposure times for non competitive and or recreational swimmers are based on NHAPs mean values U S EPA 1996a d EF Adult Competitive Mean values for master s and collegiate swimmers ranged from 187to 238 days year For collegiate swimmer ACC 2002 assumed 5 events week x 52 weeks year x 11 months year 12 months year EF Non Competitive Mean yearly frequency values obtained from NHAPS U S EPA 1996a
111. 5 High pressure decorative laminates HPDL for surfacing food service equipment 36 Dinnerware 37 Air curtains for entranceways in food and food service establishments 40 Residential wastewater treatment systems 41 Non liquid saturated treatment systems 42 Drinking water treatment units Aesthetic effects 44 Residential cation exchange water softeners 46 Evaluation of components and devices used in wastewater treatment systems 49 Biosafety cabinetry Design construction performance and field certification 50 Equipment for swimming pools spas hot tubs and other recreational water facilities 51 Food equipment materials 52 Supplemental flooring 53 Drinking water treatment units Health effects 55 Ultraviolet microbiological water treatment systems 58 Reverse osmosis drinking water treatment systems 59 Mobile food carts 60 Drinking water treatment chemicals Health effects 61 Drinking water system components Health effects 62 Drinking water distillation systems 140 Sustainable carpet assessment 169 Special purpose food equipment and devices 170 Glossary of food equipment terminology 173 Dietary supplements 177 Shower filtration systems Aesthetic effects 184 Residential dishwashers 222 Ozone generators 223 Conformity assessment requirements for certification bodies that certify products pursuant to NSF ANSI 60 Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals Health Effects 240 Drainfield trench product sizing fo
112. 60 level 1 L1 The highest accuracy and repeatability performance level of a water testing device Refer to Annex O section O 6 Accuracy Testing 2 61 level 2 L2 The intermediate accuracy and repeatability performance level of a water testing device Refer to Annex O section O 6 Accuracy Testing 2 62 level 3 L3 The lowest accuracy and repeatability performance level of a water testing device Refer to Annex O section O 6 Accuracy Testing 2 63 manufactured manifold Any combination of pipe and fittings provided by the valve manufac turer to form valve assembly using two or more valves 2 64 maximum design head loss filters The maximum head loss recommended by the manufacturer for a clean filter at a specific flow rate 2 65 maximum load amps The maximum current in amperes under the service factor horsepower at 10 of the rated voltage 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 2 66 mg L or ppm An abbreviation for milligrams per liter or parts per million which is a concentration measurement for sanitizers and other chemical parameters such as alkalinity calcium hardness iron copper etc 2 67 multiport valve A device used to direct flow to through and from a swimming pool spa or hot tub filter and usually replaces conventional valves and face piping on a filter 2 68 net positive suction head NPSH The head available at the entrance or eye of an impeller to move and accelerate water entering the eye This is the gau
113. 9 17960 18011 U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 2005b Health effects testing guidelines U S Code of Federal Regulations Title 40 Part 798 U S Environmental Protection Agency U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 2007 Exposure and Fate Assessment Screening Tool E FAST Vrersion 2 0 Documentation Manual EPA Office of Pollution Prevention and Toxics Exposure Asessment Branch Available at lt http www epa gov oppt exposure pubs efast2man pdf gt U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 2008 Child specific exposure factors handbook National Center for Environmental Assessment Washington DC EPA 600 R 06 096F Available online at lt http cfpub epa gov ncea cfm recordisplay cfm deid 199243 gt U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 2010 Draft Swimmer Exposure SOP EPA Office of Pesticides Antimicrobials Division Draft as of January 25 2010 U S EPA Environmental Protection Agency 2011a IRIS Glossary Integrated Risk Information System IRIS Last updated on August 31 2011 Available at lt http ofmpub epa gov sor_internet registry termreg searchandretrieve glossariesandkeywordlists search do details amp glossaryName IRIS 20Glossary gt U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 2011b Recommended Use of Body Weight 3 4 as the Default Method in Derivation of the Oral Reference Dose U S Environmental Protection Agency Risk Assessment Forum Washington DC E
114. After operating the filter for the time required to filter one tank volume draw a sample from the filter effluent and measure the turbidity TB3 Repeat for the next four tank volumes e Calculate the turbidity remaining TR ratio at each tank volume using the following equation TR TB3 T1 TB2 TB1 B 5 5 Acceptance criteria After the fifth tank volume the TR ratio shall be lt 0 3 This is equivalent to a 70 or greater reduction in turbidity B 6 Precoat media type filters turbidity limits precoat operation B 6 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to verify that a precoat media type filter does not pass an excess of filter aid in the effluent generated during the first 1 min of the precoating operation This test does not apply to precoat media type filters designed to refilter or dispose of effluent generated during the precoating operation B 6 2 Apparatus flow meter required accuracy is 1 gpm 4 LPM or 2 of reading whichever is greater pressure recording device required accuracy is 0 5 of the smallest division used in the manufacturer s claimed pressure loss turbidimeter required accuracy from 0 to 10 NTU is 0 5 NTU required accuracy above 10 NTU is 5 of the reading or 1 NTU whichever is greater temperature indicating device required accuracy is 2 F 1 C water tank and pump system capable of delivering water at the design flow rate and proper temperatu
115. Analysis for phenolic substances and total organic carbon TOC may be used as screening tests to determine whether additional testing is warranted for specific potential contaminants Exposure testing may also be conducted to determine whether a material may impart color to water A 3 3 Exposure water The condition of exposure water shall be based on the nature of the contaminant of concern Exposure water having the following characteristics shall be prepared note that parameters especially temperature may change during the exposure period pH range 7 2 7 4 7 2 7 4 chlorine 2 0 0 2 mg L 0 0 mg L hardness as CaCO 150 10 mg L 150 10 mg L Temperature 100 10 F 88 5 C 100 10 F 88 5 C A 3 4 Exposure conditions Samples shall be exposed to exposure water in three successive intervals according to the following schedule After each of the first two exposure periods the extraction water shall be discarded and the sample exposed to fresh exposure water The extraction water from the third exposure interval shall be analyzed for the selected contaminants All exposures shall be conducted at an ambient air temperature of 73 3 F 23 2 C A 3 5 Ratio of sample surface area to exposure water volume When material or component samples are evaluated the ratio of the sample surface area to the volume of exposure water shall be 1000 in 6500 cm to 1 gal 4 L Filtration and adsorption media
116. Annex H section H 1 3 b shall be added simultaneously to the test water Add an appropriate amount of the appropriate challenge organism to obtain a minimum of 1 0 X 10 organisms per 100 mL of test water not to exceed 1 0 X 10 per 100 mL per each challenge organism i For UV and ozone systems allow an appropriate period of time for the organisms to reach a homogenous dispersion state within the test tank for 30 min Take 3 control samples see Annex H table H 1 ii Forion generation systems proceed to section H 1 6 3 H 1 6 3 Testing of the sample a Activate the system under test and start a stopwatch Sampling shall occur after each tank volume turnover until all 5 turnovers are completed see Annex H table H 1 If the system does H3 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 not turn the water over use the sampling procedure outlined in Annex H section H 1 6 1a collecting the triplicate samples after 30 min b For UV and ozone systems samples shall be collected out of the return line downstream from the system under test and before the tank see Annex H figure H 1 Collect all samples in triplicate Samples for ion generators shall be collected from the tank at a depth of 1 2 feet below the water surface within 1 2 feet of the wall of the tank at a position along the wall of the tank that is side opposite of the water return to the tank c Process all samples as described in Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and
117. FeCl ppm CuCl ppm HCI NaOh bpm 2 1000 800 80 200 20 2 0 0 2 27 1 7 4 0 1 100 10 0 0 0 0 1000 800 80 200 20 2 0 0 2 27 1 7 4 0 1 100 10 0 25 0 0 1000 200 20 50 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 7 4 0 1 100 10 0 5 0 0 1000 200 20 50 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 7 4 0 1 100 10 1 0 0 0 1000 80 10 20 5 2 0 0 2 27 1 7 4 0 1 100 10 1 0 0 0 1000 80 10 20 5 2 0 0 2 27 1 7 4 0 1 100 10 1 0 1 0 1000 800 80 200 20 2 0 0 2 27 1 7 4 0 1 100 10 1 0 1 0 1000 200 20 50 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 7 4 0 1 100 10 0 0 0 25 1000 200 20 50 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 7 4 0 1 100 10 0 0 0 5 1000 80 10 20 5 2 0 0 2 27 1 7 4 0 1 100 10 0 0 0 0 NOTE There is no need to measure magnesium hardness it may be computed by subtracting calcium hardness from total 019 2015 NSF Table O 6 Total Alkalinity NSF ANSI 50 2015 alcium agnesium S emperature lt odium Bicar anurate DI water mL CaCl ppm MgCl ppm Hypochlorite C id sodium hy bonate CN Na O NaOCl ppm droxide NaHCO ppm e HCI NaOH 3 PP PP 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 74 0 1 40 10 0 0 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 74 0 1 100 10 0 0 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 74 0 1 200 20 0 0 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 74 0 1 40 10 50 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 74 0 1 100 10 50 10 1000 220 30 80
118. G 3 4 2 2 Individual output rates shall be within 10 of the average of all taken at a test setting ict Individual Sample Variance 6 D x 100 and lt 20 G 3 4 2 3 The average variance at 50 and 100 shall be lt 10 where Z abs 6 Average Absolute Variance A and A lt 10 G 3 5 Uniformity of output test method for feeder settings resulting in less than 5 0 Ibs d 2 27 kg d output G4 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 G 3 5 1 Method a Install the flow through chemical feeder in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions with its influent connected to the discharge side of the recirculating pump and its effluent connecting back to the supply tank Position a flow meter in line with the feeder b Fill the tank with water conditioned to parameters specified in Annex G section G 3 3 Fill the feeder with the maximum amount of recommended chemicals c Disconnect the effluent line from the feeder and direct it to drain during conditioning Condition the feeder for 10 min 30 s by running the appropriate test water through the feeder at 100 of the maximum output rate control mechanism setting Reconnect the effluent line to the tank d Collect an initial control sample from the tank e Allow the feeder to operate at 100 of the maximum output control mechanism setting for 30 min 3 min Collect an effluent sample from the tank and determine the concentration of free chlorine ppm f Cont
119. I psi kPa Adjust the pressure PI to 3 1 psi 21 6 9 kPa Observe and collect leakage from the non pressurized port over a test period of 5 min 5s Record and report the following static pressure psi kPa volume of leakage from the closed port ml and valve inlet port pressure P1 psi kPa D 3 4 2 1 2 Acceptance criteria When tested the valve shall not leak in excess of 0 5 mL from the closed port in the 5 min test D 3 4 2 2 Three or more port valves D 3 4 2 2 1 Test method The following procedure shall be used for valves with three or more ports and manufactured manifold a b Make the following connections while providing an adjustable valve between them 1 connect the test specimen without reducers or other attached devices in accordance with piping requirements in Table D 1 see applicable Annex D figures D2 and D3 The test specimen shall be in the full open position for each test and 2 secure and make any additional connections that may be necessary to conform to any unique design features specified by the manufacturer Fill the sytem with water conditioned to the applicable temperatures specified in Annex D section D 3 3 and bleed off any entrapped air c Place the test specimen or manufactured manifold in the first operating position and adjust the flow to the maximum design flow rate 1 gpm 3 8 LPM and adjust valve V2 until the pressure PI is 24 1 psi 165 6 9 kPa
120. I UL 2017 or safety covers ASTM 1346 NOTE Manufacturers need to consult with the local regulatory authority having jurisdiction regarding barrier requirements for compliance requirements 20 4 5 2 Safety covers If recommended or supplied by a spa manufacturer a lockable safety cover shall comply with the requirements of ASTM F1346 NOTE Manufacturers need to consult with the local regulatory authority having jurisdiction regarding spa safety barriers and the layers of drowning protection required for private and public use spas for compliance requirements There is no substitute for constant and vigilant adult supervision 20 4 6 Lighting If a spa has submerged lighting such lighting shall meet the relevant requirements of ANSI UL 1563 20 5 Circulation system 20 5 1 General 20 5 1 1 The circulation system shall be capable of producing a 30 min or less volumetric turnover of the spa system when operated at the maximum flow rate of the pump and filter in a clean media condition Always consult local regulations for required water circulation rate 20 5 1 2 The piping from the skimmers and suction fittings shall be hydraulically balanced such that when piping is split between multiple fittings pipe lengths shall be equal to the extent permitted by the product dimensions 20 5 1 3 The manufacturer of the spa shall either supply or recommend the specific equipment for installation The specification shall reference one or
121. If an NOAEL cannot be clearly defined from the data the lowest LOAEL for the most appropriate test species relevant route of exposure and toxicological endpoint shall be utilized The general procedure for calculating the TAC using this approach is as follows Determine the critical study and effect from which the NOAEL or LOAEL will be identified according to the following hierarchy U S EPA 1993 and Dourson et al 1994 1 adequate studies in humans 2 adequate studies in animal models most biologically relevant to humans e g primates or that demonstrate similar pharmacokinetics to humans 3 adequate studies in the most sensitive animal species the species showing an adverse effect at the lowest administered dose using an appropriate vehicle an adequate study duration and a relevant route of exposure and 4 effects that are biologically relevant to humans R17 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 R 6 4 2 2 Benchmark dose approach The benchmark dose level BMDL for the substance shall be calculated by modeling the substance s dose response curve for the critical effect in the region of observed responses The benchmark response BMR concentration shall be determined by whether the critical response is a continuous endpoint measurement or a quantal endpoint measurement The BMR shall be calculated at the 10 response level The BMDL is the lower confidence limit on the dose that produces a specified magnitude of change 10
122. PA 100 R11 0001 Available at lt http www epa gov raf publications interspecies extrapolation htm gt U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 2011c Recommended use of body weight as the default method in derivation of the oral reference dose Office of the Science Advisor Risk Assessment Forum Washington D C Available at lt http www epa gov raf publications pdfs recommended use of bw34 pdf gt U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 2012 2012 Edition of the Drinking Water Standards and Health Advisories Office of Water U S EPA Washington DC Available at http water epa gov action advisories drinking upload dwstandards201 2 pdf R23 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 2013a Benchmark Dose Software Version 2 4 released April 19 2013 National Center for Environmental Assessment Office of Research and Development Available at lt http www epa gov ncea bmds about html gt U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 2013b U S Code of Federal Regulations Title 40 Part 798 U S Environmental Protection Agency June 18 2013 Available at lt http www gpo gov fdsys browse collectionCfr action collectionCode CFR gt U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 2013c Benchmark Dose Software User s Manual Office of Environmental Information U S Environmental Protection Agency Washington DC April 19 2013 Available at lt http www e
123. S EPA Office of Pesticides uses a procedure U S EPA 2010 in which some of the inputs and parameters utilized by U S EPA SWIMODEL 2003a have been modified Among the updates were modifications of the exposure times which allow for assessment of short term and long term exposure When deriving exposure estimates under section R 5 the short term exposure concentrations shall first be determined by the calculation of the Potential Daily Dose PDD and then assessed according to the toxicology evaluation process described in section R 6 If the short term exposure concentration the calculated PDD exceeds the acceptance criteria based on lifetime ex posure effects identified by the toxicology review requirements described in section R 6 then the Average Daily Dose ADD may then be calculated and compared against the lifetime exposure acceptance crite ria however the short term exposure concentration shall be addressed by comparing against a short term acceptance criteria identified according to the toxicology evaluation process described in section R 6 R6 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 A 5 2 Swimming pool dermal exposures systemic Dermal exposure estimates are predicated on a single compartment model of the skin with the rate limiting step being the penetration of the stratum corneum The model utilizes Fick s Law of Diffusion to calculate a general exposure value without regard for differences in the skin permeability of specific b
124. U S EPA 2008 These values are the average of the 50 percentile body weights for males and females A 5 2 2 Long term swimming pool dermal exposure The following equation is taken from U S EPA SWIMODEL 2003a and shall be used to estimate long term dermal doses when the critical effect endpoint for the chemical being assessed is based on systemic effects ADD CwxKpxSAx ET x EF x CF BW x 365 day yr Where ADD Average daily dose mg kg day Cw Chemical concentration in pool water mg L Kp Permeability constant see equation below SA Surface area cm ET Exposure time hrs day EF Exposure frequency events year CF Conversion factor 0 001 L cm BW Body y weight Kg kg Kp _ 40 272 0 71 x Tog Kow reer Where Kp Permeability Constant cm hr Kow Octanol Water Coefficient MW Molecular Weight R8 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Table R2 Assumptions for long term swimming pool dermal exposure and dose estimate Age Adult 11 to lt 16 years 6 to lt 11 years Type of Swimmer Comp Non Comp Non Comp Non Comp Comp Comp ET hr day 3 0 3 ae 0 5 E 0 5 EF events year 238 88 189 72 65 102 SA cm 18 200 15 700 10 500 BW kg 70 54 29 ET Competitive Swimmers The exposure times for competitive swimmers are based on the ACC s swimmer sur vey ACC 2002 ET Non Competitive Swimmers
125. Water Quality Testing Devices WQTD iii 62 UC E TEE EEN 62 USE TO SUING aes cee Eegen EREECHEN EE 62 19 3 Operation and use instructions ii 63 19 4 WQTD Marking Identification sis 64 Spas and NOT e EE 64 20M G n ralistes inner E te NN Des sat dns 64 DEET 64 viii 20 3 Electrical componente sise 65 20 4 Design and construction sisi 65 20 5 Circulation system iii 67 20 6 Air blower and air induction systems 71 20 7 Temperature control systems heaters and controls ssssssssrerrrrrrnrnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 71 20 8 Sanitation and treatment systems 72 20 91 Data EE 73 20 10 Owner S MANU sineira sa Sees vas vaya cis resavaea save cies Fass toes sa Eed Eed 73 21 Fittings for water park spray pad pool OF spa 75 21 1 Water inlet or water return fittings e eee ttecaaaeeeeeee ett ete 75 21 2 Surface or deck drain fittings tt ss 76 21 3 Overflow fittings and perimeter grating ss 78 21 4 Fittings for water circulation and treatment 78 22 Heat exchangers heaters coolers and solar water heating systems 79 22 GOONS CPR CO WEEN 79 22 2 Performance GNT Ni cssiseesseersesssssss 80 22 3 Operation and installation instructions 80 22 4 Marking and product identification 81 AnnexA ES SR ENEE EEN Al All e CERN soos c venice si tush ve eh teat TT REED PER EEE PER EEE TE B1
126. acen EES unn EE eee ceeeeeeeesesssaeeeeeeeeees 45 13 20 Cryptosporidium reduction nie 45 13 21 Operation and installation instructions 45 13 23 Data plates ee i WEE T 46 Ultraviolet UV light process equipment 47 14 1 General nn EE E EEEE 47 14 2 Cleanability apn e 47 14 3 Design pressure pressure vessels c cceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeccaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeedaaeeeeeeenenee 47 14 4 Flow meter eee 9 MD 47 14 5 Performance indication Sn 47 14 6 Operation and installation instructions 47 14 7 Data plate OR 48 14 8 Disinfectionteiticacy 7 Miss 48 149 Valve and component identification 49 14 10 Operating temperatures iii 49 14 11 iere Groe Ste NOMI ccc ceceeceecesneeeneeeeeeesesneneaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseaeeaeeeees 49 14 128 TEST 0 M 49 ICTS AACE 0 MD 49 EG Ultraviolet UV Names Ms iii 49 14 15 Chemical resistant materals W eeeeeeeeeseerneeeesosssarnneasnetnrasnnaeaneonrasnnnesuncssnannnesanonaneddnnn 50 NL EN HE EE ehhh ch ode edd as cane eae es acl les id 50 14 17 Hydrostatic Pressure Heouirements 50 14 18 UV Cryptosporidium Inactivation and dose determination eessssssseeeeeeseessrrrrereesssrrrrne 50 In line electrolytic chlorinator or brominator process equipment ceceeeeeteteeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeetees 51 15 1 General EE 51 EEEE on EE 51 15 3 Design pressure pressure vessels cceeeeeeeeeee cece eee
127. acturer s use instructions pools spa 0 ppm b The following elements shall be added to the test waters while the disinfection efficacy of the process equipment is determined grease and oil as 18 22 mg L baby oil Kjeldahl nitrogen as 8 5 9 0 mg L urea and two microbiological organisms Enterococcus faecium strain PRD American Type Culture Collection ATCC 6569 formerly Streptococcus faecalis and Pseudomonas aeruginosa ATCC 27313 Other challenge organisms may be used in order to address manufacturer claims H 1 4 Analytical methods The analytical methods shall be those specified in APHA Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater H 1 5 Culture of bacteria 2 American Type Culture Collection P O Box 1549 Manassas VA 20108 H1 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 H 1 5 1 Preparation and preservation of stock a Purchase freeze dried E faecium and P aeruginosa from ATCC b Revive the freeze dried cultures according to the directions supplied with the culture and in the current ATCC Catalog of Strains At least three consecutive maximum of 30 daily transfers shall be performed prior to the preparation of the test challenge c Confirm the purity of the revived challenge strains through streak plating on appropriate growth media Confirm the biochemical and physical profile of the resulting isolates through Gram Staining oxidase assay catalase assay or
128. aimed head loss by more than 10 14 17 Hydrostatic Pressure Requirements UV light process equipment that normally operates under pressure shall show no evidence of rupture leakage burst or permanent deformation when subjected to a hydrostatic pressure 1 5 times the manufacturer s maximum operating pressure see Annex F section F 4 14 18 UV Cryptosporidium inactivation and dose determination Manufacturers of UV systems with a claim to inactivate cysts such as Cryptosporidium Giardia etc shall demonstrate a minimum 3 log 99 9 or greater inactivation of Cryptosporidium parvum in a single pass NOTE Operators of spray parks spray pads or interactive water features with no standing water should consider greater inactivation performance of 4 log 99 99 The local public health authority may select different levels of log inactivation or power delivery for different applications such as competition lap pools spas wave pools wading pools etc 14 18 1 Sample selection When validating a range of aquatic or recreational water use UV systems for inactivation of cysts such as Cryptosporidium parvum each of the following variables shall be used to determine which UV reactor systems and components shall be tested within the range of product Select at least two worst case models from the range of products based upon all of the following variables 1 Test the unit representative of the worst case reactor hydraulics and UV dose delivery
129. aintenance within 3000 h Units that are not designed for continuance operation shall be set at the maximum allowable daily operation time The total test period shall remain 3000 hours If the output is also variable in addition to the daily operation time it shall be set to the level specified in c d Maintain the units in accordance with the manufacturer s maintenance instructions Manufacture shall not specify parts replacement as maintenance within 3000 h 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 1 5 Acceptance criteria Units designed for continuous operation At least one of the three units shall complete 3000 satisfactory operating hours and a minimum of 8000 satisfactory operating hours shall be accumulated among the three units At the conclusion of the testing the units shall perform as intended by the manufacturer and shall continue to conform to the applicable performance requirements as specified in the products life test section Units not designed for continuous operation At least one of the three units shall complete 3000 total elapsed hours during which the daily operation time is set to the maximum level A minimum of 8000 total elapsed hours shall be accumulated among the three units during which the daily operation time is set to the maximum level At the conclusion of the testing the unit with 3000 operating hours shall be evaluated to the applicable performance requirements as specified in the products life test section
130. ale supporting the efficacy of the system for the intended end use 17 2 Cleanability Parts of process equipment requiring cleaning and maintenance shall be accessible 17 3 Design pressure pressure vessels Units and components of process equipment that are subjected to pressure shall meet a working pressure of 50 psi 33 kPa or be equipped with a pressure reducing valve set at the manufacturer s working pressure 17 4 Flow meter If the performance of a unit is dependent on a specified flow rate a means to monitor and control the flow shall be provided 17 5 Performance indication The process equipment shall be provided with an effective means to alert the user when a component of 56 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 this equipment is not operating 17 6 Operation and installation instructions 17 6 1 Drawings and a parts list for easy identification and ordering of replacement parts shall be furnished with each unit and shall include model number of the unit instructions for proper size selection and installation operation and maintenance instructions a statement of the manufacturer s warranty applicable caution statements prominently displayed ventilation requirements if applicable cross connection protection if the unit is physically connected to a potable water supply output rate amount of Cu per unit time maximum daily operation time if not designed for continuous o
131. alves shall not interfere with the performance of the skimmer 33 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 9 7 Vacuum cleaner connections Vacuum cleaner connections shall be in a convenient location for use and shall not interfere with normal operation of the skimmer 9 8 Operation and installation instructions 9 8 1 The manufacturer shall provide written operation and installation instructions with each unit The instructions shall include drawings charts and parts lists necessary for the proper installation operation and maintenance of the skimmer 9 8 2 A skimmer equipped with an equalizer shall have in its operation and installation instructions a warning that the skimmer is to be installed with an equalizer wall or drain fitting conforming to ANSI ASME A112 19 8 to prevent hair or body entrapment at the skimmer equalizer the skimmer manufacturer shall specify the minimum flow rating of the suction fitting which meets or exceeds the maximum flow rating of the skimmer suction line to address jurisdictions that do not allow skimmers to be installed with equalizer lines the skimmer manufacturer shall provide instructions for disabling e installation of the skimmer without the equalizer line the equalizer line The skimmer manufacturer may or may not supply the suction fitting with the skimmer 9 8 3 A skimmer s maximum flow rating GPM LPM shall be specified based on the nominal pipe size intended to plumb the s
132. ance requirements of this section based upon their design and construction including related components such as fittings couplings valves controllers etc 22 2 1 Dimensional conformity test Heaters and associated components under pressure shall be evaluated for dimensional conformance with the piping and fitting dimensions recommended by the manufacturer 22 2 2 Hydrostatic pressure test Heaters and associated components under pressure shall be capable of withstanding a hydrostatic pressure test at 150 of the rated working pressure test per Annex B 22 2 3 Cyclic pressure test Heaters and associated components under pressure shall be capable of withstanding 20 000 cycle low high low cyclical pressure test per Annex B 22 2 4 Design burst hydrostatic pressure test Heaters and associated components under pressure shall be capable of withstanding a hydrostatic pressure test at 200 of the rated working pressure test per Annex B 22 2 5 Elevated temperature hydrostatic pressure test Heaters and associated components under pressure shall be capable of withstanding a hydrostatic pressure test at 200 of the rated working pressure when tested at 140 F 60 C 22 2 6 Head loss curve Manufacturers shall make available a head loss curve for the equipment and associated components Equipment and associated components shall not exceed the head loss indicated by the manufacturer s head loss curve when tested in accordance with manufactu
133. and filter aid The head loss through the filter after cleaning the media shall not exceed 150 of the initial head loss through the filter as determined in accordance with Annex B section B 3 The head loss through the filter after cleaning shall not exceed the maximum design head loss 23 possible resource for ball clay OM 4 old Mine 4 Rovin Ceramics Taylor MI 48180 4 A possible resource for baby oil Johnson s Baby Oil One Johnson amp Johnson Plaza New Brunswick New Jersey 08933 B3 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 B 5 Turbidity reduction test B 5 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to verify that a filter is capable of effectively reducing water turbidity caused by suspended particulate matter and to verify the turbidity reduction capability of an alternate sand type media B 5 2 Apparatus flow meter required accuracy is 1 gpm 4 LPM or 2 of reading whichever is greater pressure recording device required accuracy is 0 5 of the smallest division used in the manufacturer s claimed pressure loss turbidimeter required accuracy from 0 to 10 NTU is 0 5 NTU required accuracy above 10 NTU is 5 of the reading or 1 NTU whichever is greater temperature indicating device required accuracy is 2 F 1 C silica 140 water tank and pump system capable of delivering water at the design flow rate through the filter pressure measurement taps sized t
134. and record the test solution values for all parameters listed in the table b Verify and record the salinity concentration of the test solution using one of the following methods Standard Method 2520B for conductivity Standard Method 2520C for density or Titrimetric Method traceable to Hach Method 10073 c A sample of the test solution shall be analyzed with the WQTD units under test in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions d Using the same test units repeat the analysis of the test solution two additional times If applicable rinse the test units with de ionized water between tests e Assess the results of testing based upon the resolution of the device f Average the test results to determine compliance with each accuracy level in O 12 0 12 Accuracy Testing 0 12 1 Accuracy levels for pH Range of operation 5 to 10 L1 Between 6 8 and 7 7 0 2 pH Between 7 8 and 8 4 0 2 pH L2 Between 6 8 and 7 7 0 4 pH Between 7 8 and 8 4 0 4 pH L3 Between 6 8 and 7 7 0 5 pH Between 7 8 and 8 4 0 5 pH Strip or comparator Within 1 increment of the expected value 013 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 0 12 2 Accuracy levels for Chlorine free and combined Range of operation 0 to 10 ppm L1 Between 0 and 3 0 2 ppm Between 3 and 7 0 7 ppm Between 7 and 10 1 5 ppm L2 Between 0 and 1
135. and total bromine a For each bromine concentration to be tested i e 3 9 16 ppm prepare the appropriate test solution see Table O 4 Verify and record the test solution for all parameters listed in the table 010 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Adjustment of the bromine concentration may change the alkalinity and pH values of the test water Do not permit the alkalinity or pH to fall out of range b Verify and record the free or total bromine concentration of the test solution using one of the following methods spectrophotometer for use at a wavelength of 515 nm and providing a light path of 0 4 in 1 cm or longer or filter photometer equipped with a filter having maximum transmission in the wavelength range of 490 to 530 nm and providing a light path of 0 4 in 1 cm or longer c A sample of the test solution shall be analyzed with the WQTD units under test in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions d Using the same test units repeat the analysis of the test solution two additional times If applicable rinse the test units with de ionized water between tests e Assess the results of testing based upon the resolution of the device f Average test results to determine compliance with each accuracy level in 0 12 O 7 Test procedure for hardness a For each hardness concentration to be tested e 80 200 800 ppm prepare the appropriate test solution see Table O 5 Verify and record the test solutio
136. ar f EF Non Competitive Mean yearly frequency values obtained from NHAPS U S EPA 1996a S EF 11 to lt 16 years Competitive Mean value from ACC 2002 which assumed 4 events week x 52weeks year x 11 months year 12 months year EF 6 to lt 11 years Competitive Mean value from ACC 2002 assumed 2 5 events week x 52 weeks year x 6 month year 12 months year BW Adult The average body weight of adult males and females is 70 kg which is the average of the median male and female body weights U S EPA 1997 BW Child The body weight is 54 kg for children age 11 to lt 16 years and 29 kg for children age 6 to lt 11 years based upon Tables 8 4 and 8 5 of the Child Specific Exposure Factors Handbook U S EPA 2008 These values are the average of the 50 percentile body weights for males and females R 6 Swimming pool chemical toxicology evaluation procedure R 6 1 General requirements Following the determination of exposure levels in mg kg day for chemical constituents or contaminants with concentrations in the swimming pool water that exceed 10 ug L at or below the maximum recom mended dose the following approaches may be utilized to determine the acceptability of the calculated exposure levels A determination shall be made as to whether a published publicly available in printed or electronic format and peer reviewed quantitative risk assessment for the chronic exposure to the
137. are not available to support a data derived uncertainty factor Selection of the values of each uncertainty factor shall consider the criteria adapted from Dourson et al 1996 as set forth in Annex R section R 6 4 2 3 1 through section R 6 4 2 3 5 Following determination of the acceptable MoE based on the selected uncertainty factors the calculated MoE based on the above equation may be compared to the acceptable MoE to determine the acceptability of the exposure to the chemical of concern If the calculated MoE using the PDD exceeds the acceptable MoE the ADD may be used in place of the PDD for evaluation purposes however the PDD must also then be evaluated against a short term effect level criterion as established under section R 6 4 4 If a Point of Departure cannot be determined for a chemical of concern due to lack of toxicity data and the chemical concentration in the pool water exceeds the threshold value of 10 ug L at or below the minimum recommended dose the product cannot meet the requirements of this Standard R 6 4 2 3 1 Human variability Selection of the human variability factor shall be based on the availability of data that identify sensitive subpopulations of humans If sufficient data are available to quantitate the toxicokinetic and toxicodynamic variability of humans see Annex R sections R 2 19 and R 2 20 factor values of 3 1 ora value determined from the data shall be considered In the absence of these data th
138. asses of pool chemicals or treatment processes are incompatible with PHMB sanitizer The pool or spa owner should consult with the supplier of PHMB if there is any question about compatability of an auxiliary chemical or process These include but are not limited to chlorine bromine sanitizers copper based algicides monopersulfate peroxymonosulfate oxidizers phosphate based chealtors and detergents electrolytic chlorinators copper silver ionizers When used with ozone follow manufacturer s directions consult pool professional or test kit manufacturer for appropriate test kit regular oxidation is recommended The information contained in this Annex is not part of this American National Standard ANS and has not been processed in accordance with ANSI s requirements for an ANS Therefore this Annex may contain material that has not been subjected to public review or a consensus process In addition it does not contain requirements necessary for conformance to the Standard Q1 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Q 2 Chemical values 1 pH 7 2 7 4 7 6 7 8 a minimum 7 2 b ideal 7 4 7 6 c maximum 7 8 Operating pH at the minimum level requires alkalinity and hardness to be operated at a higher level At maximum pH calcium hardness and total alkalinity may have to be adjusted downward to maintain proper water balance If pH is too high the pool may have or cause low chlorine efficacy
139. ate A non integral strainer shall have a data plate that is permanent easy to read and securely attached cast or stamped into the strainer at a location readily accessible after installation The data plate shall contain the following information manufacturers name and contact information address phone number website or prime supplier non integral strainer model number non integral strainer serial number date code or specification number whether the unit has been evaluated for swimming pools or spas hot tubs if not evaluated for both applications and rated working pressure i e 50 psi 8 Valves This section contains requirements for multiport valves used on filters in public and residential swimming pools and spas hot tubs The requirements apply to the housing valve handle and other components that are integral parts of the multiport valve 8 1 General 8 1 1 Valves and component parts that may require inspection and service shall be accessible 8 1 2 Valves shall be marked or keyed for proper assembly and operation 8 1 3 Valves shall be designed so that parts may be replaced without drilling or otherwise altering the multiport valve or replacement part 8 2 Positive indexing 8 2 1 Valves shall be marked so that the position of the operating handle clearly indicates each operation 29 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 8 2 2 Valves shall be designed so that the position of the operat
140. ater of lt name organisms gt NSF ANSI 50 section 13 20 Cryptosporidium parvum reduction for a 3 log 99 9 or greater in a single pass Specific residual levels of EPA registered disinfecting chemicals may be required by the regulatory agency having authority Level 2 NSF ANSI 50 section 13 19 disinfection efficacy testing for 3 log 99 9 or greater of lt name organisms gt Specific residual levels of EPA registered disinfecting chemicals may be required by the regulatory agency having authority 13 20 Cryptosporidium reduction Manufacturers of an ozone generation system with a claim of Cryptosporidium parvum reduction shall demonstrate a minimum of 3 log 99 9 or greater reduction of Cryptosporidium parvum in a single pass when tested in accordance with Annex H 4 The ozone generation system shall reduce the number of live Cryptosporidium parvum oocysts from an influent challenge of at least 5000 5 x 10 infectious oocysts per liter by at least 99 9 when tested in accordance with annex H section H 3 The Cryptosporidium parvum oocysts shall be from a calf source The viability shall be greater than 50 determined by excystation The oocysts shall be stored with 1000 LU mL penicillin and 1000 pg mL streptomycin at 39 F 4 C and shall be used within eight weeks of collection The live Cryptosporidium parvum oocysts shall not be inactivated by any means including chemical or UV irradiation prior to passing through the o
141. ation address phone number website or prime supplier model number electrical requirements 54 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 serial number and or date of manufacture maximum output rate in lbs or kg per day per hour and maximum daily operation time if not designed for continuous operation 16 8 Valve and component identification All valves and performance indication devices shall have a permanent easily legible and conspicuous label or tag identifying their operation 16 9 Operating conditions Components of the system coming into contact with the circulated water shall be designed to withstand a maximum operating temperature of 102 5 F 39 3 C and a minimum rated pressure of 50 psig 345 kPa 16 10 Injection methods Injection methods shall be designed to prevent off gassing in excess of the OSHA standards for in air chlorine concentrations for both acute and long term exposure The manufacturer shall provide certification of performance 16 11 Operational protection 16 11 1 Systems shall have an automatic mechanism for shutting off the system to withstand support equipment failures without damage to the system An example of system failure requiring an automatic shut off device is interruption of water flow through the system 16 11 2 Warning devices A visual and or audible alarm shall be provided to warn the user when the salt concentration level falls below the manufacturer s re
142. ation manual for applicable warnings prominently displayed including a caution statement that the unit is designed for supplemental disinfection and should be used with registered or approved disinfection chemicals to impart required residual concentrations output rate in amount of copper time at each setting and maximum daily operation time if not designed for continuous operation 17 8 Disinfection efficacy Process equipment designed for supplemental disinfection shall demonstrate a 3 log reduction of influent bacteria when tested according to Annex H Process equipment shall carry the following information in the installation and use instructions and be noted in the official certification listings This unit has demonstrated an ability to provide three log inactivation of lt name organisms gt when copper levels are maintained at lt enter concentration gt and silver levels are maintained at lt enter concentration gt This unit has not demonstrated an ability to provide three log inactivation of lt name organisms if applicable gt This product is designed to be operated with no less than 0 4 ppm free chlorine or 0 8 ppm free bromine Additional residual levels of EPA registered disinfecting chemicals may be required by the regulatory agency having authority 17 9 Valve and component identification All valves and performance indication devices shall have a permanent easily legible and conspicuous label or tag identifyi
143. ation of exposure This factor is intended to extrapolate ex 1 3 or 10 perimental results from subchronic to chronic exposure n veloping a reference dose from a LOAEL rather than an NOAEL Va specific toxic endpoints dE This adjustment is not required for BMD calculations NOTE When uncertainties exist in four areas a 3000 fold composite uncertainty factor is appropriate When uncertainties exist in five areas a 10 000 fold composite uncertainty factor is appropriate This con solidation of individual factors recognizes that each individual factor is conservative and multiplication of four or five uncertainty factors is likely to result in an overly conservative RfD Datasets that would result in a composite uncertainty factor of greater than 10 000 fold are considered too weak for quantitative risk as sessment Dourson 1994 R26 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Interpretation Annex Requestor s Interpretation of the Section Section 5 2 Precoat media type filters 5 2 1 3 Septa shall be maintained in such a position as to preclude surface contacts that reduce effective surface area Because some tube type elements are flexible and may have incidental contact during operation the interpretation is that systems designed with flexible tube type elements may operate with incidental contact providing that the system meets the turbidity reduction requirements of 5 1 9 5 2 3 1 Filters shall be designed to provid
144. ation range for automated controllers as applicable Parameter Suggested Operation Ranges Measurement Accuracy ORP 650 to 850 mV 20 mV pH 6 8 to 8 2 0 2 free available chlorine 0 to 10 ppm as Cl 10 or bromine 0 to 20 ppm as Brz total chlorine or 0 to 10 ppm as Cl 10 bromine 0 to 20 ppm as Br S For other parameters testing shall be conducted at four increments between 0 and 100 of the full operating range If an automated controller does not have a digital or analog display then an alternate means of verification shall be conducted This alternate shall be outlined by the manufacturer and shall be able to demonstrate control of the pH and chlorine values of the water as specified in Table 18 1 18 5 2 Set point At any set point within a parameter range specified in Table 18 1 an automated controller shall provide an equipment actuation signal actuate in response to the signal from an applicable sensor The actual parameter value at which the automated controller actuates shall be within the tolerance specified in Table 18 1 relative to the set point 60 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 18 6 Failure sensing and signaling devices The automated controller shall possess a default mechanism or process capable of detecting and delivering a distinct visible signal to notify the user when the controller is not maintaining a parameter within the acceptable range for swimming pool or spa hot tu
145. aximum flow rate and greatest power of the exercise resistance system 20 5 3 4 Specialty vacuum fittings If soa vacuum cleaning fitting used to temporarily install a hose for vacuuming the spa floor is utilized it shall be installed outside the spa shell in a location inaccessible to spa users If provided within the spa the spa vacuum cleaning fitting shall be installed with a lockable specialty vacuum closure fitting which complies with the requirements of section 3 and IAPMO SPS 4 20 5 3 5 Water return fittings 20 5 3 5 1 Fittings that return water to the spa shall comply with this Standard for corrosion resistance and material safety 20 5 3 5 2 The entire system shall be designed with 2 or more water return fittings to aid in circulation of the water within the spa system 20 5 4 Filters Spas or swim spas utilizing a non self contained skid pack with a filter s shall comply with the requirements of this section 20 5 4 1 Pumps and filtration system components shall be designed and sized to supply sufficient flow rate to operate the filter and meet the required turnover rate The filter shall meet the requirements of this Standard 20 5 4 2 Separate filter data plate and operational instructions are not required if the filter information is provided in the spa or equipment manual 20 5 5 Surface skimmers weirs and overflows or perimeter grating The spa shall be designed to draw water from the top via one or more of the followi
146. b water as set by the user 18 7 Operational protection 18 7 1 The automated controller shall have an automatic mechanism for preventing the operation of any chemical feeder actuated by the controller whenever water circulation at the chemical injection points is interrupted 18 7 2 The controller shall automatically turn off the equipment actuated by the controller when a parameter maintained by the automated controller remains outside the set point range for longer than the manufacturer s recommended time limit an equipment operation cycle e g chemical feed cycle exceeds the manufacturer s recommended time limit 18 8 Operation and installation instructions The manufacturer shall supply installation and operation instructions with each automated controller These instructions shall include the following proper installation operation and maintenance instructions installation instructions shall document how the controller should be wired in order to provide for electrical interlock for chemical feeders with a circulation pump diagrams and a parts list to facilitate the identification and ordering of replacement parts replacement probe or sensor model numbers maximum external load rated in volts and amps caution statement warning the user that the automatic controller should not be installed where it is accessible to the public and applicable operating ranges such as pH and ORP minimum and max
147. ber optional maximum output rate recommended use chemical s and a caution statement indicating that the use of chemicals other than those recommended by the manufacturer may be hazardous The data plate shall indicate whether a flow through chemical feeder is designed for swimming pool applications only or spa hot tub applications only A flow through chemical feeder that is designed for both applications is exempt from this requirement 12 Filtration media This section contains requirements for filtration media for use in commercial and residential filters 12 1 Pre coat filter media Pre coat media shall conform to the requirements of 3 12 1 1 Pre coat filter media Pre coat media shall meet the applicable requirements of Annex B sections B 3 B 4 B 5 B 6 B 7 and B 8 12 1 2 The manufacturer of pre coat media shall provide written instructions for the installation of the media in a filter for any specific preparation of the media for operation and for the operation of filter with the media 12 1 3 Pre coat filter media labeling requirements Pre coat media shall contain the following information on the product packaging or documentation shipped with the product 39 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 manufacturers name and contact information address phone number website or prime supplier product identification product type and tradename net weight or net volume when applica
148. bility and or direct reactivity with tissues Dermal Chemical properties to consider when assessing the contribution of dermal exposure include but are not limited to molecular weight and or Kow Using U S EPA SWIMMODEL 2003a equations and the assumptions provided in this Annex R expo sure estimates may be calculated for adults men and women children ages 11 to lt 16 and children ages 6 to lt 11 Additionally the available assumptions allow for exposure estimates for each age group based on whether the individual is a competitive or non competitive swimmer For non competitive swim mers the equations and assumptions provided in this Annex R allow for differing exposure concentrations depending on acute or chronic end points Limitations and caveats in the equations from U S EPA SWIMMODEL 2003a include the following a the model focuses on potential chemical intakes only and does not take into account metabolism or excretion of the chemical being assessed b the model uses the following absorption facts for each route of exposure Ingestion 100 absorption of ingested chemicals is assumed Dermal Chemical specific decimal K is used Inhalation 100 absorption of inhaled chemical is assumed c the model does not account for the effect of ambient temperature on intake d the exposure estimates are derived based on use of the chemical in swimming pools only When estimating swimming exposure the U
149. ble mesh or sieve size lot number or other production identifier such as a date code when appropriate special handling storage and use instructions and the specific certification mark of the certifying organization for certified products 12 2 Sand and alternate sand type filter media 12 2 1 Sand and alternate sand type filter media shall conform to the requirements of 3 12 2 2 Sand filter media 12 2 2 1 Filter sand shall be hard silica like material that is free of carbonates clay and other foreign material The effective particle size shall be between 0 016 in 0 40 mm and 0 022 in 0 55 mm and the uniformity coefficient shall not exceed 1 75 Filters intended for use with an alternate media that does not conform to these requirements shall specify the alternate media on the data plate The filter and the alternate media shall conform to the other applicable requirements of this Standard 12 2 2 2 If a different media is used to support the filter media it shall be rounded material that is free of limestone and clay and installed according to the manufacturer s instructions When the support media and the filter media are installed in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations the filter media shall not intermix with the support media when operated and backwashed at least three cycles in accordance with Annex B section B 4 12 2 3 Sand and alternate sand typefilter media Filter media in a sand type filter shall c
150. cal feeders Some modification may be required when evaluating differing types of flow through chemical feeder designs However the intent of the method shall be maintained when these modifications are made a Install the flow through chemical feeder in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions with its influent connected to the discharge side of the supply pump and its effluent directed to drain Position a flow meter inline with the feeder b Fill the tank with water conditioned to parameters specified in Annex G section G 3 3 Fill the feeder with the maximum amount of recommended chemicals c Condition the feeder for 10 min 30 s by running the appropriate test water through the feeder at the maximum 100 output rate control mechanism setting d Allow the feeder to operate at the maximum output rate control mechanism setting for 1h 6 min Sample both the influent and the effluent from the feeder and determine the concentration of active chemical being dispensed after the 1 h conditioning period This sample will provide the first of five sample points used to determine repeatability e Continue operating the feeder at the maximum output rate control mechanism setting and sample both the influent and the effluent of the feeder four times so that each sample is taken at a 5 min interval Determine the concentration of the active chemical in each influent and effluent sample These data shall be used to determine repeatability
151. commended minimum level 16 12 Chemical resistant materials Equipment parts shall incorporate materials that are resistant to the environment to which the parts will be subjected 16 13 Output rate 16 13 1 Integrated production over a period not to exceed 12 h shall be easily adjustable or adjustable with simple tools e g screwdriver pliers open end wrench in a sufficient number of increments to facilitate use The output rate control may be accomplished by any automatic means including but not limited to oxidation reduction potential ORP or residual chlorine sensor control switch duty cycle control input or output power voltage and or current control or a five position switch four settings and oft 16 13 2 Delivery Systems shall deliver chemicals within 20 of any setting during a 12 h period and a reproducibility of 55 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 10 at any setting over deliveries from 25 to 100 rated capacity for adjustable output chlorinators Chlorinators designed for one output or for use with separate automated controllers see 18 to control the delivery to the water body shall be evaluated at 100 rated capacity 16 14 Life test When tested in accordance with the life test described in annex a minimum of 8000 operating hours shall be accumulated among the three units no less than 3000 operating hours shall be accumulated on one of the three units At the conclusion of the
152. concentration of the test solution using one of the following methods Standard Method 4500 CI F DPD Ferrous Titrimetric Method spectrophotometer for use at a wavelength of 515 nm and providing a light path of 0 4 in 1 cm or longer or filter photometer equipped with a filter having maximum transmission in the wavelength range of 490 to 530 nm and providing a light path of 0 4 in 1 cm or longer O9 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 c A sample of the test solution shall be analyzed with the WQTD units under test in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions d Using the same test units repeat the analysis of the test solution two additional times If applicable rinse the test units with de ionized water between tests e Assess the results of testing based upon the resolution of the device f Average test results to determine compliance with each accuracy level in 0 12 g Assess the results of testing based upon the resolution of the device Ob Test procedure combined chlorine Combined Chlorine should be tested at a reasonable actionable level of 0 5 ppm as whole ppm concentrations may cause interference in most DPD free chlorine determinations Free chlorine will not be tested in the presence of combined chorine and vice versa a For each chlorine concentration to be tested e 2 4 5 ppm prepare the appropriate test solution see Table O 3 Verify and record the test solution values for all paramet
153. cording to the equipment manufacturer s instructions All test equipment shall have a resolution and accuracy appropriate to the listed values for each parameter Record all performed calibrations 0 1 1 8 Test sample preparation If required each unit of the WQTD under test shall be conditioned or calibrated in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Record all performed calibrations 0 2 Stock solution preparation Always prepare a volume of test water to allow for not only the test system check at each sample point but also for verification testing Two liters of water is typically sufficient When test strips are being tested that are designed for in situ testing a fresh aliquot shall be removed from the general test water sample to immerse each test strip Do not immerse the test strip into the general test water sample a Sodium Bicarbonate Solution Dissolve 16 8 g of NaHCO in about 500 ml DI water and dilute to one liter with DI water 10 ml of this solution added to one liter will result in alkalinity of 100 ppm as CaCOs prior to pH adjustment b Calcium Chloride Solution Dissolve 14 7 g CaCl 2H 0 in about 500 mI DI water and dilute to one liter with DI water 10 ml of this solution added to one liter will result in Ca hardness of 100 ppm as CaCOs3 c Sodium Chloride Solution Dissolve 100 g NaCl in 500 ml DI water and dilute to one liter with DI water Each ml added to one liter will increase TDS by 100 ppm d
154. ct identification product type and trade name net weight or net volume when applicable mesh or sieve size lot number or other production identifier such as a date code when appropriate special handling storage and use instructions and the specific certification mark of the certifying organization for certified products 5 3 5 Filter media behavior 5 3 5 1 Filter media shall not be removed during backwashing at a rate of 15 gal min ft 610 L min m or the manufacturer s recommended backwash rate 5 3 5 2 Media shall be capable of being thoroughly cleaned when backwashed following the manufacturer s recommendations 5 3 5 3 Filter media and supporting material shall not migrate during the filtration cycle The filter bed shall remain level during the filtration cycle when operated at the design flow rate The maximum difference between the highest and lowest elevations on the surface of the filter bed shall not exceed the values shown in Table 5 2 Table 5 2 Maximum difference in media surface elevations on a sand type filter Filter diameter D Maximum elevation difference lt 36 in 0 9 m 3 in 76 mm 36 to 63 in 0 9 to 1 6m 0 083 x D pin 135mm O gt 63 in 1 6m 5 25 in 135 mm For filters with non circular surface geometry D shall equal the maximum horizontal dimension on the media surface 5 3 5 4 Filter media and supporting material shall not impart color to the water during filter
155. ct installation instructions standard reference NSF ANSI Standard 50 and certification mark use conditions indoor use only Indoor indoor and outdoor use Outdoor and rated open area for water flow expressed as percent open water 21 4 Fittings for water circulation and treatment Fittings designed for use in circulation and treatment systems shall comply with the material formulation and corrosion resistance requirements of the section on material of this Standard and the performance requirements within NSF ANSI 14 If the fitting requirements are not addressed by one of the plumbing 78 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 standards referenced within NSF ANSI 14 such as ASTM D2464 D2466 or D2467 the fitting shall be tested to the following Dimensional compliance with the referenced standard or manufacturers specified design requirements including critical dimensions such as wall thickness socket dimensions thread dimensions or barb dimensions to ensure proper connection with piping Hydrostatic and or cyclical pressure testing shall be conducted in accordance with the referenced fitting product standard In the absence of a referenced standard and its burst requirement the fit tings shall have a minimum working pressure of 50 psi 845 kPa and be evaluated and tested for a hydrostatic pressure equal to 1 5 times the rated working pressure for 300 seconds and 20 000 consecutive low high 0
156. ction Agency USEPA under the Federal Insecticide Fungicide and Rodenticide Act FIFRA as recommended in the manufacturer s manual The applicable requirements of this Standard shall apply to equipment recommended or supplied by the spa manufacturer for use in chlorine bromine sanitation 20 8 1 1 Spa disinfection systems shall be sized to meet varying regulatory requirements The spa manufacturer shall specify or require at least one size type system of Level 1 Level 2 or Level 3 disin fection system be installed The soa manufacturer shall recommend or supply disinfection systems capa ble of meeting one or more of these levels Level 1 Capable of providing a minimum of 3 Ibs of chlorine per day per 1 000 gal of spa water volume Level 2 Capable of providing a minimum of 1 5 lbs of chlorine per day per 1 000 gal of spa water volume Level 3 Capable of providing a minimum of 0 5 Ibs of chlorine per day per 1 000 gal of spa water volume 20 8 1 2 Spa systems for public use shall not require direct or hand feeding of disinfection oxidation chemicals except in extreme cases such as super chlorination or water balancing Systems shall be of one or more of the following types and shall meet the applicable requirements of mechanical chemical feeding systems see section 10 flow through chemical feeding systems see section 11 electrolytic in line or batch chlorine bromine generators see section 15
157. ction F 5 35 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 10 5 Hydrostatic pressure Components of a mechanical chemical feeder that normally operates under pressure shall show no evidence of rupture leakage burst or permanent deformation when subjected to a hydrostatic pressure 1 5 times the manufacturer s maximum operating pressure see Annex F section F 1 10 6 Life test When tested in accordance with the life test described in Annex F section F 4 a minimum of 8000 operating hours shall be accumulated among the three units no less than 3000 operating hours shall be accumulated on one of the three units At the conclusion of the testing the units shall perform as intended by the manufacturer and shall continue to conform to the uniformity of output suction lift and pressure requirements of this section 10 7 Shielding Moving parts of the feeder shall be covered so that no openings are exposed 10 8 Motors 10 8 1 Motors shall be continuous duty and shall conform to the requirements of Article 430 of NFPA 70 NEC 10 8 2 Motors shall use standard voltages and cycles 10 9 Suction lift Positive displacement pump mechanical feeders operating with a suction lift of 4 ft 1 2 m of water at 80 back pressure and 100 of their rated capacity shall deliver an output rate that is within 10 of the delivery specified by the manufacturer see Annex F section F 6 10 10 Protection against overdosing The manufacturer shall provide pr
158. curacy requirements for gauges but the measurement does not need to be within 25 to 75 of the range of the transducer 3 Challenge water swimming pool spa hot tub filters water temperature 75 10 F 24 6 C 4 Hydrostatic pressure test method pressure service filters a Install filter media and or elements and all integral components according to the manufacturer s instructions Connect the filter to the pressure testing rig b Fill the unit with the appropriate challenge water and bleed off all air c Adjust the pressure regulator to apply a hydrostatic pressure equal to 1 5 times the working pressure of the unit Maintain the pressure for 300 30 s Slowly release the pressure and examine the tank and its integral components for evidence of a rupture leak burst or other deformation d Adjust the pressure regulator to apply a hydrostatic pressure of 30 1 psi 207 7 kPa and maintain it for 2 0 5 s The pressurization rate shall not exceed 30 psi s Slowly release the pressure and maintain a hydrostatic pressure of 0 psi 0 kPa for 2 0 5 s Automatic timers shall be used to ensure that the proper pressures are applied and maintained for the required intervals Repeat this cycle 20 000 times and examine the tank and its integral components for evidence of a rupture leak burst or other deformation e After the cycle test in step d adjust the pressure regulator so that the pressure applied on the filter increas
159. d NOTE 2 Operator warning High FAC 10 will skew results Lower via sodium thiosulfate etc prior to taking pH reading O17 2015 NSF Table O 2 Free Chlorine NSF ANSI 50 2015 pH Hydrochloric Total Alkalinity DI water mL Calcium CaCl Magnesium FA ARE Temperature C acid sodium hy Sodium Bicar ppm MgCI ppm NaOCI ppm droxide bonate NaHCO HCI NaOH ppm 1000 220 30 80 10 0 5 0 2 27 1 7 6 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 7 6 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 3 0 0 2 27 1 7 6 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 5 0 0 5 27 1 7 6 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 10 0 1 0 27 1 7 6 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 0 5 0 2 39 1 7 6 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 39 1 7 6 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 3 0 0 2 39 1 7 6 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 5 0 0 5 39 1 7 6 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 10 0 1 0 39 1 7 6 0 1 100 10 NOTE TDS NaCl removed from pH FC CC water challenge due to lack of impact on results at target levels Table 0 3 Combine Chlorine FAC Sodium ene ace Total Alkalinity DI water mi Calcium Magnesium Hypochlorite CI N ppm Temperature jgisodium hy Sodium Bicar CACI2 ppm MgCl2 ppm C bonate NaOCl ppm droxide NaHCO ppm HCI NaOH 3 PP 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 0 2 0 1 27226 7 6
160. d in Annex F section F 3 mechanical chemical feeders exposed to the maximum in use concentration of the applicable chemical s specified for the feeder for a test period of 100 d shall show no signs of erosion or structural deformation 10 3 2 Following the 100 d chemical exposure specified in 10 3 1 and 24 h of operation at 100 output rate mechanical chemical feeders shall conform to the uniformity of output requirements in 10 4 2 Fixed or single rate feeders for use with automatic controllers shall conform to 10 4 3 10 4 Output rate 10 4 1 Mechanical chemical feeders shall have an output rate control mechanism that is adjustable in at least four increments over the full operating range The mechanism for regulating the output rate shall be readily accessible when the feeder is installed in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions 10 4 2 Mechanical chemical feeders shall deliver chemicals in slurries solutions or solids at an output rate that is within 10 of feed rate indicator setting over deliveries from 25 to 100 of the rated capacity when operated at the maximum back pressure recommended by the manufacturer see Annex F section F 5 10 4 3 Fixed or single rate mechanical chemical feeders shall deliver chemicals in slurries solutions or solids at an output rate that is within 10 of feed rate at 100 of the rated capacity when operated at the maximum back pressure recommended by the manufacturer see Annex F se
161. d location and before entering the pool Generator sizing formula g h ozone required F X D X 0 227 Where F side stream flow D dose NOTE if a higher Ozone Dose is applied to any of the above formulas retention time may be reduced accordingly J 7 Copper silver and copper ion generators J 7 1 Halogen levels These systems are intended for the supplemental treatment of the water not the replacement of the disinfecting halogen being used e g chlorine bromine The halogen levels in the pool along with the copper levels should be maintained at levels required by state or local regulations to ensure adequate disinfection J 7 2 Other chemical agents When copper based algaecides are used care should be taken that the total copper ion levels in the pool do not exceed the maximum limits required by state and local regulations Superchlorination of a pool may cause precipitation of the copper and silver ions present in the water The manufacturer s recommended procedures should be followed to avoid the possibility of staining J 8 Ultraviolet UV light process equipment J 8 1 Halogen levels UV light process systems are intended for the supplemental treatment of the water not the replacement of the disinfecting halogen being used e g chlorine or bromine The halogen levels in the pool along with the copper levels should be maintained at levels required by state and local regulations to ensure adequate disinfectio
162. d similar environments The oxidative reduction potential ORP of redox can also be used in the operational monitoring of disinfection efficacy In order to help maintain water in a protective and biologically resistant state ORP should be maintained in excess of 680 mV when using a calomel electrode or above 720 mV when using a silver chloride electrode These values suggest that the water is in good microbial condition although it is suggested that appropriate values should be determined on a case by case basis Prior to that in 1972 the World Health Organization adopted an ORP standard for drinking water disinfection of 650 mV WHO stated that when the oxidation reduction potential in a body of water measures 650 1000 about 2 3 of a volt the sanitizer in the water is active enough to destroy some harmful organisms very quickly APSP In its 1998 standards for commercial pools and spas the Association of Pool and Spa Professionals then known as the National Spa and Pool Institute stated that ORP can be used as a supplemental measurement of proper sanitizer activity when chlorine or bromine are used as primary disinfectants The recommended minimum reading under the NSPI standards is 650 mV with no ideal and no maximum The current ANSI APSP 11 2009 Standard for Water Quality in Public Pools and Spas doesn t provide any quantitative values or recommendations for ORP values Q7 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 This page i
163. d the free available chlorine B 7 4 Acceptance criteria The cellulose media shall last at least as long as DE before a recharge is needed The turbidity level measured in Annex B section B 7 3 shall not exceed 1 NTU throughout the duration of the test B 8 Media Permeability and cake density test procedure B 8 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to determine the cake density and D Arcy permeability of precoat type filtration media B 8 2 Equipment scale accurate to 0 01 gm vacuum gauge accurate to 1 FS stopwatch capable of measuring 0 01 seconds thermocouple accurate to 1 F 0 5 C permeability testing rig see figure B 1 1 diameter 8 S filter paper 100 mL glass beaker 100 mL graduated cylinder and rinse bottle with de ionized water B 8 3 Procedure a Three 2 00 0 05 g samples of the filtration media shall be measured and recorded b A new filter shall be installed under the permeability tube c The valve on the permeability rig shall be closed and the vacuum shall be adjusted to 20 0 0 1 Hg d A clean glass beaker shall be filled with 30 1 mL of de ionized water The temperature of the water shall be measured and recorded e One of the 2 00 g samples of filtration media shall be placed in the beaker to make slurry f The slurry shall be added to the permeability tube The valve shall be opened at the base of the tube as the slurry is ad
164. d the pH on the display h Slowly add 1 N sulfuric acid solution until the controller de actuates and record the pH on the display i Repeat the test with each sensor for a total of four tests Calculate the average pH displayed for the actuation and de actuation Record the largest variance of a single reading from the average values N 2 3 2 Chlorine Bromine N 2 3 2 1 Monitor display accuracy a Calibrate a spectrophotometer using standard solutions following Standard Methods 4500 Cl G such that the instrument is capable of measuring available chlorine levels in the range of 0 10 ppm or for bromine using HACH Method 8016 for available bromine levels in the range of 0 20 ppm b Weigh 0 20 g of 5 sodium hypochlorite solution Quantitatively transfer to a 1 L volumetric flask and dilute to volume using de ionized water The resulting stock solution should contain approximately 10 ppm available chlorine For preparing an aqueous bromine solution obtain a 0 1 N Bromine Standard Solution Perform serial dilutions e g 1 10 1 10 1 4 1 2 so that the resulting stock solution contains approximately 20 ppm available bromine c Using the appropriate analytical method from part a measure the available chlorine level for the stock sodium hypochlorite solution or the bromine level for the stock bromine standard solution d Volumetrically dilute the stock sodium hypochlorite solution by the appropriate proportions to give four soluti
165. ded g The slurry shall be removed from the beaker by rinsing with a wash bottle filled with de ionized water Approximately 2 3 rinses shall be required B7 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 h The cake shall be allowed to build by allowing the water to run down to a level approximately 1 mL above the cake i The permeability tube shall be refilled with clean de ionized water above the 24 mL graduation j A timer shall be started as the water level reaches and passes the 24 mL graduation As the water level passes the 16 mL graduation the timer shall be stopped Record the time to flow 8 mL k The water shall be allowed to flow out of the tube and past the cake The valve shall be closed at the bottom of the permeability rig 1 The volume of the cake shall be measured and recorded to 0 1 mL m The permeability tube shall be removed and cleaned n Steps b through m shall be repeated two additional times o D Arcy Permeability shall be calculated using the following equation D Arcy Permeability K q u AX A AP Where K D Arcy Permeability cm q Fluid flow rate mL s u Dynamic viscosity Pa s AX Thickness of the medium cm A Cross sectional area of the medium cm AP Applied pressure differential Pa p Cake Density shall be calculated using the following equation Cake Density bett 62 428 Sample Mass g Cake Volume mL B 8 4 Acceptance criteria The initial and annual testing results
166. ded to be drained and filled with each use It is manufactured to factory specifications using specific design plumbing components and suppliers such that the water is circulated treated and filtered via a closed loop system This may include certain systems or components integral to the spa including but limited to tub or shell structure and support system steps and seats hand hold s and rail s filter s pump s Suction fitting s or drain s water return fittings skimmers piping tubing hose other air or water distributing fitting s resistance exercise equipment heater s solar electric or gas chemical treatment system s control system jets lighting blowers A V equipment or as part of a separate manufacturer specified assembly skid pack A water basin may contain specific features and equipment to produce a water flow intended to allow physical activity but not limited to exercising or swimming in place hydro therapy resistance exercise or flotation and it is designed to allow for an unobstructed volume of water large enough to allow these activities 2 114 spray rinse manual Spray system used manually for washing filter aid and or accumulated dirt from filter surface either in place or after removal from filter tank usually by a hose and nozzle 2 115 spray rinse mechanical Fixed or mechanically movable spray system that directs a stream of water against filter surface and causes the filter aid and or accumulated
167. dirt to dislodge 2 116 standard rate rapid rate Design filtration rate is not greater than 3 gal min ft 122 L min m for public pools spas or hot tubs and not greater than 5 gal min ft 203 L min m for residential pools spas or hot tubs 2 117 static suction lift Vertical distance in meters feet from center line of the pump impeller to pool water level 2 118 strainer basket Readily removable perforated or otherwise porous container to catch coarse material 2 119 supporting material Material to support filter media in a sand type filter 2 120 surface type cartridge Filter cartridge with media relying on retention of particles on the surface of the cartridge for removal 2 121 test solution The liquid used to conduct a particular test or challenge 2 122 total bromine the sum of all active bromine compounds 2 123 total chlorine The sum of free and combined chlorine compounds 2 124 total dynamic head Arithmetic difference between total discharge head and suction head A vacuum reading is considered a negative pressure This value is used in developing the performance curve 2 125 total discharge head The static discharge head plus the discharge velocity head plus the friction head in the discharge line 2 128 total suction head The static suction head minus the friction head in the suction line 2 127 total dynamic suction lift TDSL Arithmetic total of static suction lift friction head los
168. disodium hydrogen phosphate Na HPO 12H20 and 2 g potassium chloride KCl in water to a final volume of 1 L A working solution shall be prepared from the stock solution by diluting 1 volume of the stock with 9 volumes of water The pH shall be adjusted using a pH meter to 7 4 with 0 1 NHCI or 0 1 NaOH before use human ileocecal adenocarcinoma cell line HCT 8 cell shall be used as a host and maintained in RPMI 1640 media RPMI 1640 media HCT 8 cell growth media to 90 mL of RPMI 1640 plus antibiotic mixture the following reagents shall be added 12 mL Fetal Bovine Serum FBS 10 12 mL Opti MEM 10 1 2 mL sodium pyruvate 1 and 2 5 mL HEPES 2 The media shall be stored in 39 F 4 C fridge and pre warmed in water before use normal goat serum NGS blocking buffer 0 2 mL NGS and 0 002 tween 20 shall be added 10 mL 1XPBS primary antibody the amount of primary antibody rat anti sporozoite shall be calculated prior to testing The calculated amount in uL shall be added to 10 mL 1XPBS secondary antibody 31 3 uL secondary antibody anti Rat IgG with FTIC shall be added to 10 mL 1XPBS and Cryptosporidium parvum oocysts live at least 50 viability shall be verified by the supplier The oocysts shall be stored with 1000 I U mL penicillin and 1000 ug mL streptomycin at 39 F 4 C and shall be used within eight weeks of collection H 4 4 Safety H 4 4 1 Th
169. e Federal Register 56 20 3526 3614 U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 1991b Guidelines for developmental toxicity risk assessment Federal Register 56 234 63798 63826 Available at www epa gov raf publications guidelines dev toxicity risk assessment html gt U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 1992 Dermal Exposure Assessment Principles and Applications Office of Research and Development Table 5 7 Predicted Kp Estimates for Common Pollutants EPA 600 8 91 011B Washington DC U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 1993 Reference dose RfD Description and use in health risk assessment Integrated Risk Information System IRIS Background document 1A dated March 15 1993 lt www epa gov ncea ins rfd htm gt U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 1995 Risk Assessment Forum The Use of the Benchmark Dose Approach in Health Risk Assessment EPA 630 R 94 007 U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 1996a Office of Research and Developmental Descriptives Statistics Tables from a Detailed Analysis of the National Human Activity Pattern NHAPS Data EPA 600 R 96 148 July 1996 Data collection Period October 1992 September 1994 U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 1996 Guidelines for reproductive toxicity risk assessment Federal Register 61 212 56274 56322 Available at lt http www eap gov raf publications guidelines reproductive tox risk assessment ht
170. e special handling storage and use instructions and the specific certification mark of the certifying organization for certified products 13 Ozone process equipment 13 1 General Ozone generation process equipment covered by this section is intended for the secondary disinfection of the water in the circulation system of public and residential recreational water facilities including but are not limited to pools and spas hot tubs therapy pools and interactive aquatic play features Since these products are not intended to produce residual levels of disinfectant within the body of water an EPA reg istered disinfecting chemical shall be added to impart a measurable residual The measurable residual disinfecting chemical shall be easily and accurately measured by a water quality device certified to sec tion 19 13 2 Ozone components Ozone generation systems shall include but are not limited to the following components ozone generator ozone venturi injector reaction degas system gaseous ozone destruct ORP monitor controller ambient ozone monitor controller Smaller residential type ozone generators are not required to include all components of a commercial system 13 3 Ozone generator The ozone generator shall be designed to maintain ozone under vacuum from generation to the point of injection in the water stream Automatic feed gas flow control shall be incorporated to maintain a vacuum set poi
171. e Figure H1 in this annex H 2 3 Test water The test water shall be as specified in section H 1 3 but shall not include the elements added to simulate an organic and microbiological load H 2 4 Method Install the ozone device in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions and operate the unit until a steady state condition exists and the maximum ozone output rate is reached Continue operating the system for 1 h measuring the ozone level in the test vessel water at 15 min intervals H 2 5 Acceptance At no time during the test shall the ozone concentration in the test vessel water exceed 0 1 ppm H5 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 Table H 1 Disinfection efficacy sampling sequence organisms 100 mL organisms 100 mL Description of sampling event Enterococcus Pseudomonas faecium aeroginosa Sample number tank prior to inoculation 1 1 Annex H section H1 6 2 e tank prior to inoculation 2 2 Annex H section H1 6 2 e tank prior to inoculation 3 3 Annex H section H1 6 2 e tank after inoculation and mixing 4 before start of device 1 Annex H section H1 6 2 f tank after inoculation and mixing 5 before start of device 2 Annex H section H1 6 2 f tank after inoculation and mixing before start of device 3 Annex H section H1 6 2 f effluent after first turnover 1 Annex H section H1 6 2 1 a effluent after first turnover 2 Annex H section H1 6 2 1 a efflue
172. e a minimum clearance between adjacent filter elements equal to the thickness or diameter of the element or 1 in 25mm whichever is less Because some tube type elements are flexible and may have incidental contact during operation the interpretation is that the minimum clearance shall be measured edge to edge between the un coated tubes at the point where the tubes are anchored into the head of the filter 5 2 3 2 The clearance between filter elements shall be sufficient to prevent contact between the septa during backwashing operations Because some tube type elements are flexible and may have incidental contact during operation and because many precoat filters are regenerated as opposed to backwashed the interpretation of this section is that the clearance between filter elements shall be sufficient to meet the re quirements of the cleanability test of section B 4 JC Chair Response While the JC chair is in agreement with the interpretation presented in the Request for Interpretation doc ument the interpretation and the application within the context of the standard is in conflict when viewing the standard quite literally Because the material of the tube element is flexible rather than rigid and the design of the placement of the tubes within the filter housing does not compensate for the flexibility to render the tubes immobile whereby bridging would be restricted there is a disconnect between language in the standard and its applicati
173. e biohazard associated with and the risk of infection from oocysts is high in this method because live organisms are handled This method does not purport to address all the safety problems associated with its use It shall be the responsibility of the laboratory to establish appropriate safety and health practices prior to the use of this method In particular the analyst technician shall know and observe the safety procedures required in a microbiology laboratory that handles pathogenic organisms while preparing using and disposing of sample concentrates reagents and materials and while operating sterilization equipment H12 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 H 4 4 2 The toxicity or carcinogenicity of each compound or reagent used in this method has not been precisely determined Each chemical compound should be treated as a potential health hazard Exposure to these compounds should be reduced to the lowest possible level The laboratory shall be responsible for maintaining a current awareness file of Occupational Safety and Health Administration regulations regarding the safe handling of the chemicals specified in this method A reference file of material safety data sheets should be made available to all personnel involved in these areas H 4 4 3 Samples that contain high concentrations of biohazards and toxic compounds shall be handled with gloves and opened in a biological safety cabinet to prevent exposure Reference materials and standa
174. e default value of 10 shall be used Dourson et al 1996 R18 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 R 6 4 2 3 2 Interspecies variability Selection of the interspecies variability factor shall be based on the availability of data that allow for a quantitative extrapolation of animal dose to the equivalent human dose for effects of similar magnitude or for an NOAEL This includes scientifically documented differences or similarities in physiology metabolism and toxic response s between experimental animals and humans If sufficient data are available to quantitate the toxicokinetic and toxicodynamic variabilities between experimental animals and humans see Annex R sections R 2 19 and R 2 20 factor values of 3 1 or a value determined from the data shall be considered When HED conversion is conducted by use of body weight BW scaling the interspecies uncertainty factor default value may be reduced from 10 to 3 In the absence of these data the default value of 10 shall be used Dourson et al 1996 R 6 4 2 3 3 Subchronic to chronic extrapolation Selection of the factor for subchronic extrapolation shall be based on the availability of data that allow for quantitative extrapolation of the critical effect after subchronic exposure to that after chronic exposure Selection shall also consider whether NOAELs differ quantitatively when different critical effects are observed after subchronic and chronic exposure to the compound When the crit
175. e flow meter T Standard temperature 293 K 68 F or 20 C 273 in degrees Kelvin and Ts Observed temperature in degree Kelvin measured temperature in degrees Celsius 273 K Example measured feed gas flow test conditions are scfh at 10 psig and 77 F 25 C Calculated ac tual gas flow is 10 cfh x 24 7 14 7 Ye x 298 293 13 18 scfh H 3 1 3 Coolant flow meters For liquid cooled ozone generators the coolant flow rate shall be measured during the test The flow meter s shall be accurate within 5 at the measured flow rate For gas cooled ozone generators the coolant flow rate shall be the volumetric flow rate of the system fans as provided by the manufacturer H8 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 H 3 2 General test conditions H 3 2 1 Temperature conditions Ambient air temperature 22 2 7245 F Cooling water temperature 22 2 C 72 5 F Cooling air temperature 22 2 C 72 5 F H 3 2 2 Gas preparation equipment The feed gas for a packaged ozone generator shall be the output of the packaged gas preparation equipment The feed gas dew point and oxygen concentration shall be measured and reported The input gas to the gas preparation equipment shall be the ambient air at the laboratory H 3 2 3 Corona discharge ozone generators The feed gas shall be 93 2 oxygen by weight with a maximum dew point of 112 F 80 C or less Ambient oxygen concentration decreases as
176. e for the product complete formulation information which includes the following the composition of the formulation in percent or parts by weight for each chemical in the formulation the reaction mixture used to manufacture the chemical if applicable Chemical Abstracts Registry Number CASRN chemical name and supplier for each chemical present in the formulation and alist of known suspected impurities within the treatment chemical formulation and the maximum percent or parts by weight of each impurity a description or classification of the process in which the treatment chemical is manufactured handled and packaged 3 2 2 Formulation review The formulation information provided by the manufacturer shall be reviewed and this review shall 13 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 determine the formulation dependent chemical constituents required to be evaluated in accordance with Annex R For those swimming pool treatment chemicals that have regulatory approval for use in pools by the USEPA under the Federal Insecticide Fungicide Rodenticide Act FIFRA such regulatory approval may be used to exempt the swimming pool treatment chemical constituents from evaluation against the requirements of Annex R however contaminant testing and evaluation shall still be required as set forth under section 3 2 3 3 2 3 Contaminant testing Swimming pool treatment chemicals shall be tested according to the test methodolo
177. e from the pump and returning to the pool spa or hot tub Pumps should be matched to the filter units L 1 2 2 Vacuum filters Vacuum filters should have a pump capable of delivering the design flow rate at a suction of at least 20 in 508 mm of mercury without cavitation Sufficient reserve head should be provided to overcome friction losses in piping and appurtenances through which water flows after discharge from the pump in returning to the pool spa or hot tub L 1 3 Gauges and flow rate indicators In all pressure filter systems serving public pools spas or hot tubs a pressure gauge s with an appropriate range should be provided with all filters A flow rate indicator with an appropriate range should be provided with filters for public pools spas or hot tubs A flow rate controller is recommended for public pools spas or hot tub systems 31 The information contained in this Annex is not part of this American National Standard ANS and has not been processed in accordance with ANSI s requirements for an ANS Therefore this Annex may contain material that has not been subjected to public review or a consensus process In addition it does not contain requirements necessary for conformance to the Standard 3 Based on atmospheric pressure at sea level L1 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 L 1 4 Location Filters should be readily accessible for cleaning operation maintenance and servicing Tanks should be positioned
178. e or permanent deformation when exposed to the pressure differential developed during backwashing operations 5 1 4 Initial head loss The head loss through a filter operating at the design flow rate shall not exceed the manufacturer s maximum design head loss when determined in accordance with Annex B section B 3 5 1 5 Accessibility Filter components requiring service shall be accessible for inspection and repair when installed in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Covers on openings required for access into the filter tank shall be removable 5 1 6 Drains A filter shall have a drain so that the filter tank may be drained in accordance with the manufacturer s winterizing instructions 5 1 7 Air release If the filter permits accumulation of air in the top of the filter tank the filter tank shall have an automatic air release at the top of the tank A manual air release valve shall also be provided 5 1 8 Cleaning of filter media The cleaning of filter media in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions shall render the filter media and elements free of visible dirt and debris The head loss through the filter after cleaning the media shall not exceed 150 of the initial head loss through the filter The head loss through the filter after cleaning shall not exceed the manufacturer s maximum design head loss Testing shall be conducted in accordance with Annex B section B 4 5 1 9 Turbidity reduction A filter shall
179. e reducer and expander or other devices attached to the valve for which test data is requested D 2 Hydrostatic pressure test D 2 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to ensure that a multiport valve and its components can withstand hydrostatic pressure 1 5 times the manufacturer s working pressure D 2 2 Apparatus equipment pressure gauges meeting ANSI ASME B40 100 Grade 3A specifications and sized to yield the measurement within 25 to 75 of scale thermometer accurate to 1 F 0 5 C and cyclic hydrostatic pressure testing station D 2 3 Test waters The test waters shall meet the following requirements swimmingpools O hot tubs spas 75 10 F 24 6 C 102 5 F 39 3 C Valves and manufactured manifolds except those labeled to be for swimming pools only shall be tested at the spa hot tub water temperature D 2 4 Test method The following procedure shall be used for the multiport valve hydrostatic pressure test a Seal the valve s filter inlet and outlet ports Connect a pressure hose from the hydrostatic testing station to the multiport valve and place the valve in the filter position b Fill the valve with water conditioned to the temperature specified in Annex D section D 1 3 Bleed off any remaining air 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 c Adjust the pressure regulator to apply hydrostatic pressure equal to 1 5 times the working pressure of the unit Manintain the pressure
180. e true priming time TPT shall be calculated as follows TPT MPT x pump suction inlet size actual test pipe size NOTE Typically the pump suction inlet size is equal to the test pipe size and therefore TPT MPT Steps b through e shall be repeated no additional water shall be added to the pump Acceptance criteria If a pump is to be designated as self priming the true priming time for each run shall not exceed 6 min or the manufacturer s recommended time whichever is greater C4 NSF ANSI 50 2015 2012 NSF gt 5D Impeller eye rr IT VL Water level gt 3D Figure C1 Apparatus for self priming capability test D Nominal diameter of the riser pipe VL Vertical lift is equal to 5 ft 1 52 m or the manufacturer s specified lift whichever is greater The vertical lift is corrected for standard temperature 68 F 20 C and pressure 14 7 psia 101 kPa with water density of 62 4 Ibs ft 1000 kg m including losses due to friction C5 This page is intentionally left blank 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Annex D normative Test methods for the evaluation of valves and manufactured manifolds NOTE The test conditions specified in this annex are not intended to represent recommended field use conditions D 1 Definitions D 1 1 test section The test piping according to table D 1 within which the test specimen is mounted D 1 2 test specimen Any valve or combination of valve pip
181. e water a swimming pool spa hot tub filters water temperature 75 10 F 24 6 C B 2 4 Vacuum test method vacuum service filters a Install filter media and or elements and all integral components according to the manufacturer s instructions Connect the filter to the vacuum source b Adjust the pressure regulator to apply a vacuum of 25 1 in Hg 85 3 4 kPa to the filter tank Maintain the vacuum for 300 30 s Slowly release the vacuum and examine the tank for evidence of a rupture collapse leak or other deformation B 2 5 Acceptance criteria There shall be no rupture collapse leak or other deformation of the filter tank B2 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 B 3 Head loss test B 3 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to verify that the initial head loss from the filter inlet to the filter outlet does not exceed the maximum head loss as specified by the manufacturer and to verify that the initial head loss for an alternate sand type media does not exceed the initial head loss of sand B 3 2 Apparatus pressure recording device required accuracy is 0 5 of the smallest division used in the manufacturer s claimed pressure loss turbidimeter required accuracy from 0 to 10 NTU is 0 5 NTU required accuracy above 10 NTU is 5 of the reading or 1 NTU whichever is greater temperature indicating device required accuracy is 2 F 1 C flow meter required accuracy is
182. ealth Consultants Adopted by The NSF International May 1977 Revised May 1979 Revised May 2009 Revised June 1984 Revised August 2010 Revised November 1985 Revised August 2011 Revised May 1992 Addendum November 2011 Revised July 1996 Revised September 2012 Revised January 2000 Revised December 2013 Revised May 2001 Revised June 2014 Revised March 2004 Revised July 2015 Revised October 2005 Revised April 2007 Revised October 2007 Revised February 2009 Published by NSF International P O Box 130140 Ann Arbor Michigan 48113 0140 USA For ordering copies or for making inquiries with regard to this Standard please reference the designation NSF ANSI 50 2015 Copyright 2012 NSF International Previous editions 2014 2013 2011 2010 2009 2008 2007 2005 2004 2001 2000 1996 1992 1985 1984 1979 Unless otherwise specified no part of this publication may be reproduced or utilized in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying and microfilm without permission in writing from NSF International Printed in the United States of America Disclaimers NSF in performing its functions in accordance with its objectives does not assume or undertake to discharge any responsibility of the manufacturer or any other party The opinions and findings of NSF represent its professional judgment NSF shall not be responsible to anyone for the use of or reliance up on this Standard by anyone
183. ecific and calculated using Where H HLC R x T HLC Henry s law constant R gas constant 8 19E 5 atm m mole K T ambient temperature in terms of Kelvin units 25C 273K Table R6 Assumptions for long term swimming pool inhalation exposure and dose estimate Age Adult 11 to lt 16 years 6 to lt 11 years Type of Swimmer Comp Non Comp Comp Non Comp Comp Non Comp IR m hr 3 27 1 07 2 9 1 5 2 5 13 ET hr day 3 0 3 2 0 5 1 0 5 EF events year 238 88 189 72 65 102 BW kg 70 54 29 IR Adult The inhalation rates for adults are based on the values presented in EPA s Exposure Factors Handbook U S EPA 1997 IR Child The inhalation rates for children are the mean values from Table 6 2 of Child Specific Handbook U S EPA 2008 The values for moderate and heavy intensity are used for non competitive and competitive swimming respectively ET Competitive Swimmers The exposure times for competitive swimmers are based on the ACC s swimmer survey ACC 2002 d ET Non Competitive Swimmers The exposure times for non competitive and or recreational swimmers are based on NHAPs mean values U S EPA 1996a EF Adult Competitive Mean values for master s and collegiate swimmers ranged from 187to 238 days year For collegiate swimmer ACC 2002 assumed 5 events week x 52 weeks year x 11 months year 12 months ye
184. ed NOTE Always consult and comply with the local regulatory authority having jurisdiction regarding supplemental sanitation and treatment equipment requirements and system sizing 20 9 Data plate Each spa shall have a data plate that is permanent easy to read and readily visible on the outside of the spa or behind an access panel that does not require the use of a tool for removal The data plate shall have at a minimum the following information manufacturers name and contact information address phone number website or prime supplier model and serial number maximum number of users bathers maximum recommended temperature recommended spa water quality parameters including pH temperature sanitizer level such as 3 o 5 mg L ppm Free Available Chlorine or 4 to 6 mg L ppm Total Bromine and a statement to consult local regulatory authority having jurisdiction reference to using EPA registered chemical sanitizers date of manufacture electrical supply requirements i e volts amperes frequency watts dry weight water capacity and filled occupied weight and specific certification mark of the certifying organization for certified products 20 10 Owner s manual A comprehensive manual or manual package shall be provided with each spa covering important areas such as spa operation maintenance water quality monitoring and safety For spas utilizing components certif
185. edule and can be opened for comment at any time Comments should be sent to Chair Joint Committee on Recreational Water Facilities at standards nsf org or c o NSF International Standards Department PO Box 130140 Ann Arbor MI 48113 0140 USA The information contained in this Foreword is not part of this American National Standard ANS and has not been processed in accordance with ANSI s requirements for an ANS Therefore this Foreword may contain material that has not been subjected to public review or a consensus process In addition it does not contain requirements necessary for conformance to the Standard xi 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 NSF ANSI Standard Equipment for Swimming Pools Spas Hot Tubs and other Recreational Water Facilities Evaluation criteria for materials components products equipment and systems for use at recreational water facilities 1 General 1 1 Scope This Standard covers materials components products equipment and systems related to public and residential recreational water facility operation 1 2 Variations in design and operation A component varying in design and or operation may qualify under this Standard Appropriate tests and investigations shall indicate that the component performs as well as components conforming to this Standard Such components shall meet the requirements for materials finishes and construction in this Standard 1 3 Alternate materials If speci
186. er shall not exceed the maximum values specified in Table 5 4 24 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Table 5 4 Maximum design filtration rates for cartridge type filters Filter design Intended application Maximum design filtration rate depth type residential pool or spa hot tub gal min ft 325 L min m residential pool or spa hot tub 1 gal min ft 41 L min m public pool or spa hot tub 0 375 gal min ft 15 L min m 8 2 2 depth type public pool or spa hot tub 3 gal min ft 122 L min m i oft The design filtration rate of a high permeability type filter intended for use with a residential pool or spa hot tub shall not exceed 10 gal min ft 407 L min m 6 Centrifugal pumps This section contains requirements for centrifugal pumps used to circulate swimming pool or spa hot tub water in commercial and residential applications The requirements for strainers shall apply to strainers that are integral with the pump and to strainers supplied as separate equipment for use in conjunction with a centrifugal pump 6 1 General 6 1 1 Pumps shall operate with minimum adjustment Required adjustments to the power supply shall be acceptable 6 1 2 Sections of the pump that may require inspection or service shall be accessible 6 1 3 Moving parts shall be covered 6 1 4 Replacement parts shall fit the pump without a need to redrill or otherwise alter the pump or replacement part 6 2 Hydrostatic pressure test Part of a
187. er tank or water level Z1 at elevation of P1 and Z2 at elevation of P2 D 3 4 1 1 Acceptance criteria When tested in the filter position the valve or manufactured manifold shall not leak in excess of 3 mL in the 5 min test from the waste port When the valve or manufactured manifold is tested in the backwash position leakage from the return to pool port shall not leak in excess of 30 mL in the 5 min test D 3 4 2 Non filter system valve D 3 4 2 1 Two port valves D 3 4 2 1 1 Test method The following procedure shall be used for two port valves a Make the following connections 1 connect the test specimen without reducers or other attached devices in accordance with piping requirements in Table D 1 The test specimen shall be in the full closed position for each test and 2 secure and make any additional connections that may be necessary to conform to any unique design features specified by the manufacturer b Fill the system with water conditioned to the applicable temperatures specified in Annex D section D 3 3 and bleed off any entrapped air c Adjust the pressure PI to 1 5 times the maximum working pressure 5 psi 34 kPa d Observe and collect leakage from the non pressurized port over a test period of 5 min 5s e Record and report the following 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 static pressures psi kPa volume of leakage from the closed port ml and valve inlet port pressure P
188. ers service technicians and facility operators to comply with local codes and regulations If it is acceptable to disable the equalizer line during installation service such work shall be conducted in accordance with the skimmer manufacturer s instructions For skimmer designs that incorporate an equalizer line one of the following shall occur H the skimmer manufacturer does supply a suction fitting along with the skimmer the skimmer manufacturer shall specify the minimum flow rating that meets or exceeds the maximum flow rate of the skimmer equalizer The skimmer manufacturer shall mandate installation of the skimmer with the provided suction fitting which shall be certified to ANSI APSP 16 with a flow rating that meets or exceeds the maximum flow rate of the skimmer equalizer or H the skimmer manufacturer doesn t supply a suction fitting along with the skimmer the skimmer manufacturer shall specify the minimum flow rating that meets or exceeds the maximum flow rate of the skimmer equalizer The skimmer manufacturer shall mandate the installation of a suction fitting that is certified to ANSI ASME A112 19 8 with a flow rating that meets or exceeds the maximum flow rate of the skimmer equalizer 32 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 9 4 3 When the skimmer is operating at the maximum design flow rate and the water level is lowered to 2 in 51 mm below the lowest overflow level of the weir see Annex E section E 2 4 e the
189. ers listed in the table The use of sodium hypochlorite or chlorine neutralizers during adjustment of the chlorine concentration may change the alkalinity and pH values of the test water Do not permit the alkalinity or pH to fall out of range b Verify and record the combined chlorine concentration of the test solution using one of the following methods Standard Method 4500 CI F DPD Ferrous Titrametric Method spectrophotometer for use at a wavelength of 515 nm and providing a light path of 0 4 in 1 cm or longer or filter photometer equipped with a filter having maximum transmission in the wavelength range of 490 to 530 nm and providing a light path of 0 4 1 cm or longer c A sample of the test solution shall be analyzed with WQTD units under test in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions d Using the same test units repeat the analysis of the test solution two additional times If applicable rinse the test units with de ionized water between tests e For test samples that only perform free and total chlorine measurements perform both the free and total chlorine measurements and calculate the combined chlorine level by subtracting the value of the free chlorine concentration from the value of the total chlorine concentration f Assess the results of testing based upon the resolution of the device g Average test results to determine compliance with each accuracy level in O 12 Op Test procedure for free
190. es steadily and reaches a hydrostatic pressure equal to twice the working B1 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 pressure within 60 to 70 s Slowly release the pressure drain the filter and examine the tank for evidence of a rupture leak burst or other deformation B 1 5 Acceptance criteria There shall be no rupture leakage burst or permanent deformation of the filter tank or its integral components during the three phases of the test except that leakage from integral components such as valves and fittings during the third phase of the test as described in Annex B section B 1 4 e shall not constitute a failure B 2 Vacuum test vacuum service filters B 2 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to verify the integrity of vacuum service filter tanks whose inlets may be closed during part of the operating cycle B 2 2 Apparatus vacuum source capable of creating a vacuum on a filter tank as required by this test temperature indicating device required accuracy is 2 F 1 C timer required accuracy is 0 5 s and vacuum gauges sized to yield the measurement within 25 to 75 of full scale required accuracy is 2 of reading or 1 psi 7 kPa whichever is greater NOTE Electronic transducers may be used for recording test data Transducers shall meet the accuracy requirements for gauges but the measurement does not need to be within 25 to 75 of the range of the transducer B 2 3 Challeng
191. et all from water tank level Z1 at elevation of P1 k Adjust the pressure P1 to the maximum working pressure 5 psi 34 kPa 1 Observe and collect leakage from the open port over a test period of 5 min 5s m Record and report the following static pressures psi kPa volume of leakage from the open port ml and valve inlet port pressure P1 psi kPa n Adjust the pressure P1 to 3 psi 1 psi 6 9 kPa o Observe and collect leakage from the open port over a test period of 5 min 5 s p Record and report the following static pressure psi kPa volume of leakage from the open port ml and valve inlet port pressure P1 psi kPa D 3 4 2 2 2 Acceptance criteria When tested in each operating position the valve or manufactured manifold shall not leak in excess of 0 5 mL from any port in the 5 min test D 4 Head loss curve test D 4 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to compare a head loss curve of a valve or manufactured manifold to the man ufacturer s published head loss curve s for all manufacturer specified operating positions 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 D 4 2 Apparatus equipment pressure indicating device meeting ANSI ASME B40 100 Grade 1A specifications measurement within 25 to 75 of scale pumping station and temperature indicating device accurate to 1 F 0 5 C D 4 3 Test waters The test waters shall meet the following requirements swim
192. etermination NOTE The MPN program can be downloaded from the EPA website onto computer of choice a Following information shall be entered 95 confidence interval number of dilutions number of replicates wells and volume of samples placed in well b MPN and confidence intervals shall be recorded H 4 8 7 A separate geometric mean for all triplicate samples taken at each individual time point shall be obtained H 4 8 8 The log reduction at each sample time shall be determined by using the following equation H17 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 Log Reduction log Ns No Ns sample geometric mean No calculated target challenge concentration mean of triplicate samples from Annex H section 4 8 2 e H 4 8 9 Acceptance criteria Each of the 4 effluent samples collected shall achieve a minimum 3 log 99 9 or greater reduction of Cryptosporidium parvum Performance shall be noted in the manufacturer s installation and operating instructions If the test unit does not turn the water over the samples taken at 30 min shall demonstrate a 3 log reduction H 4 9 Quality control H 4 9 1 Minimum requirements Each laboratory that uses this method shall be required to operate a formal quality assurance QA program The minimum requirements of this program shall consist of an initial demonstration of laboratory capability analysis of spiked samples to evaluate and document data quality and analys
193. ferential pressure at DP1 and static pressure at P1 at 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 and 100 of the maximum design flow rate 1 gpm 3 8 LPM f Using the data generated according to Annex D section D 4 4 1 steps b through d calculate the head loss due to the valve or manufactured manifold at each flow rate 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 1 for each of the static pressures recorded in Annex D section D 4 4 1 step e convert pressures to feet of water P ft P psi x 2 307 P ft P kPa 2 989 2 calculate the total head loss due to the valve or manufactured manifold HLV 2 DP1 Z1 Z2 Where HLV total head loss due to valve or manufactured manifold This analysis assumes that inlet and outlet piping are of the same size material and general condition If this is not the case these factors shall be taken into account g When applicable move the pressure indicating device from the valve or manufactured manifold outlet port to the valve or manufactured manifold auxiliary port s Repeat Annex D section D 4 4 1 steps b through f for each operational position with a head loss curve published by the manufacturer h Record the following static pressures psi kPa valve inlet port pressure P1 differential pressure valve inlet to outlet ports DP1 and elevations feet all from same reference line Z1 at elevation of DP1 i Record the differential pressures at DP1 and
194. fic materials are mentioned other materials equally satisfactory from the standpoint of public health may be permitted 1 4 Standard review A complete review of this Standard shall be conducted at least every five years These reviews shall be conducted by representatives from the industry public health and user groups or agencies of the NSF Joint Committee on Recreational Water Facilities 1 5 Normative references The following documents contain provisions that through reference in this text constitute provisions of this Standard At the time of publication the indicated editions were valid All standards are subject to revision and parties are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the recent editions of the standards indicated below The most recent published edition of the document shall be used for undated references 21 CFR Chapter 1 Code of Federal Regulations 21 CFR Part 58 Subchapter A Code of Federal Regulations 3 USFDA 5600 Fishers Lane Rockville MD 20857 lt www fda gov gt 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 40 CFR Part 136 Guidelines Establishing Test Procedures for the Analysis of Pollutants 40 CFR Part 141 National Primary Drinking Water Regulations 40 CFR Part 143 National Secondary Drinking Water Regulations ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code 2010 ANSI APSP 16 2011 Standard Suction Fittings for Use in Swimming Pools Wading Pools Spas and Hot Tubs ANSI ASME A112 3 1 2
195. fied under NSF ANSI 14 42 or 61 the surface area to water volume ratio of the intended use conditions should meet the requirements of NSF ANSI 61 when evaluated to the total allowable concentration TAC requirements of the standard Materials listed under the United States Code of Federal Regulations Title 21 Food and Drugs Part 189 Substances prohibited for use in Human Food shall not be permitted as ingredients within material contacting pool spa and or hot tub water This includes arsenic beryllium cadmium mercury or thallium Lead should also not be used as an international ingredient in any water contact material except for products meeting the US Safe Drinking Water Act definition of lead free lt 0 25 weighted average lead content 3 2 Swimming pool treatment chemicals Swimming pool treatment chemicals shall be evaluated in accordance with the requirements of Annex R and shall not impart undesirable levels of either chemical constituents or contaminants to the water Swimming pool treatment chemicals under this Standard shall be the swimming pool treatment chemical constituents the product specific contaminants identified in the formulation review or by testing and other constituents as identified in the formulation review or by testing 3 2 1 Formulation submission The manufacturer shall submit at a minimum the following information for each swimming pool treatment chemical a proposed maximum dose rat
196. filtration rate of sand type filters shall conform to the limits specified in Table 5 3 Table 5 3 Design filtration rates for sand type filters Filter design Intended application Design filtration rate residential pool or spa hot tub max 5 gal min ft 204 L min m public pool or spa hot tub max 3 gal min ft 122 L min m min 5 gal min ft 204 L min m high rate residential pool or spa hot tub max 20 gal min tt 813 de min 5 gal min ft 204 L min m high rate public pool or spa hot tub max 20 gal min tt 813 vee 5 3 9 2 The design backwash rate shall be a minimum of 15 gal min ft 610 L min m 5 4 Cartridge type and high permeability type filters The requirements in this subsection apply only to cartridge type and high permeability type filters and their integral components designed for the filtration of swimming pool or spa hot tub water 5 4 1 Clearance The clearance between the filter tank and cartridge s or high permeability element s shall be at least 0 25 in 6 4 mm The clearance between adjacent cartridges shall be at least 0 25 in 6 4 mm 5 4 2 Baffles A filter shall have a baffle or other flow deflecting device that prevents influent water from flowing directly against the effective filter area during filtration 5 4 3 Trash screen vacuum service cartridge filters Vacuum service cartridge filters shall have a trash screen at the filter inlet to remove large debris such as leaves and paper from
197. flow rate through the equalizer line if provided shall be within 5 of the maximum design flow rate see Annex E section E 4 9 4 4 When the skimmer is operating normally at the maximum design flow rate and up to 75 of the open area in the strainer basket is blocked the flow rate leakage past the equalizer line if provided shall not exceed 10 of the total flow rate through the skimmer see Annex E section E 3 9 5 Cover and mounting ring 9 5 1 A skimmer shall have a removable cover with a mounting ring The cover and ring shall be free of sharp edges The exposed surface of the cover shall be free of projections and have a permanent skid resistant finish A means of securing the cover in place shall be provided so that the cover cannot be dislodged unintentionally removed or otherwise become unstable during use 9 5 2 Each type and model of polymer skimmer cover shall meet the UV exposure and structural integrity requirements in 9 5 2 1 and 9 5 2 2 Type and model differences that require separate testing include shape structure material color plating and finish Skimmer covers that are too large to fit in the UV exposure chamber may have material bar samples molded exposed and tested in a manner consistent with methods developed for ANSI APSP 16 suction fittings 9 5 2 1 The cover shall be exposed to ultraviolet light and water spray in accordance with ASTM G154 using the common exposure condition Cycle 3 found in table
198. fluoroethylene PTFE such as Teflon or equivalent X X Ethylene Tetrafluoroethylene ETFE such as Tefzel or equivalent X X Ethylene Chlorotrifluoroethylene ECTFE such as Halar or equivalent X X Neoprene or equivalent X NR Polyvinylidene Fluoride PVDF such as Kynar or equivalent X X P Chlorotrifluoroethylene P CTFE such as Kel F 2800 and Neoflon or equiva lent X X i Special Metals Corporation Daikin Industries Haynes International Inc Dupont Ausimont USA Inc EN Atochem North America 3M Company NR not recommended 13 9 3 Gaskets and seals Ozone Gas Ozone Gas lt 2500 ppm gt 2500 ppm P Chlorotrifluoroethylene P CTFE such as kel Pol or equivalent X X Perfluorelastomer such as Kalrez or equivalent X X Perfluorinated Copolymer such as Chem Rez or equivalent X X Gortex or equivalent X X PTFE tape X X Chlorosulfonated polyethylene such as Hypalon or equivalent X NR Vinylidene Fluoride such as Viton or equivalent X X 4 wt max Polydimethyl Siloxane Silicone X X 4 wt max Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer EPDM X NR T3M Company Dupont 3 Green Tweed and Company NR not recommended 43 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 13 10 Design pressure pressure vessels Units and components of process equipment that are subjected to pressure shall meet a working pressure of 50 psi 33 kPa or be equipped with a pressure reducing valve set at the manufacturer s wor
199. for 300 30 s Slowly release the pressure and examine the valve or valve manifold and its integral components for evidence of a rupture leak burst or other deformation that negatively7 impacts form function or performance d Relieve the pressure and evaluate the valve or manufactured manifold according to Annex D section D 2 5 Adjust the pressure regulator to apply a hydrostatic pressure of 30 1 psi 207 7 kpa and maintain it for 2 0 5 s The pressurization rate shall not exceed 30 psi s Slowly release the pressure and maintain a hydrostatic pressure of 0 psi 0 kPa for 2 0 5 s Automatic timers shall be used to ensure that the proper pressures are applied and maintained for the required intervals Repeat this cycle 20 000 times and examine the valve and its integral components for evidence of a rupture leak burst or other deformation that negatively impacts form function or performance e After the cycle test in step d adjust the pressure regulator so that the pressure applied on the valve or manufactured manifold increases steadily and reaches a hydrostatic pressure equal to twice the working pressure within 60 to 70 s Slow release the pressure drain the valve or manufactured manifold and examine for evidence of a rupture leak burst or other deformation that negatively impacts form function or performance f If applicable place the valve or manufactured manifold in the next port position and repeat steps in Annex
200. ge pressure at the suction flange of pump plus velocity head 2 69 non self contained spa hot tub swim spa therapy spa resistance system A factory built spa in which the water heating and circulating equipment is not an integral part of the product Non self contained spas may employ separate components such as individual filter pump heater and controls or they may employ assembled combinations of various components 2 70 non electric water quality test device A device that does not require a power supply such as line current or a battery to yield a result 2 71 NPSH available NPSHA Function of the system in which the pump operates Available NPSH should be at least equal to the required NPSH at the desired flow rate 2 72 NPSH required NPSHR Value supplied by the pump manufacturer based on the pump design 2 73 operating range The range for a parameter within which a water quality testing device WQTD provides acceptable accuracy as specified by the manufacturer The operating range determines the test solutions used to evaluate the WQTD Examples of operating ranges typical for WQTD s are water temperature 70 102 F 20 50 C pH 6 8 8 2 free and combined chlorine 0 5 ppm or 0 10 ppm 2 74 operating water level Level at which the water should be maintained to enable proper water circulation and skimming 2 75 outside use A product that is designed tested or certified for use outside or to be exposed to the e
201. gies in NSF ANSI 60 Annex B and analyzed for contaminants per the requirements of NSF ANSI 60 sections 3 4 5 6 and 7 regarding minimum test batteries and formulation dependent analytes Any identified contaminants shall not exceed criteria developed using Annex R 3 3 Corrosion resistance Material intended to be in contact with swimming pool or spa hot tub water shall be corrosion resistant under use conditions or shall be rendered corrosion resistant by a protective coating Cathodic protection may be used to improve the corrosion resistance of a material High speed parts requiring close tolerances are not required to be corrosion resistant The following materials are considered to have acceptable corrosion resistance for general swimming pool and spa hot tub equipment applications and are not required to have a protective coating non ferrous alloys containing not less than 58 copper _ nickel copper alloy Monel 400 UNS N04400 SAE 300 series stainless steel thermoplastics and thermoset plastics and concrete When used in pumps and strainers cast iron is not required to have a protective coating 3 4 Dissimilar metals Dissimilar metals not normally compatible on the electromotive scale shall not be in direct contact with one another except for sacrificial anode service 3 5 Insulating fittings Insulating fittings shall be provided when piping material is not compatible on the electromotive scale
202. ging installation or use instructions shall contain the following manufacturer s name or trademark model number or product designation product installation instructions if applicable standard reference NSF ANSI 50 and certification mark use conditions indoor use only Indoor or indoor outdoor use Outdoor and rated pressure such as 50 psi 845 kPa maximum working pressure 22 Heat exchangers heaters coolers and solar water heating systems 22 1 Genera The requirements in this section apply to devices utilized to increase or decrease the temperature of pools spas and other recreational waters Some examples of products addressed by this section include 79 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 metal and or plastic heat exchangers heaters coolers and solar radiant panel collectors and associated components such as fittings couplings and valves 22 1 1 Sections of the heater that may require inspection or service shall be accessible 22 1 2 Heaters shall be marked or labeled for proper assembly installation and operation 22 1 3 Replacement parts for the heater shall fit the heater without a need for undue alteration of the heater or replacement part 22 1 4 Heaters shall comply with the material formulation requirements in 3 2 22 1 5 Heaters shall comply with the corrosion resistance requirements in 3 3 22 2 Performance Heater and associated components shall meet the applicable perform
203. h frame size rated temperature rise or the insulation system class and ambient temperature rating time rating or duty rating and Statement of thermal protection 7 Non integral strainers This section contains requirements for non integral strainers for pumps used to circulate swimming pool or spa hot tub water in commercial and residential applications The requirements for integral strainers are specified in 6 3 7 1 Non integral strainer basket 7 1 1 Non integral strainers shall be designed so that solids will not bypass the strainer basket during normal operation nor drop into the strainer pot when the strainer basket is removed for cleaning 7 1 2 Non integral strainer baskets shall be readily removable and easily cleanable 7 1 3 Openings in the non integral strainer basket shall not exceed 0 05 in 0 3 cm in area 7 1 4 The ratio of the open area in the non integral strainer basket to the cross sectional area of the strainer inlet connection shall be 4 1 or greater The open area in the non integral strainer basket shall be no less than 10 in 65 cm 7 1 5 Non integral strainers with an inlet connection with a nominal pipe size of 1 5 in 38 mm or less shall have a non integral strainer basket with a minimum internal volume of 25 in 410 cm Non integral strainers with an inlet connection with a nominal pipe size of 2 in 51 mm or greater shall have a non integral strainer basket with a minimum
204. hall be repeated for each feed gas flow rate The time to reach equilibrium at each feed gas flow rate shall be reported Percent Equilibrium Attainment for each measurement absolute value of a b b x 100 E Where i number of measurements a each of the final 3 measured concentrations au a2 a3 b average of the final 3 measured concentrations a ae as 3 and Eave E Eo E3 3 Eave lt 3 Pass and Eave gt 3 Fail NOTE Repeat calculations for ozone production H 3 4 2 H 3 4 1 shall be repeated three times to determine reproducibility The generators shall be turned off for 10 min between the three consecutive operations measurements All test parameters shall be confirmed upon restart of the generator after the 10 min off period The feed gas shall remain flowing during the 10 min off period The ozone concentration and output rate for each test shall be within 10 of the average ozone concentration and output rate of the three tests The output rate shall be the average of the three runs H10 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 Figure A 1 A Symbol Legend Power Supply Ki T T Temperature V pere F Flow e connect vacuum P Pressure A here V Voltage A H Z Frequency H Ozone A Amps Destructi D Dew Point Ce ron m Ozone Gas Concentration Measurement Pressu
205. hanges per hour to comply with the OSHA limits In addition an ambient air ozone monitor should be installed Ozonation systems which operate under vacuum should not present a danger of ozone leaks into the treatment room J 6 6 Oxidation reduction potential ORP The oxidation reduction potential ORP in swimming pool and spa sanitation is defined as the ORP millivolts produced by the strong oxidizing sanitizers into water ORP provides a direct indication of the activity of a sanitizer but does not measure disinfectant residual ORP monitoring devices should be used to monitor the ozone system J 6 7 Sizing an ozone generation system J 6 7 1 Ozone application for a swimming pool or spa hot tub should be sized for the specific pool i e Recreational lap pool therapy swim school pool wading pool spray pad or spa and should be a complete system consisting of the following a ozone generator b injector injector manifold c reaction tank J4 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 d degas valve to vent undissolved gaseous ozone e ozone destruct to destroy undissovled gaseous ozone f ORP monitor controller g ambient ozone monitor controller for indoor locations nl POOL SPA SEN PH CHEMICAL pe t CHLORINE A n KI D FEEDER d
206. he pre coat process shall not exceed 10 NTU B 7 Cellulose media longevity test B 7 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to verify that the cellulose media performs comparably to the DE for the life of one charge B 7 2 Apparatus and test method a Set up a tank and pump assembly with a capacity of at least 175 gal 662 L and pump it to a pre coat filter conforming to this Standard that has a filtration area between 20 and 40 ft 1 9 and 3 7 m b Place a flow meter in the loop and two pressure gages one on the inlet and one on the outlet of the filter c Condition the tank s water per Annex B Table B 1 d Charge the filter with the DE grade specified by the manufacturer el Set the flow rate to 2 gal min ft 81 L min m of filter area f When the water clears record the pressure drop g Run the test continuously while administering the doses in Annex B section B 7 3 until the pressure drop increases by 10 psi 70 kPa or the flow rate drops by 10 gpm 40 LPM h Duplicate the test setup with the cellulose media Table B 1 Challenge water turbidit 7 5 0 5 1 2 ppm B6 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 B 7 3 Dosing a Prepare a ball clay mixture by mixing 2 80 Ib 1270 gm ball clay 0 10 Ib 45 gm of baby oil and 7 99 Ib 3625 gm of water b Dose a 0 12 Ib 55 gm of this mixture into each of the tanks once a day 5 d wk c Take a water sample just before the dosing and record the turbidity an
207. he test tank below the water surface 1 Ozone generators with a rated output less than 50 grams per hour a the volume to surface area ratio of the test tank shall be 10 1 gallons ft 37 4 liters m b the volume of the test tank shall not exceed 3000 gallons 11356 liters 2 Ozone generators with a rated output greater than or equal to 50 grams per hour and less than 500 grams per hour a the volume to surface area ratio of the test tank shall be 50 5 gallons ft 189 19 liters m b the volume of the test tank shall not exceed 3000 gallons 11356 liters 3 Ozone generators with a rated output greater than or equal to 500 grams per hour a the volume to surface area ratio of the test tank shall be 50 5 gallons ft 189 19 liters m b the volume of the test tank shall not exceed 8000 gallons 30 283 liters H 2 3 Test water The test water shall be as specified in section H 1 3 of this Annex but shall not include the elements added to simulate an organic and microbiological load H 2 4 Method Install the ozone device in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions and operate the unit until a steady state condition exists and the maximum ozone output rate is reached Continue operating the system for 1 h measuring the ozone level in the test vessel water at 15 min intervals The sampling location shall be a horizontal distance of 24 inches 61 cm in the direction of the water flow from the water return fitting
208. head TDH shall be determined at ten points along the complete range of flow rates for the rated speed of the pump The TDH shall be determined from measurements of the following lift from the centerline of the pump impeller to the discharge pressure tap flowrate vacuum negative gauge pressure in the suction line pressure in the discharge line and length and diameter of inlet and discharge pipes j Capacity measurement Capacity shall be measured using a quantity meter weight or volume or a flow rate meter The measurement device shall have an accuracy of 1 5 of the measured values k Power measurement Power input shall be measured using a device having an accuracy of 1 5 of the measured values C 1 5 Acceptance criteria The pump performance shall meet the criteria specified in Annex C section C 1 5 1 or section C 1 5 2 C 1 5 1 Over the range of flow rates up to 90 of the maximum flow the total dynamic head at each point determined by the test shall be no less than 97 of the total dynamic head indicated by the manufacturer s performance curve and no more than 105 of the total dynamic head indicated by the manufacturer s performance curve C 1 5 2 Over the range of total dynamic head up to 90 of the maximum flow the flow rate at each point determined by the test shall be no less than 95 of the flow rate indicated by the manufacturer s performance curve and no
209. hore A scale shall be used between the Tup and cover when applying the point load E 5 3 2 Specimen conditioning All specimens shall submerged in water at a temperature of 73 4 3 F 23 2 C for at least 2 h before testing Testing shall proceed immediately upon removing specimens from water E 5 3 3 Test fixture The covers shall be installed in a rigid fixture capable of supporting the cover in a manner similar to the actual installation The cover attaching screws shall not be installed E 5 3 4 Test method Subject the center of cover to a load of 300 Ib 5 Ib 136 Kg 2 2 Kg Test all six 6 specimens E 5 3 5 Acceptance criteria A skimmer cover shall not deflect more than 0 35 in 9 0 mm A skimmer cover shall not crack lose material exclusive of plating or finish or be permanently deformed such as geometrical or dimensional deformation This page is intentionally left blank E5 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 F 1 F 1 1 Annex F normative Test methods for the evaluation of mechanical chemical feeders NOTE The test conditions specified in this annex are not intended to represent recommended field use conditions Hydrostatic pressure test Purpose The purpose of this test is to verify that components of a mechanical chemical feeder that normally operate under pressure can withstand hydrostatic pressure 1 5 times the manufacturer s maximum operating pressure F
210. ical effect is identified from a study of chronic exposure the factor value shall be 1 When sufficient data are available to quantitate the difference in the critical effect after subchronic and chronic exposure or when the principal studies do not suggest that duration of exposure is a determinant of the critical effects a factor value of 3 or a value determined from the data shall be considered In the absence of these data the default value of 10 shall be used Ddourson et al 1996 R 6 4 2 3 4 Database sufficiency Selection of the factor for database sufficiency shall be based on the ability of the existing data to support a scientific judgment of the likely critical effect of exposure to the compound When data exist from a minimum of five core studies two chronic bioassays in different species on two generation reproductive study and two development toxicity studies in different species a factor value of 1 shall be considered When several but not all of the core studies are available a factor value of 3 shall be considered When several of the core studies are unavailable the default value of 10 shall be used Dourson et al 1996 R 6 4 2 3 5 LOAEL to NOAEL Extrapolation Selection of the factor for LOAEL to NOAEL extrapolation shall be based on the ability of the existing data to allow the use of a LOAEL rather than a NOAEL for non cancer risk estimation IF a well defined NOAEL is identified the factor value shall be 1 When
211. ical feeder parts that require cleaning and maintenance shall be accessible 10 1 2 The mechanical chemical feeder shall be equipped to prevent unintended siphonage or other unintended discharge of chemicals and air into a swimming pool or spa hot tub or piping systems 10 2 Erosion resistance 10 2 1 Slurry feeders When tested in accordance with the erosion resistance test described in Annex F section F 2 a slurry feeder operating at the maximum output setting shall feed an agitated suspension of diatomaceous earth 5 0 5 by volume continuously for 2500 h at 20 0 5 psi 138 3 kPa back pressure and shall have an output rate that is no less than 80 and no more than 120 of the manufacturer s maximum rated output At the end of testing the slurry feeder shall show no signs of erosion that could adversely affect proper operation 10 2 2 Dry chemical feeders When tested in accordance with the erosion resistance test described in Annex F section F 2 a dry chemical feeder operating at the maximum output setting shall feed an applicable dry chemical continuously for 2500 h at atmospheric pressure and shall have an output rate that is no less than 80 and no more than 120 of the manufacturers maximum rated output At the end of testing the dry chemical feeder shall show no signs of erosion that could adversely affect proper operation 10 3 Chemical resistance 10 3 1 When tested in accordance with the chemical resistance test describe
212. idential and recreational water facility fencing requirements The use of specific products designs installation requirements and compliance with particular standards may be specified in local building codes or by the local public health official 4 10 Vacuum port fitting cover Vacuum port cover fittings shall comply with the requirements of IAPMO SPS 4 as well as the requirements of 3 of this standard 5 Filters 5 1 General The requirements in this subsection apply to diatomite type sand type cartridge type and high permeability type filters 5 1 1 Filter tanks pressure service 5 1 1 1 The working pressure of a pressure service filter shall be 50 psi 345 kPa or greater The design burst pressure of a pressure service filter tank shall be at least four times the working pressure i e minimum safety factor 4 1 5 1 1 2 The filter tank and its integral components shall not rupture leak burst or sustain permanent deformation when subject to the following conditions in accordance with Annex B section B 1 a hydrostatic pressure equal to 1 5 times the working pressure for 300 s 20 000 consecutive low high pressure cycles and a hydrostatic pressure equal to two times the working pressure NOTE As noted in Annex B leaking from integral components such as valves and fittings that may occur when the hydrostatic pressure is increased to two times the working pressure does not constitute noncom formance to this
213. idge type A pressure or vacuum type device designed to filter water through one or more cartridges 2 41 filter diatomite type A pressure or vacuum type device designed to filter water through a thin layer of filter aid 2 42 filter high permeability type A pressure or vacuum type device designed to filter water through a high permeability element 2 43 filter sand type A device designed to filter water through sand or an alternate sand type media The filtration process may be done under pressure under vacuum or by gravity 2 44 filtration rate Flow rate of water through a filter expressed in gal min ft L min m of effective filter area 2 45 fitting A piping component used to join terminate or provide changes of direction in a piping system NSF ANSI 14 These include but are not limited to these types water inlet water return sur face deck drain overflow perimeter grating water circulation and treatment 2 46 flow balance valve Device to regulate effluent from the skimmer housing of each of two or more surface skimmers 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 2 47 flow cell A closed container with ports for the installation of one or more chemical probes inlet and outlet ports for water and typically a sample port A flow cell provides for offline installation of the chemical probes and a consistent flow of the water to be sampled 2 48 flow meter A device that measures the rate of flow of a substance through a c
214. ied under this Standard separate component manuals shall be included in the manual package If the spa component is integral to the spa equivalent information shall be provided in the soa manual The manual or manual package shall comply with ANSI UL 1563 20 10 1 General spa safety The instructions shall include at a minimum the following information 73 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 identification of electrical hazards and a means to minimize those hazards identification of drowning hazards and means to minimize those hazards identification of injury and health hazards and a means to identify those hazards barriers see section 20 4 5 and the instructions shall include the following statement Always consult and comply with the local regulatory authority having jurisdiction regarding spa safety barriers and the layers of drowning protection required for private and public use spas There is no substitute for constant and vigilant adult supervision 20 10 2 Spa specifications This section shall include at a minimum the following information maximum number of users bathers footprint dimensions spa height effective filtration area heater output water capacity dry weight filled weight including water assuming average occupant weight of 175 lbs dead weight including water assuming average occupant weight of 175 Ibs electrical requirements and general description of how the spa operates
215. imum for the automated controller 18 9 Data plate Data plate shall be permanent easy to read and securely attached cast or stamped onto the automated controller at a location readily accessible after normal installation Data plate shall contain at least the following equipment name manufacturer s name and contact information address phone number website or prime supplier model number electrical requirements volts amps and Hertz 61 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 maximum external load rated in volts and amps serial number and date of manufacture caution statements prominently displayed and replacement sensor model numbers 19 Water Quality Testing Devices WQTD 19 1 General WQTD are used to monitor and measure recreational water parameters to help maintain the optimal swimming environment Products covered by this section include test strips used with or without an electronic comparator chemical liquid or powder kits with or without electronic comparators and analytical probes as well as other products or technologies 19 2 Testing WQTD units selected for testing shall be from at least 2 different batches or manufacturing runs Products are conditioned and or calibrated as appropriate per the manufacturer s instructions then exposed and tested per Annex O requirements to various test solutions to evaluate their accuracy repeatability reproducibility and shelf
216. imum of 211 gal 800 L If the manufacturer claims a product is rated for a particular flow rate the worst case unit s based upon power and flow rate within a family of similar products shall be tested The testing will be conducted such that a 50 gpm device would be tested using a water volume equal to or greater than 300 gal in the tank system Similarly if the product is rated for 1 000 gpm the volume in the tank system shall be equal to greater than 6 000 gal up to a maximum water volume of 10 000 gal in the tank system If the manufacturer claims a product is rated based upon treatment of a particular gallon volume of pool or spa the worst case unit s based upon power and volume ratio within a family of similar products shall be tested The product shall be tested when installed on a tank system with a volume equal to or greater than that claimed by the manufacturer up to 12 000 gal of water volume The circulation system shall be set at the worst case ie lowest flow rate recommended by the manufacturer but no less than 33 gpm H2 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 NOTE Based upon a 1000 gal spa with a required 30 minute volumetric turnover rate yields 1000 gal 30 minutes 33 3 gpm b Empty and thoroughly clean a test vessel capable of holding the water volume calculated in Annex H section H 1 6 1 a c Provide a heating and mixing mechanism for the vessel referred to in Annex H section H 1 6 1 b d Fill the
217. ing buffer shall be poured off b The primary antibody shall be poured over slides The slides shall be rocked at room temperature for 1 hr H16 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 H 4 8 4 2 3 Secondary antibody a The primary antibody solution shall be poured off b Slides shall be washed four times with 1 X PBS The PBS shall be rocked by hand over slides 10 times between each wash c The secondary antibody shall be poured over slides The slides shall be covered with aluminum foil then rocked at room temperature for 1 hr NOTE Premixed stains with both the primary and secondary antibody are available H 4 8 4 3 Cover glass a The second antibody solution shall be poured off b The slides shall be washed four times with 1 X PBS The PBS shall be rocked over slides 10 times per wash c The slides shall be placed on absorbent paper d 1 drop of DABCO shall be added in between four wells 2 drops per slide and the slide shall be covered with a cover glass e The edge of each cover glass shall be sealed to the slide with clear fingernail polish Slides shall be stored at 39 F 4 C H 4 8 5 Reading slides a An epifluorescence microscope with filters for FITC dye shall be used for reading slides b Each well shall be scored as positive if invasion and clustering are present three or more foci per cluster c The well shall be screened to score it as a negative d The data shall be recorded H 4 8 6 MPN d
218. ing handle can only be changed intentionally 8 2 3 Valves shall be designed so that the operating handle if removed may only be properly realigned 8 3 Design pressure The working pressure of a pressure service valve or manufactured manifold or operational system associated with single or multiple tank filter system shall be 50 psi 344 kPa or greater The design burst pressure of a pressure service valve or operational system associated with single or multiple tank filter system shall be designed to have a burst pressure of at least four times the working pressure e minimum safety factor 4 1 8 4 Pressure service The valve or manufactured manifold and its integral components shall not rupture leak burst or sustain permanent deformation when subject to the following conditions in accordance with the following annex D a ahydrostatic pressure equal to 1 5 times the working pressure for 300 s b 20 000 consecutive pressure cycles per B 1 4d and c a hydrostatic pressure equal to two times the working pressure per B 1 4e 8 5 Valve leakage Filter system valves and manufactured manifolds when operating at the test pressure and maximum design flow rate shall not leak in excess of 3 mL from the waste port and 30mL from the return to pool port in the 5 min test 8 6 Head loss curve 8 6 1 The manufacturer shall make available a head loss curve for both the filter and backwash positions 8 6 2 The actual head loss across a mu
219. ing should be routine a Clean all strainers regularly particularly before and after the pool is vacuum cleaned and before the filter is cleaned b Lubricate pump and motor according to the manufacturer s recommendations c Keep the pump shaft and valve stem packings in good condition d Annually inspect the filter media and the inside of the tank and make any necessary repairs or adjustments e Repair leaks immediately f Protect surfaces from corrosion by painting or cleaning them regularly g Backwash the filter regularly and thoroughly h Inspect and clean the air relief system regularly i Properly drain equipment and appurtenances when closing down the pool spa or hot tub where it is subject to freezing M2 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Annex N normative Test methods for the evaluation of automated chemical controllers N 1 Chemical resistance N 1 1 Purpose The purpose of this annex is to determine if the automated controller components that are normally in contact with the chemically treated water will erode or sustain structural deformation Following chemical exposure the accuracy of the input and output sensor signals of the controller shall be determined as specified under 18 5 1 using the applicable methods in Annex N section N 2 N 1 2 Test solutions Water temperature Swimming Pools 75 10 F 24 6 C Hot tubs Spas 102 5 F 39 3 C Chemical Composition
220. inted materials warning the user of the potential for elevated chemical concentrations and hazardous gas introduction into the pool or spa At a minimum the printed materials shall describe the potentially hazardous conditions such as backwash and periods of no flow in the recirculation system The steps to be taken during installation and operation to prevent such conditions shall be included Feeders designed to be self draining shall be exempt from this requirement 10 11 Operation and installation instructions The manufacturer shall supply operation and installation instructions with each mechanical chemical feeder These instructions shall include the following diagrams and a parts list to facilitate the identification and ordering of replacement parts installation operation and maintenance instructions reference to flooded suction installation and prevention of cross connections reference to recommended use chemicals and maximum use concentrations caution statement to address potentially hazardous conditions due to chemical overdosing see 10 10 36 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 reference to one or more methods to stop chemical feed automatically when no return flow to the swimming pool or hot tub exists model number of the unit and applicable caution statements prominently displayed 10 12 Data plate The data plate on mechanical chemical feeders shall be permanent easy to read a
221. internal volume of 90 in 1475 cm 7 2 Non integral strainer cover Non integral strainer covers shall be designed to be opened manually and shall have a gasket that creates a tight seal when tightened by hand 7 3 Drain plug A non integral strainer shall have sufficient drain holes with plugs to drain the strainer body without disconnecting the strainer 7 4 Head loss The manufacturer of a non integral strainer shall specify the maximum flow rate for which the strainer is intended and shall provide a curve showing the head losses in the intended range of flow rates 28 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 NOTE This information is necessary to facilitate the proper matching of a pump and non integral strainer 7 5 Hydrostatic pressure test The non integral strainer shall be capable of withstanding a hydrostatic pressure testing of 150 of the maximum rated pressure see Annex D section D 1 7 6 Operation and installation instructions The manufacturer shall provide a manual with each non integral strainer The manual shall include written instructions for the proper installation operation and maintenance of the non integral strainer Instructions shall include a parts list and diagrams to facilitate the identification and ordering of replacement parts If the parts list does not uniquely identify each part for ordering the manufacturer shall also supply the appropriate specification numbers and serial numbers 7 7 Data pl
222. inue to collect one output sample at each additional 30 min 3 min for a total of 3 h g Repeat steps d e and f at 50 of the maximum output rate control mechanism setting h Calculate the net increase in concentration ppm per hour for each sample point i Interpolate the output rate after 24 h Convert the net output concentration to the units with which the manufacturer specifies the output rate for the feeder G 3 5 2 Acceptance criteria At each test setting of the output rate control mechanism individual output rates shall be within 20 of the manufacturer s claim G5 This page is intentionally left blank 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 Annex H normative Test methods for the evaluation of process equipment H 1 Disinfection efficacy of secondary disinfection equipment H 1 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to determine the disinfection efficacy of process equipment designed for secondary disinfection for swimming pools and spa hot tubs H 1 2 Apparatus See figure H1 in this annex H 1 3 Specific test waters a The test water shall be balanced prior to the addition of challenge constituents and microorganisms The water shall have the following characteristics pH pools spa 7 2 7 6 alkalinity pools spa 60 100 ppm CaCO hardness pools spa 200 400 ppm CaCO temperature pools spa 65 85 F 18 29 C turbidity pools spa lt 2 0 NTU total free available chlorine TDS pools spa per manuf
223. ion of a compound that account for differences in the amount of parent compound or active metabolite s available to a target organ TERA 1996 R 2 23 weight of evidence The extent to which the available biomedical data support the hypothesis that a substance causes cancer or other toxic effects in humans adapted from U S EPA 2011a R 3 Product information requirements R 3 1 Product formulation submission The manufacturer shall submit at a minimum the following information for each swimming pool treatment chemical a a proposed maximum dose rate for the product b complete formulation information which includes the following the composition of the formulation in percent or parts by weight for each chemical in the formulation the reaction mixture used to manufacture the chemical if applicable Chemical Abstract Number CAS number chemical name and supplier for each chemical present in the formulation a list of known or suspected impurities within the treatment chemical formulation and the maximum percent or parts by weight of each impurity c a description or classification of the process in which the treatment chemical is manufactured handled and packaged RA Initial toxicity screen threshold of evaluation R 4 1 General requirements Based on the formulation information the concentration of each swimming pool treatment chemical and or contaminants in the swimming pool water at the maximum rec
224. ion system using a vacuum system such as a venturi where a loss of vacuum will interrupt the flow of ozone J 6 2 2 For generators that produce ozone under vacuum and utilize a negative pressure Venturi ozone delivery system any leak or break in the system after the generator eliminates the potential for ozone release and stops the production of ozone J 6 2 3 For generators that produce ozone under pressure and utilize a negative pressure Venturi ozone delivery system any leak or break in the system will immediately cause the release of ozone unless specific precautions are taken Therefore pressure systems shall be excluded from indoor use J 6 2 4 For outdoor use pressurized ozone systems shall be vented to a vacuum ozone destruct and follow the same monitor controller instructions J3 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 J 6 2 5 At the time the ozone generating equipment is installed again after 24 hours of operation and annually thereafter the air space within 6 six inches of the pool water shall be tested to determine compliance of less than 0 1 ppm mg L gaseous ozone Results of the test shall be maintained on site for review by the local enforcing agency J 6 3 Installation recommendations The injection and mixing system shall not prevent the attainment of the turnover rate required elsewhere in this Standard The ozone injection point shall be located in the pool return line after the filtration and heating equipment prio
225. ired in other reference standards 77 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 21 3 Overflow fittings and perimeter grating Overflow fittings and perimeter grates are designed to capture water from the top of the pool or spa and direct it to the filtration and treatment system Such fittings may be designed with integrated trough gut ter or support and catchment channel These fittings are not designed to be installed in a pool or spa in a continuously submerged application as submerged suction fittings shall be evaluated to ANSI APSP 16 Overflow fittings and perimeter grating products including corner sections sweeps and radius fittings if applicable shall be tested and comply with the corrosion resistance design and construction require ments of the material section of this Standard and the following Dimensional compliance with the manufacturer s design requirements and installation instructions including determination of open area or percent open area for water flow When polymeric materials are used to make fittings for use in outdoor pool and spa applications they shall undergo UV exposure in accordance with ASTM G154 for UV resistance and 70 strength requirements of section 3 as referenced in ANSI APSP 16 When polymeric material products are offered in multiple colors the colors with the highest and lowest colorant loading of colorant within the formulation shall be tested If colorants are used at differing percentage
226. is of blanks as tests of continued performance Laboratory performance shall be compared to established performance criteria to determine if the results of analyses meet the performance characteristics of the method H 4 9 1 1 In recognition of advances that are occurring in analytical technology certain options shall be permitted to improve detection or lower the cost of measurements provided that all quality control acceptance criteria are met If an analytical technique other than the techniques specified in this method is used that technique shall have specificity equal to or better than the specificity of the techniques in this method for Cryptosporidium parvum in the sample of interest Specificity shall be defined as producing results that are equivalent to the results produced by this method for Cryptosporidium parvum in drinking water and that meet the entire quality control QC acceptance criteria stated in this method H 4 9 1 1 2 Each time a modification is made to this method the analyst shall repeat the initial demonstration of laboratory capability test in H 3 9 3 1 to demonstrate that the modification produces results equivalent or superior to results produced by this method H 4 9 1 1 3 The laboratory shall maintain records of modifications made to this method H 4 9 1 2 The laboratory shall on an ongoing basis demonstrate through analysis of the effluent matrix spike sample see H 3 9 6 that the analysis system is in control
227. ision The numerical agreement between two or more measurements using the same test equipment The precision can be reported as the range for a measurement difference between the minimum and maximum results It can also be reported as the standard deviation or the relative standard deviation It is a measure of how close together the measurements are not how close they are to the correct or true value 2 84 precoat Layer of filter aid on septum of a diatomite type filter at beginning of a filter cycle 2 85 process equipment Equipment used for on site generation and or application of ozone ultraviolet light hydrogen peroxide copper and silver ions or chlorine 2 86 public spa hot tub swim spa therapy spa resistance system A spa other than a permanent residential spa or portable residential spa which is intended to be used for bathing and is operated by an owner licensee concessionaire regardless of whether a fee is charged for use 2 87 pump discharge pressure Actual gauge reading taken at the discharge of a pump expressed in kPa psi 2 88 reagent A solid or liquid component of a water quality testing device WQTD that is used to condition a sample or that reacts with a test parameter as part of a test procedure 2 89 reagent grade A laboratory or highly purified grade of chemical 2 90 readily accessible Fabricated to be exposed for cleaning and inspection without using tools 2 91 readily removable Capable of being
228. isorio enina eSEE REAREA TOES ars aca viva vase secs read nee tages adc E EA E AEAEE NO En 30 8 9 Installation and operating instructions nenene 31 GL SEN Ee ENT tree ea ed ee ire re 31 Recessed automatic surface skimmers 31 GR Bee E EE ne 31 GEET On WEE 31 9 3 Strainer basket GO NN 32 9 4 Equalizer line 0 NN eee eceaaaeaeeeeeeeeneneeaaaneae 32 9 5 Cover and mounting ring M REENEN 33 9 6 Trimmer valves REENEN EE ice EEN REENEN 33 9 7 Vacuum cleaner connections Ash 34 9 8 Operation and installation instructions 34 9 9 Data plate Ni ee eeeeeaaeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaenene 34 Mechanical chemical feeding equipment 34 10 1 General 9 his 35 10 2 Erosion resistance D 35 10 3 Chemical resistance S OR 97 35 10 4 Output rat e SRR A O7 35 10 5 HydrostatiGtpiessure 8 O Ben 36 10 6 Lret st s EEE in hassan ne and ns etd sate anse 36 10 7 Shielding S ss M iii 36 UE Wf uer iii 36 10 9 SCO 0 M7 36 10 10 Protection against overdosing ccccceeteeeeecccneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeseseaaaaeeeeeeeseeencaaeeesaeeeeees 36 10 11 Operation and installation instructions 36 BEN CRESIEN TEE onde etched eho ed etal D ET 37 Flow through chemical feeding equipment 37 11 1 e CET E D 37 11 2 Chemicaltesistance M iiiiiiissseeenneressssnenneennee 37 11 3 Hydrostatic fi ssure
229. k drain fittings Surface or deck drain fittings are not designed to be installed in a submerged pool or spa application Surface or deck drain type fittings design allows them to collect water from the area around the pool or spa via gravity Surface or deck drain fittings shall comply with the corrosion resistance and design and construction requirements of the material section of this Standard and the following Dimensional compliance with the applicable mating pipe or fitting standard e ASTM and ASME thread and socket fitting standards in accordance with the manufacturer s design and installation instructions 76 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 When polymeric materials are used to make fittings for use in outdoor pool and spa applications they shall undergo UV exposure in accordance with ASTM G154 for UV resistance and 70 strength requirements of the section on materials as referenced in ANSI APSP 16 When polymeric material products are offered in multiple colors the colors with the highest and lowest colorant loading of colorant within the formulation shall be tested If colorants are used at differing percentages within the formulations test both the highest and lowest colorant loading levels as well as the lowest and darkest colors The worst case recorded values shall be used for all further tests and calculations Fittings that are only rated for indoor use need not comply with UV exposure requirements Manufactured su
230. king pressure 13 11 Head loss The manufacturer shall make available a head loss claim for systems installed into the main line The actual head loss shall not exceed the claimed head loss by more than 10 when tested in accordance with Annex B B 3 13 12 Water flow meter If the performance of a unit is dependent on a specified water flow rate a means to monitor and control the flow shall be provided 13 13 Oxidation reduction potential ORP monitoring Ozone systems shall be equipped with ORP monitoring equipment The ORP monitoring equipment shall comply with the applicable requirements of 18 13 14 Warning devices The ozone generation system shall have a visual or audible alarm to alert facility staff of the ORP reading for the ozone system when it reaches below 650 mV 13 15 Operational protection Ozone generation systems shall have an automatic mechanism for ceasing ozone production whenever one or more of the following conditions exist door open or cover panel removed from the generator cabinet low feed gas supply loss of vacuum high temperature of the ozone generator module high temperature of the high voltage transformer loss of water flow including during backwash cycle and high dew point in the ambient feed air not necessary if oxygen is used NOTE High dew point results in nitric acid production which can severely damage ozone generators and contaminate the water
231. l results in greater than 80 ppm perform a 2 test with 1 1 dilution with DI or tap water read result and multiply by 2 to verify level Table 0 8 TDS Testing PH hydrochlo Total Alkalinity FAC Sodium ric ac Sodium Chlo DI water mL Calcium Magnesium Hypochlorite Temperature id sodium hy Sodium Bical ride NaCl CaCl MgCl ppm C bonate NaOCl ppm droxide NaHCO ppm ppm HCI NaOH 3 PP 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 ZA 0 1 100 10 700 70 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 7 4 0 1 100 10 1200 120 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 7 4 0 1 100 10 1700 170 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 7 4 0 1 100 10 2200 220 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 7 4 0 1 100 10 4000 400 NOTE 1 NaCl added to reach ideal value NOTE 2 Ca Mg and TA will contribute to the TDS value baseline of 500 ppm plus balance of NaCl added to reach total value 021 NSF ANSI 50 2015 2015 NSF Table 0 9 Salinity Testing Total Alka pH hydro lini 8 S ty Sodi Sodium Calcium Magnesium FAC Sodi m Temperature cnong ac um Bicar Sodium Cyanurate DI water mL CaCl ppm MaCl ppm Hypochlorite C id sodium bonate Chloride Cla 2 PP 90 2 PPM NaOCl ppm hydroxide NaHCO NaCl ppm ats Ge HCI NaOH Se PP 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 74 0 1 100 10 1500 150 0 0 1000 220 3
232. led for maintenance and repair 4 3 Closing and sealing devices Mechanical clamps gaskets and sealing devices shall not leak when subjected to the applicable pressure requirements 4 4 Suction fittings Suction fittings that are designed to be totally submerged for use in swimming pools and spa hot tubs shall comply with ANSI APSP 16 and the requirements of 3 4 5 PVC Hose Helix or fabric reinforced flexible PVC hose for use on circulation piping in pools hot tubs spas and jetted bathtub units shall comply with the following IAPMO ANSI Z1033 the requirements of 3 and Annex B section B 1 5 after a 20 000 cycle strength test conducted in accordance with Annex B section B 1 4 4 6 Safety Vacuum Release Systems SVRS Manufactured SVRS shall comply with ASTM F2387 and or ANSI ASME A112 19 17 and the material requirements of 3 4 7 Pool and Spa Covers All pool or spa covers safety or otherwise shall be labeled in accordance with ASTM F1346 and shall conform to the requirements of 3 and 4 4 8 Pool Alarms Pool Alarms shall comply with ASTM F2208 as well as the requirements of 3 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 4 9 Barriers and fencing Fencing for use as a barrier around recreational water shall comply with one or more of the following Standards ASTM F1908 ASTM F2049 ASTM F2286 ASTM F2409 or ASTM F2699 NOTE Check with the local authorities for res
233. lements and weather 2 76 oxidation reduction potential ORP The potential in millivolts required to transfer electrons from the oxidant to the reductant used as a qualitative measure of the state of oxidation in water treatment The more positive the value the more oxidizing the solution ORP provides a qualitative indication of the activity of the sanitizer but is not a measure of disinfectant concentration 2 77 ozone A gas consisting of three atoms of oxygen O3 2 78 ozone generator A device that causes ozone to be formed 2 79 DH A numerical value expressing acidity or alkalinity where 7 is neutral higher values are more alkaline basic and lower values are more acidic The numerical value is the negative base 10 log of the hydrogen ion concentration 2 80 pool water Water with a specific conductivity as shown below Type 1 has a conductivity less than or equal to an aqueous sodium chloride solution of 1500 ppm 18 See 6 6 for pump performance curve requirements 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Type 2 has a conductivity greater than Type 1 and less than or equal to an aqueous sodium chloride solution of 6000 ppm Type 3 water has a conductivity greater than Type 2 NOTE TDS are to include any Total Dissolved Solids that exist within makeup up or initial fill water supply 2 81 positive displacement Mechanical displacement of fluid 2 82 power Brake horsepower input required to operate pumps 2 83 prec
234. ll have devices to eliminate binding The weir shall be accessible for replacement in the field 9 3 Strainer basket 9 3 1 A skimmer shall have a strainer basket to trap suspended and floating material in the overflow water passing through the skimmer Spa hot tub skimmers that have self contained filters are exempt from this requirement 9 3 2 Strainer baskets shall be readily removable and easily cleanable 9 3 3 The area of each opening in the strainer basket shall not exceed 0 05 in 0 3 cm 9 3 4 For swimming pool skimmers the total open area in the strainer basket shall be 30 in 194 cm or greater For spa hot tub skimmers the total open area in the strainer basket shall be 11 in 71 cm or greater 9 3 5 For swimming pool skimmers the internal volume of the strainer basket shall be 160 in 2620 om or greater For spa hot tub skimmers the internal volume in the strainer basket shall be 44 in 720 cm or greater 9 4 Equalizer line 9 4 1 A skimmer design may have an equalizer line that prevents air from becoming entrained in the suction line 9 4 2 Consult local codes to determine if skimmer installation requires an equalizer line If an equalizer line is required for skimmer installation any submerged suction equalizer outlet shall be covered by an appropriately certified and sized suction fitting cover sump and fasteners that is certified in accordance with ANSI APSP 16 It is the responsibility of install
235. low If not already installed turn off the pump and attach a vacuum indicating device pressure indicting de vice if the pump is operated in a flooded suction configuration to the influent side of the pump and a pressure indicating device to the effluent side of the pump Alternatively use a differential pressure indicating device to provide more accurate readings Turn on and operate the pump at full speed Allow flow and pressures to stabilize before recording the vacuum and pressure readings with gauges located at the same elevation or measure the elevation dif ference and make the correction in c Alternatively record differential reading Convert vacuum and pressure readings to head using units published on the pump curve If the gauges were at different elevations add the difference in pump curve head units to the effluent reading Sum the converted readings to determine and record the total dynamic head full speed TDH When the pump is below the waterline the influent head is subtracted from the total head Alternatively convert differential reading to head units published on the pump curve full speed TD Relevant equations are shown below TDH psi Pressure gy psi Pressure int psi AZ ft X 0 4335 Or TDH psi Pressure pir psi AZ ft X 0 4335 And TDH ft TDH psi X 2 31 Where P2 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 AZ Height of Effluent Measurement above Influent Measurement ft Pressure pit
236. lth risks of chemicals Derivation of guidance values for health based exposure limits World Health Organization Geneva Klimisch H J M Andreae and U Tillman 1997 A Systematic Approach for Evaluating the Quality of Experimental Toxicological and Ecotoxicological Data Regulatory Toxicology and Pharmacology 25 1 5 Meek M E Newhook R Liteplo R G and V C Armstrong 1994 Approach to assessment of risk to human health for priority substances under the Canadian Environmental Protection Act Environmental Carcinogenesis and Ecotoxicology Reviews C12 2 105 134 NSF ANSI 60 2013 Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals Health Effects NSF International Ann Arbor MI Available from the NSF bookstore at lt www techstreet com nsfgate html gt NSF ANSI 61 2013 Drinking Water System Components Health Effects NSF International Ann Arbor MI Available from the NSF bookstore at lt www techstreet com nsfgate html gt Renwick A G 1993 Data derived safety factors for the evaluation of food additives and environmental contaminants Food Additives and Contaminants 10 3 275 205 TERA Toxicology Excellence for Risk Assessment 1996 Evolution of Science Based Uncertainty Factors in Noncancer Risk Assessment Full Report Prepared for Health and Environmental Sciences Institute HESI Cincinnati Ohio Jan 31 1996 U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 1991a National Primary Drinking Water Regulations Final Rul
237. ltiport valve shall not exceed the head loss indicated by the manufacturer s head loss curve by more than 5 see annex D section D 4 8 6 3 The head loss curve for manufactured manifolds may be calculated using a standard friction loss table and actual valve head loss data 8 7 Waste port seal The filter system valve or manufactured manifold shall not leak more than 3 mL in a 5 min test through the waste port when the valve is set in the position and a static pressure of 0 to 10 psi 70 kPa is applied to the return port see annex D section D 5 8 8 Vacuum service 8 8 1 The design collapse pressure of a vacuum service valve shall be at least 1 5 times the pressure developed by the weight of the water in the tank i e minimum safety factor 1 5 8 8 2 Vacuum service valves shall not rupture leak collapse or sustain permanent deformation when subjected to a vacuum of 25 in Hg 85 kPa for 300 s in accordance with Annex B section B 2 8 8 3 Vacuum service valves are exempt from port leakage testing 30 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 8 9 Installation and operating instructions The manufacturer shall provide a manual with each valve or manufactured manifold The manual shall include operating instructions installation instructions design head loss curve and parts lists and any drawings or charts necessary to permit proper installation operation and maintenance 8 10 Identification The multiport valve shall be clearly a
238. m gt U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 1997 Exposure Factors Handbook Volume III Activity Factors Office of Research and Development EPA 600 P 95 002Fa Washington DC page 15 16 R22 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 1998a Science Policy Handbook Peer Review EPA 100 B 98 001 U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 1998b Guidelines for neurotoxicity risk assessment Federal Register 63 93 26926 26954 Available at lt http www epa gov raf publications guidelines neurotoxicity risk assessment htm gt U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 2002 A Review of the Reference Dose and Reference Concentration Process EPA 630 P 02 002F 01 Dec 2002 U S EPA Risk Assessment Forum Washington DC lt http www epa gov raf publications pdfs rfd final pdf gt U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 2003a Swimmer Exposure Assessment Model SWIMODEL software Version 3 0 Available online at http www epa gov oppad001 swimodel htm U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 2003b Users Manual Swimmer Exposure Assessment Model SWIMODEL Version 3 0 U S Environmental Protection Agency Office of Pesiticide Programs Antimicrobials Division Available at lt http www epa gov oppad001 swimodelusersguid pdf gt U S EPA U S Environmental Protection Agency 2005a Guidelines for Carcinogen Risk Assessment Federal Register 61 7
239. m hardness etc applicable caution and warning statements shall be prominently displayed Example If system flow is allowed to stagnate in a solar collector there is a potential risk of high water temperatures Consider draining the system otherwise water in solar collectors can reach high temperatures and create hot liquid gas If hot liquids or gas are not purged from the system it could adversely affect plumbing or the safety of swimmers near water return fittings instructions or guidance for proper size selection and installation and applicable diagrams and a parts list to facilitate the identification and ordering of replacement parts or other supply and installation needs 22 4 Marking and product identification The heater shall be clearly and permanently marked or labeled with the following manufacturer name and address or website model number serial number date code or other means to identify date of production whether the unit was evaluated for pools and or spas if not evaluated for both applications working pressure Size or capacity flow direction if applicable maximum head loss and maximum design flow rate 81 This page is intentionally left blank 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Annex A informative Materials review and qualification methods A 1 Purpose The purpose of these methods is to document that the materials used in contact
240. maintenance of the pump Instructions shall include a parts list and diagrams to facilitate the identification and ordering of replacement parts If the parts list does not uniquely identify each part for ordering the manufacturer shall also supply the appropriate specification numbers and serial numbers and the impeller diameter 6 7 2 A pump manufactured without an integral strainer shall state in its installation instructions on a data plate or on an attached label that the pump is to be installed with a strainer conforming to the requirements in this Standard 6 8 Self priming pumps A pump designated as self priming shall be capable of repriming itself when operated under a suction lift without the addition of more liquid Self priming capability shall be verified in accordance with Annex C section C 3 6 9 Data plate 6 9 1 A pump shall have a data plate that is permanent easy to read and securely attached cast or stamped into the pump at a location readily accessible after installation The data plate shall contain the following information 26 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 manufacturers name and contact information address phone number website or prime supplier pump model number pump serial number date code or specification number whether the unit has been evaluated for swimming pools or spas hot tubs if not evaluated for both applications and designation as a self priming or non self
241. manent easy to read and securely attached to the filter housing at a readily accessible location The data plate shall contain the following information manufacturers name and contact information address phone number website or prime supplier filter model number filter serial number effective filtration area in square meters or square feet required clearance vertical and horizontal for service and maintenance design flow rate in liters minute or gallons minute working pressure steps of operation and recommended replacement cartridge or high permeability element The data plate shall indicate whether a filter is designed for swimming pool applications only or spa hot tub applications only A filter designed for both applications is exempt from this requirement 5 4 8 2 If provided with the filter each valve on the face piping of the filter shall have a permanent label or tag identifying its operation e g influent backwash bypass 5 4 9 Filtration area The actual filtration area shall be within 5 of the effective filtration area specified on the filter data plate The actual filtration area is equal to the total surface area of the cartridge or element material minus the combined area of any obstructions wider than 0 25 in 6 4 mm in direct contact with the cartridge element material during filtration 5 4 10 Filtration rates The design filtration rate of a cartridge type filt
242. methods D 3 4 1 Filter system valve The following procedure shall be used for the filter system valve backwash position and manufactured manifold differential pressure leakage test a Make the following connections while providing an adjustable valve between them 1 Connect the test specimen without reducers or other attached devices in accordance with piping requirements in Table D 1 see applicable Annex D figures D4 and D6 The test specimen shall be in the full open position for each test and 2 secure and make any additional connections that may be necessary to conform to any unique design features specified by the manufacturer b Fill the system with water conditioned to the applicable temperatures specified in Annex D section D 3 3 and bleed off any entrapped air c Place the test specimen or manufactured manifold in the filter position and adjust the flow to the maximum design flow rate 1 gpm 3 8 LPM and adjust valve V3 or equivalent until the pressure differential between the filter inlet port and outlet port is 24 1 psi 165 6 9 kPa See Annex D figures D4 and D5 d Observe and collect leakage from the waste port over atest period of 5 min 5s e Record and report the following static pressure volume of leakage from waste port ml valve inlet port pressure P1 psi kPa differential pressure valve inlet to outlet ports DPI and differential pressure at zero flow
243. mg L is chemical specific and based on label rates H The unitless Henry s Law constant is chemical specific and calculated using H HLC R x T Where HLC Henry s law constant R gas constant 8 19E 5 atm m mole K T ambient temperature in terms of Kelvin units 25C 273K NOTE The exposures estimated using this equation are considered by the U S EPA to be conservative because the effects of dilution by outdoor air at outdoor pools or mechanical ventilation at indoor pools are not included in the equation used to calculate the air concentration for the chemical being assessed Table R5 Assumptions for Short term swimming pool inhalation exposure and dose estimate Age Adult 11 to lt 16 years 6 to lt 11 years Type of Swimmer Non Non Non come Comp EOE Comp SES Comp IR m hr 3 22 1 0 2 9 1 5 2 5 1 3 ET hr day 3 i 2 1 1 1 BW kg 70 54 29 IR Adult The inhalation rates for adults are based on the values presented in EPA s Exposure Factors Handbook U S EPA 1997 IR Child The inhalation rates for children are the mean values from Table 6 2 of Child Specific Handbook U S EPA 2008 The values for moderate and heavy intensity are used for non competitive and competitive swimming respectively ET Competitive Swimmers The exposure times for competitive swimmers are based on the ACC s swimmer sur vey ACC 2002 d
244. mical feeder s and introduce the maximum in use concentration of exposure chemical b Expose all normally wetted parts of the feeder to the applicable chemical solution for a period of 100 d 6h at the ambient temperature specified in Annex F section F 3 2 c Flush the exposure chemical from the feeder and operate it at 100 of its rated capacity for 24 1 h according to the manufacturer s instructions d After the 24 h period evaluate the feeder output uniformity at 100 of its rated capacity by using the method in Annex F section F 5 F 3 4 Acceptance criteria After chemical exposure mechanical chemical feeders shall show no signs of erosion or structural deformation and shall deliver an output rate within 10 of the manufacturer s maximum rated capacity F3 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 FA Life test F 4 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to evaluate the durability of mechanical chemical feeders used in pool and spa hot tub applications F 4 2 Apparatus pump capable of delivering a sufficient back pressure pressure gauge meeting ANSI ASME B40 100 Grade 3A specifications and sized to yield the measurement within 25 to 75 of scale temperature indicating device accurate to 2 F 1 C and recirculation tank F 4 3 Water temperature swimming pools _ hot tubs spas 75 5 F 24 3 C 102 5 F 39 3 C All feeders except those labeled to be for swimming pools only shall be
245. ming pools hot tubs spas 75 10 F 24 6 C 102 5 F 39 3 C All valves and manufactured manifolds except those labeled to be for swimming pools only shall be tested at the spa hot tub water temperature D 4 4 Test methods D 4 4 1 The following procedure shall be used for the valve or manufactured manifold head loss curve test see Annex D figures D1 through D3 a Make the following connections 1 connect the test specimen without reducers or other attached devices in accordance with piping requirements in Table 1 The test specimen shall be at 100 of rated travel and 2 make any additional connections that may be necessary to conform to any unique design features specified by the manufacturer b Fill the valve with water conditioned to the applicable temperature specified in Annex D section D 4 3 and bleed off any entrapped air c Start the pump and set the flow rate through the test specimen to 10 of the maximum design flow rate 1 gpm 3 8 LPM d Record the following static pressures psi kPa valve inlet port pressure P1 differential pressure valve inlet to outlet ports DP1 and elevations feet all from water tank or water level 21 at elevation of P1 and Z2 at elevation DP1 e Using the data generated according to Annex D section D 4 steps b through d calculate the head loss due to the valve or manufactured manifold at each flow rate record the dif
246. more manufacturer s and include model or size of the equipment as it applies to the circulation filtration and treatment system filter s complying to this Standard pump s complying to this Standard primary disinfection system complying to this Standard such as mechanical chemical feeder flow through chemical feeder in line electrolytic or brine batch type chemical generator circulation piping pressure and suction circulation fitting s manifold s etc valve s skimmers 67 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 water return inlet s and water suction outlet s or suction fitting s the following items may be specified by the manufacturer for installation with the unit secondary treatment systems complying to this Standard such as ozone treatment systems UV treatment systems copper silver ion systems 20 5 1 4 Design and performance requirements The spa shall be tested with the manufacturer s recommended or provided piping fittings filter pump and other components as a circulation system for compliance with the following 1 The entire system shall be designed with 2 or more water return fittings to aid in circulation of the water within the spa or equipment 2 The entire system shall circulate water through the filter at a rate equal to or greater than the flow rate required to turn over the volume of the spa within 30 min or les
247. more than 105 of the flow rate indicated by the manufacturer s performance curve C2 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 C 2 Hydrostatic pressure test C 2 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to verify that a pump is capable of withstanding a hydrostatic pressure equal to 150 of its working pressure C 2 2 Apparatus The test shall be performed using pressure gauges conforming to ANSI ASME B40 100 Grade 3A specifications The gauges shall be sized to yield the measurement within 25 to 75 of scale Electronic pressure transducers may used provided that the accuracy and scale are equivalent to those of a pressure gauge meeting these requirements C 2 3 Test conditions Po swimming pool hot tubs spa water temperature 75 10 F 24 6 C 102 5 F 39 3 C Pumps except those labeled to be for swimming pools only shall be tested at the hot tubs spa temperature C 2 4 Hydrostatic pressure test method a If not integral with the pump the strainer housing shall be removed The pump shall be sealed The pump shall be connected to a pressure source b The pump shall be filled with test water at the appropriate temperature and all air removed from the system c Increasing pressure shall be applied in a uniform manner to obtain 1 5 times the maximum shut off head pressure in a period of 60 s to 70 s For pumps whose power rating lt 100 HP 75 kW the required pressure shall be held for 3 min 30 s For pumps whose power rating
248. mps and other assembly components that are not exposed to natural UV radiation when fully assembled and installed according to the manufacturer s instruction are not included in the Ultraviolet Light Exposure Test When metallic materials are used to make fittings the minimum loading requirements shall be confirmed in accordance with the applicable ASME floor drain standard ANSI ASME A112 3 1 ANSI ASME A112 6 3 or ANSI ASME A112 6 4 Products shall comply with the vertical load and deformation test of section 3 of ANSI APSP 16 Products shall comply with the pull load requirements of section 3 of ANSI APSP 16 Products that meet the requirements of this section shall be marked in accordance with the following manufacturer s name or trademark model number or trade designation use conditions indoor use only or indoor outdoor use and testing standard reference s NSF ANSI 50 certification mark and other standards if Zoplicable such as ANSI ASME A1126 4 etc Product packaging installation or use instructions shall contain the following manufacturer s name or trademark model number or trade designation product installation instructions manufacturer s use conditions indoor use only or indoor outdoor use load rating and standard reference NSF ANSI 50 certification mark and other standards if ie such as ANSI ASME A112 6 4 or other markings as requ
249. mutagenic effects because the exchange is assumed to be reciprocal with no gain loss or change of genetic material However they do indicate that the test material has interacted with the DNA in a way that may lead to chromosome damage In in vitro studies SCEs do not provide adequate evidence of mutagenicity but do identify the need for definitive chromosomal aberration studies When evidence of in vitro clastogenicity exists the induction of SCEs is often used as evidence of likely in vivo clastogenic activity because the in vitro aberration data demonstrate the clastogenic activity of the compound and the in vivo SCE data demonstrate that the compound interacted with the DNA in the target tissue 5 Unscheduled DNA synthesis assay Hypoxanthine guanine phosphoribosyl transferase assay 7 Minimum reported parameters include clinical observations hematology and clinical chemistry and gross pa thology R25 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Table R8 Uncertainty factors Areas of uncertainty Intraspecies extrapolation species variation This factor accounts for variations in chemical sensitivity among individuals in a species including toxicokinetic and 1 3 or 10 toxicodynamic parameters Interspecies extrapolation animal to human This factor accounts for variations in chemical sensitivity between experimental animals and humans including 1 3 or 10 toxicokinetic and toxicodynamic parameters Less than lifetime dur
250. n J6 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 J 8 2 Installation UV treatment equipment may deplete halogen levels therefore UV treatment equipment should be placed upstream of halogenation equipment It is recommend that UV systems be installed in the main line or in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions and state and local regulations The UV unit can be fitted in a bypass but during operation the bypass should be fully closed to ensure full treatment of all the water It is also recommended that an appropriate strainer be fitted downstream of the UV unit Valves placed in close proximity to and in the line of sight of the UV lamp should have metal discs and should be uncoated or of a material that the manufacturer can confirm as UVC stable Pipework adjacent to the UV unit should be of a suitable material ABS should not be used J7 This page is intentionally left blank 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 Annex K informative Recessed automatic surface skimmers Recommendations for installation and operation This is not a basic part of the Standard nor the responsibility of the manufacturer However to obtain satisfactory performance and proper results the following limitations should be considered in the overall hydraulic design of the pool spa or hot tub The method of installation and operation should conform to the manufacturer s recommendations and the applicable state and local laws and regulations
251. n ANS Therefore this Disclaimer may contain material that has not been subjected to public review or a consensus process In addition it does not contain requirements neces sary for conformance to the Standard Contents 1 EE 1 Eat 1 1 2 Variations in design and operation 1 1 3 Alternate materials iii 1 1 4 Standard RE 1 125 NOMMALIVS referentes TEEN 1 DOT ONS EE 4 Material Sz Sms nes das E 12 3 1 General ss Error Bookmark not defined 3 2 Material formulation sees EE E iii 12 3 3 Corrosion resistance GC ii cneeee eee ee ee eeeeesdnsaeeeeeaeneeesenes 14 3 4 Dissimilar metals ON NM 14 325 INSUIATING TITUS ET W GEN WEE 14 3 6 Piping materials 7 NN 14 Design and construction EE ON cae eeeeeeeeeeeeensaeeeeeeeeens 15 4 1 Installation of piping valves and Tttngs 15 4 2 Assembly 0 NN ee 15 4 3 Closing and Sealing devices sise 15 4 4 Suction fittings NN NP iiiiiiiiicsssssees errsssssnse 15 4 5 PVG OS ann mnt 15 4 6 Safety Vacuum Release Systems VDS 15 4 7 Pool and Spa Covers 2 15 4 8 Pool Alarms mm 2 ee NR eee eee e ee eeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 15 4 9 Barriers and feneino pma E OR 7 16 4 10 Vacuum p niitting covers 207 D 16 NIT CEISTE EN WEE 16 Bol Generali SR Ne sed sau pet bed seed seul aed bel tante 16 5 2 Precdaimediastype fier A issue 17 5 3 Sana type Mers en M7 is 20 5 4 Cartridge type a
252. n and use instructions with the WQTD The instructions shall address WQTD components WQTD conditioning if applicable detailed use instructions including sample size reagent s required and measurement of reagents addition of reagent s and mixing wait times if applicable 63 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 method of determining test result including calculation and conversion factors as applicable maintenance of WQTD components if applicable proper storage of the WQTD and its components trouble shooting suggestions dilution use explanation range limitations or variations of the WQTD for use or testing parameters potential interference agents and suggested sequence of water quality tests i e pH first then chlorine 19 4 WQTD Marking Identification The WQTD shall have identification or marking that is permanent easy to read and securely attached to the unit The identification or marking shall contain manufacturers name and contact information address phone number website or prime supplier model number or part number of the unit parts list to facilitate the identification and ordering of replacement parts or referral to a manual or website for those units with size constraints WQTD classification level L1 L2 L3 for each parameter or lowest level achieved and disposal date of the WQTD and its components 20 S
253. n values for all parameters listed in the table b Verify and record the hardness concentration of the test solution using one of the following methods Standard Method 2340B or 2340C Spectrophotometer for use at a wavelength of 515 nm and providing a light path of 0 4 in 1 cm or longer filter photometer equipped with a filter having maximum transmission in the wavelength range of 490 to 530 nm and providing a light path of 0 4 in 1 cm or longer c A sample of the test solution shall be analyzed with the WQTD units under test in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions d Using the same test units repeat the analysis of the test solution two additional times If applicable rinse the test units with de ionized water between test e Assess the results of testing based upon the resolution of the device f Average test results to determine compliance with each accuracy level in 0 12 0 8 Test procedure for alkalinity a For each alkalinity concentration to be tested i e 40 100 200 ppm prepare the appropriate test solution see Table O 6 Verify and record the test solution values for all parameters listed in the table O11 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 b Verify and record the alkalinity concentration of the test solution using one of the following methods Standard Method 2320B Titrimetric Method Spectrophometer for use at wavelength of 515 nm and providing a light path of
254. nd aqueous bromine stock solutions described in 2 3 2 1 prepare test solutions with a free available chlorine concentration of 2 mg L as Cl ppm or 4 mg L as Br ppm b Attach the sensor under test to the automated controller per manufacturer s instructions c When testing for chlorine set the controller to a set point of 3 0 ppm free available chlorine or 6 0 ppm free bromine d Attach two indicators sized for the appropriate voltage into each output terminal of the automated controller e Place the sensor or influent tube under test in the 2 ppm sodium hypochlorite solution or the 4 ppm bromine solution f Record the chlorine or bromine level indicated on the display in ppm of the automated controller Record the operation status of the automated controller g Slowly add 1 N sodium hypochlorite solution or 0 1 N aqueous bromine until the controller de actuates Record the chlorine or bromine ppm on the controller display h Slowly add 1 N sodium thiosulphate solution until the controller actuates Record the chlorine or bromine ppm on the controller display N 2 3 3 ORP N 2 3 3 1 Monitor display accuracy When testing the ORP probe the alkalinity should be in the range of 80 120 ppm and a pH of 7 5 0 2 throughout all tests The temperature should remain constant room temperature throughout the duration of all of the tests 3 F a Weigh 0 20 g of 5 sodium hypochlorite solution Quantitatively transfer
255. nd high permeability type filters 23 Centrif g hpumps EEEE issues 25 CRC WE ND TTT 25 6 2 Hydrost i pressure test sise 25 6 3 Straine rs EEN WT 25 6 4 Drain 9 000 Se ee ee 26 6 5 Shaft seals N EE 26 6 6 Pump performance CUnme iii 26 6 7 Operation and installation instructions 26 6 8 Self priming PUMPS EE 26 CEET Error Bookmark not defined 6 10 M tte enee ame syns OOOO OI EEN PE eesti 27 ele Eine TEE ET 28 7 1 Non integral strainer basket ss 28 2 Non integral strangi GENEE ees ER NSEENESEEKER ENEE ESEEKEKSAEEEEESEELEEEEERE EEN EEEENEN eege 28 723 Dran ele EE 28 TAG ad OSS ire ee eee ees ant eer ee ATS Error Bookmark not defined 7 5 Hydrostatic preSSure EE 29 7 6 Operation and installation instructions 29 TF Data Plates seccscsccsepseesssencsesesepepessanncsspceeeepessanensceceerepessseoesssteneepesd gnsueganetdecbeedidy dural decheecheevianiaee 29 MAINS Dees REENEN EES alte sera trs E 29 ELE Bee eee E eee eee eer E errr mt RCI IN ter ree rere 29 8 2 POsItiIVE INGEXING EE 29 8 3 DESIGN el 30 8 4 Pressure Serice ees essa sees cere cxbasavias ana Aaaa RANAR aan aa Ea si aa aaka asiaa eaa diy evaxsvevexsuseayseeeseneceages 30 8 5 Valve leakage raa a casas ntm nn Aaa nine rare en ee 30 8 6 Head JOSS CUN Oiss aia eae casa vss hse cus va vas oss veen sea vas sso ten res SAEK lash ely AAEE A E a aS 30 Bi WeaSte POM Salis EE 30 8 8 VACUUM SOVICE irr
256. nd permanently marked or labeled with the following manufacturer name and contact information address phone number website or prime supplier model number working pressure vacuum pressure if applicable operating setting and Special requirements for switching between settings e g the pump shall be shut off prior to switching the valve position 9 Recessed automatic surface skimmers This section contains requirements for recessed automatic surface skimmers used for public and residential pools and spas hot tubs The requirements apply to the basic components of a surface skimmer including the skimmer housing strainer basket weir cover and mounting ring equalizer valve or air lock protector trimmer valve and flow balancing valves for multiple skimmer installation and vacuum cleaner connections Recommended procedures for the installation and operation of skimmers on public and residential pools and spas hot tubs are provided in Annex K 9 1 Housing 9 1 1 Skimmer housings whose inlets may be closed during part of operating cycle shall not sustain damage or permanent deformation when exposed to a negative pressure of 25 in Hg 85 kPa 9 1 2 The housing design shall allow for a smooth flow over the effective weir length 9 1 3 On swimming pool skimmers the housing opening at the entrance throat shall be at least 7 5 in 190 mm wide On spa hot tub skimmers the housing opening at the entrance throat
257. nd securely attached cast or stamped onto the feeder at a location readily accessible after normal installation Data plate shall contain the following information manufacturer s name and contact information address phone number website or prime supplier feeder model and or serial number maximum operating pressure rating in psi kPa reference to installation instructions for swimming pool and hot tub spa applications for protection against overdosing during backwash and no flow conditions maximum output rating volume of liquid or weight or volume of solid chemicals 24 h d if the unit is a fixed rate or single rate mechanical chemical feeder include the following Fixed single rate feeder for use only with certified automatic controller The data plate shall indicate whether the mechanical chemical feeder is designed for swimming pool applications only or spa hot tub applications only A mechanical chemical feeder that is designed for both applications is exempt from this requirement 11 Flow through chemical feeding equipment This section contains requirements for adjustable output rate flow through chemical feeders and auxiliary components used for dispensing chemicals by a flow through process in public and residential swimming pools or spas hot tubs Flow through chemical feeders without adjustable output rates and gaseous feeding equipment are not covered under 11 11 1 General Parts of
258. ned in Annex R 6 4 however in lieu of determining a TAC value the identified point of departure may be utilized to conduct a Margin of Exposure MoE analysis If a TAC value or other published risk assessment value is unavailable and there are insufficient toxicity data from which to perform a risk assessment in accordance with Annex R 6 4 the chemical exposure cannot be assessed and presence of the chemical in the formulation is precluded at a concentration greater than 10 ug L R 2 Definitions R 2 1 benchmark dose The lower 95 confidence limit on the dose that would be expected to pro duce a specified response in X of a test population This dose may be expressed as BMDx adapted from Barnes et al 1995 For the purposes of this Standard the benchmark dose shall be calculated at the 10 response level R 2 2 continuous data A measurement of effect that is expressed on a continuous scale e g body weight or serum enzyme levels U S EPA 1995 R 2 3 critical effect The first adverse effect or its known precursor that occurs as the dose rate in creases U S EPA 2011a R 2 4 genetic toxicity Direct interaction with DNA that has the potential to cause heritable changes to the cell R 2 5 health hazards types of U S EPA 1999 and 201 1a R 2 5 1 acute toxicity Effects that occur immediately or develop rapidly after a single administration of a substance Acute toxicity may also be referred to as immediate toxicity
259. nformation address phone number website or prime supplier model number designation electrical requirements for operational volts amps and Hertz of the unit serial number or year of construction maximum rated operating pressure in kPa psi prominently displayed caution statement UV light is harmful to eyes and exposed skin turn off electrical supply before opening unit caution statement that the unit is designed for supplemental disinfection and should be used with registered or approved disinfection chemicals to impart required residual concentrations 14 8 model and number of UV lamp s maximum daily operation time if not designed for continuous operation and maximum design flow rate in gallons minute liters minute Disinfection efficacy Process equipment designed for supplemental disinfection shall demonstrate a 3 log reduction of influent bacteria when tested according to Annex H UV systems claiming chlorine resistant organism treatment such as Cryptosporidium parvum inactivation shall be evaluated according to 14 18 48 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Process equipment shall carry the following information in the installation and use instructions and be noted in the official certification listings This unit has demonstrated an ability to provide three log inactivation of lt name organisms gt This unit has not demonstrated an ability to provide three log kill or inactivation of lt name
260. ng backwash expressed in gal min ft L min m of effective filter area 2 12 body feed Continuous addition of controlled amounts of filter aid during operation of a diatomite type filter to maintain a permeable filter cake If added as a slurry this may be referred to as slurry feed 2 13 bromine A chemical that works as a sanitizer or disinfectant to kill bacteria and algae in pool and spa water 2 14 cartridge A depth or surface type filter component with fixed dimensions and designed to remove suspended particles from water flowing through the unit 2 15 chemical feed rate indicator Mechanism that produces reproducible results expressed in units of weight or volume of chemical per unit of time or per unit of volume of water The mechanism may be a direct reading instrument or may require the use of a reference chart 2 16 chemical feeder output rate Weight or volume of active ingredients delivered by a chemical feeder expressed in units of time 2 17 chemical probe sensor Component of an automated controller that monitors a given control parameter pH ORP free Clo etc 2 18 chlorine A chemical that works as a sanitizer or disinfectant in pool and spa water to kill bacteria and algae and oxidizes ammonia and nitrogen compounds that can enter the pool spa from swimmer body wastes and other sources 2 19 cleaning Physical removal of soiling materials 2 20 combined chlorine Chlorine that has combined with ammonia ni
261. ng perimeter overflow grating gutter system or skimmers to aid in rapid removal of floating debris and contaminants 69 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 20 5 5 1 Recessed surface skimmers 20 5 5 1 1 All recessed surface skimmers shall meet the requirements of the sections on materials and recessed automatic surface skimmers 20 5 5 1 2 One skimmer shall be provided for each 150 surface square feet or portion thereof 20 5 5 1 3 Skimmers shall be externally vented to atmosphere whether integral to the spa or not e g a vent hole in the skimmer cover or lid a vented entry to the skimmer weir or other means 20 5 5 1 4 Systems shall be marked either on the skimmer face or shell structure with the manufactur er s recommended operating water level and acceptable range 20 5 5 1 5 For skimmers integral to the spa a separate skimmer data plate and operational instructions are not required 20 5 5 2 Non recessed surface skimmers 20 5 5 2 1 All non recessed has no skimmer lid cover on deck surface skimmers shall meet the re quirements of the section on materials 20 5 5 2 2 Skimmer and housing when installed in the spa shall have at least 2 of the following design safety features external vacuum break on the skimmer throat entry housings whose inlet may be closed during part of the operation cycle shall not sustain damage or permanent deformation when exposed to a negative pressure of 25 in Hg 85 kPa or
262. ng their operation 17 10 Operating temperatures and pressures The system shall be designed to withstand a minimum water temperature of 102 5 F 39 3 C and a minimum rated pressure of 50 psig 345 kPa 17 11 Warning devices A visual or audible indicator shall be provided to warn the user when ion production ceases 17 12 Chemical resistant materials Equipment parts shall incorporate materials that are resistant to the environment to which the parts will be subjected 58 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 17 13 Output rate Integrated production over a period not to exceed 12 h shall be easily adjustable or adjustable with simple tools eg screwdriver pliers open end wrench in a sufficient number of increments to facilitate use including but not limited to duty control cycle voltage and or current control or a minimum five position switch four settings and off 17 14 Life test When tested in accordance with the life test described in Annex minimum of 8000 operating hours shall be accumulated among the three units no less than 3000 operating hours shall be accumulated on one of the three units At the conclusion of the testing the units shall perform as intended by the manufacturer to the output pressure and operational protection requirements of this section 17 15 Uniformity of output At any setting the system shall deliver the active ions into the water at a rate within 20 of that shown by
263. nt after first turnover 3 Annex H section H1 6 2 1 a effluent after second turnover 1 Annex H section H1 6 2 1 a effluent after second turnover 2 Annex H section H1 6 2 1 a effluent after second turnover 3 Annex H section H1 6 2 1 a effluent after third turnover 1 Annex Lo O N o CH 4 N eN wo 1 H section H1 6 2 1 a effluent after third turnover 2 Annex 3 an A H section H1 6 2 1 a effluent after third turnover 3 Annex H section H1 6 2 1 a o O effluent after fourth turnover 1 Annex H section H1 6 2 1 a effluent after fourth turnover 2 Annex H section H1 6 2 1 a effluent after fourth turnover 3 Annex H section H1 6 2 1 a N aa CO _ o effluent after fifth turnover 1 Annex H section H1 6 2 1 a effluent after fifth turnover 2 Annex H section H1 6 2 1 a effluent after fifth turnover 3 21 Annex H section H1 6 2 1 a D CH H6 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 H 2 Ozone level test H 2 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to verify that an ozone process device does not allow for the passing of ozone into the pool and spa hot tub water above acceptable limits H 2 2 Apparatus See Figure H1 in this annex The distance between the ozone generator and the sampling tank shall be per the manufacturers minimum recommendation and the return line from the ozone generator shall enter t
264. nt and correct for variations in suction Minimum protection e g vacuum switch transducer etc to shut down the ozone power against vacuum loss shall be included and water backflow protection devic es shall be included in the ozone gas delivery line 13 4 Injection methods Injection methods shall be designed to prevent off gassing in excess of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA standards for in air ozone concentration Ozone levels exceeding 0 1 ppm 41 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 0 2 mg m shall not be acceptable in the pool spa hot tub water when tested in accordance with Annex H 2 For companies under jurisdiction other than US regulation for ozone off gassing those jurisdictions regu lations are the default 13 5 Gas flow meter Ozone generation systems shall be equipped with a gas flow meter 13 6 Valve and component identification All valves and performance devices shall have a permanent easily legible and conspicuous label or tag identifying their operation 13 7 Cleanability Parts of ozone generation systems requiring cleaning and maintenance shall be accessible 13 8 Ozone resistant materials Materials in direct contact with ozone gas shall be resistant to degradation by ozone at the ozone concentration specified by the manufacturer 13 9 Compatible materials for operation Tables 13 9 1 and 13 9 2 provide examples of ozone resistant materials that are commercially available
265. nts if applicable cross connection protection if the unit is physically connected to a potable water supply 51 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 output rate in lbs or kg per day or hour maximum daily operation time if not designed for continuous operation and a warning if the potential exists for release of high dosages of substances that may endanger bathers 15 7 Data plate Data plate shall be permanent easy to read and securely attached cast or stamped onto the unit at a location readily accessible after normal installation Data plate s shall contain at least the following equipment name manufacturer s name and contact information address phone number website or prime supplier model number electrical requirements volts amps and Hertz serial number and or date of manufacture caution statements prominently displayed output rate in lbs or kg per day per hour maximum daily operation time if not designed for continuous operation and salt concentration range 15 8 Valve and component identification All valves and performance indication devices shall have a permanent easily legible and conspicuous label or tag identifying their operation 15 9 Operating temperatures and pressures If installed within the recirculating piping system in line electrolytic chlorinator or brominator process equipment shall be designed to withstand a maximum
266. o lt 16 years and 29 kg for children age 6 to lt 11 years based upon Tables 8 4 and 8 5 of the Child Specific Exposure Factors Handbook U S EPA 2008 These values are the average of the 50 percentile body weights for males and females R 5 3 Swimming pool dermal exposures localized For certain chemicals the observed treatment related adverse effect is the result of local skin irritation or sensitization rather than a systemic effect that occurs after the chemical is absorbed through the skin As U S EPA SWIMODEL 2003a is based on the assumption that dermal absorption has taken place it is not appropriate to use the model to estimate dermal exposure for skin irritants or sensitizing agents In this case it is recommended that the concentration of the chemical used in the dermal toxicity study be compared directly with the concentration of the chemical in the pool water Based on the available dermal toxicity studies a weight of evidence approach should be used to identify an appropriate NOAEL for irri tation effects or a NESIL No Expected Sensitization Induction Level that may then be compared to the concentration of the chemical in the pool water using a Margin of Exposure assessment The acceptability of the calculated Margin of Exposure shall be determined by the uncertainty assigned to the identified NOAEL or NESIL using current methodology described by WHO 2008 or other authoritative body If this is not possible because the
267. o the filter s inlet and outlet and for testing the turbidity reduction of an alternate sand type media the media shall be installed in a 24 in 624 mm diameter filter with a maximum bed depth of 10 in 254 mm A tank with 630 gal 2 385 L of challenge water shall be prepared for the test A manufacturer may have media tested in a larger filter with a correspondingly larger volume of challenge water If the media is tested in a filter larger than 24 in 624 mm the media approval shall be limited to the test filter size or larger B 5 3 Challenge water swimming pool spa hot tub filters water temperature 75 10 F 24 6 C turbidity prior to adding silica lt 2 NTU turbidity after adding silica 140 45 10 NTU B 5 4 Turbidity reduction test method a Determine the volume of water needed to achieve a turnover rate of no greater than 30 min when the filter is operated at the design flow rate Fill the test tank with the required volume of water b Sample the water in the tank and determine the turbidity level TB1 in NTU Add a sufficient quantity of silica 140 to obtain a turbidity level TB2 of 45 10 NTU 25 possible resource for U S Silica Model Sil co Sil 106 U S Silica Co P O Box 187 Berkeley Springs WV 25411 B4 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 c Install and condition the filter according to the manufacturer s instructions Operate the filter at the design flow rate d
268. ody parts As the permeability constant provides estimates of an internal dose following dermal exposure the oral toxicity acceptance criteria identified under section A 6 rather than dermal specific acceptance criteria may be used to assess the risks of adverse systemic effects from the dermal exposure route A 5 2 1 Short term swimming pool dermal exposures The following equation is taken from U S EPA SWIMODEL 2003a and shall be used to estimate short term dermal doses when the critical adverse effect for the chemical being assessed is a systemic effect PDD CwxKpxSAx ET x CF BW Where PDD Potential daily dose mg kg day Cw Chemical concentration in pool water mg L Kp Permeability constant see equation below ET Exposure time hrs day CF Conversion factor 0 001 Lem BW Body weight kg Kp 1 gl 2 72 0 71 x log Kow 0 0061 x MW Where Kp Permeability constant cm hr Kow Octanol water coefficient MW Molecular weight Cw Chemical concentration in pool water mg L is chemical specific and based on label rates Kp Permeability constant cm hr is chemical specific and can be estimated based on a above equation for organic chemicals provided by U S EPA s Dermal Exposure Assessment Principles and Applications U S EPA 1992 The default Kp value for inorganic chemicals is 1 E 3 cm hr U S EPA 1992 R7 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Table R1 Assumptions for short term swimming po
269. oint Committee When the APHA code is changed Annex K will be revised to be consistent with the code K1 This page is intentionally left blank 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 Annex L informative Diatomite type filters recommendations for installation and operation This is not a basic part of the standard nor the responsibility of the manufacturer To obtain proper results the following limitations should be considered in overall hydraulic design of the pool spa or hot tub Diatomite type filters fabricated according to this Standard are designed to perform satisfactorily when installed and connected according to the manufacturer s recommendations Installation and operation should comply with the applicable state and local laws and regulations L 1 Recommended installation L 1 1 Turnover Turnover will vary depending on classification of pool spa or hot tub bathing load and use in the following ranges heavily used public pools not more than 6 h other public pools not more than 8 h residential pools not more than 12h public spas or hot tubs not more than 30 min and residential spas or hot tubs not more than 1 h L 1 2 Pumps L 1 2 1 Pressure filters Pumps should be selected to meet design flow and backwash rates under use conditions Sufficient reserve head should be provided to overcome friction losses in piping and appurtenances through which water flows after discharg
270. ol dermal exposure and dose estimate Age Adult 11 to lt 16 years 6 to lt 11 years Type of Swimmer Comp Non Comp Non Comp Non Comp Comp Comp ET hr day 3 dc 2 1 E de SA cm 18 200 15 700 10 500 BW kg 70 EEN 29 ET Competitive Swimmers The exposure times for competitive swimmers are based on the ACC s swimmer sur vey ACC 2002 ET Non Competitive Swimmers The exposure times for non competitive and or recreational swimmers are based on NHAPs 90 percentile exposure durations U S EPA 1996a SA Adult The body surface area exposed to pool water is 18 200 cm which represents the entire body including the head This value is the mean of the 50 percentile values for males and females listed in Tables 6 2 and 6 3 of the Exposure Factors Handbook U S EPA 1997 d SA Child The body surface areas exposed to pool water is10 500 cm for children age 6 to lt 11 years and 15 700 cm for children age 11 to lt 16 years based on the Child Specific Exposure Factors Hand Book Table 7 7 U S EPA 2008 BW Adult The average body weight of adult males and females is 70 kg which is the average of the median male and female body weights U S EPA 1997 f BW Child The body weight is 54 kg for children age 11 to lt 16 years and 29 kg for children age 6 to lt 11 years based upon Tables 8 4 and 8 5 of the Child Specific Exposure Factors Handbook
271. om tread serves as a bench the bottom riser may be a maximum of 14 in 35 56 cm above the spa floor 20 4 4 3 If the spa rim is designed by the manufacturer for use as a step a handrail shall be recommended by the manufacturer for installation by the installer The handrail shall not be readily removable 20 4 4 4 When provided or recommended by the manufacturer handholds shall be made of corrosion resistance materials such as polymeric materials or metal such as SS304 or better 20 4 4 5 When provided or recommended by the manufacturer handholds shall be made of corrosion resistant materials such as polymeric materials or metal such as SS304 or better The handhold shall not be positioned higher than 9 in 23 cm above the operating water level NOTE Manufacturers need to consult with the local regulatory authority having jurisdiction regarding access steps handholds and handrail requirements for compliance requirements 66 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 20 4 5 Barriers and layers of protection Safety barriers and layers of protection may help reduce certain risks when installed on a spa system Examples of layers of protection include use of barriers to entry such as fences pool and spa covers and alerts to entry such as alarm devices 20 4 5 1 If provided or recommended barriers shall comply with one of the following fences ASTM F1908 F2286 door walls with alarms ANSI UL 2017 gates with alarms ANS
272. ommended dose rate shall be de termined As an initial toxicity screening evaluation any chemical constituent or contaminant in the product formulation that has a maximum concentration in the swimming pool water of 10 ug L at the maximum recommended dose does not require further toxicology evaluation however this Threshold of Evaluation concentration of 10 ug L shall not apply to any substance for which available toxicity data and sound scientific judgment indicate that the potential for any adverse health effect is significant at a swim ming pool water concentration of lt 10 ug L All chemical constituents or contaminants that exceed the 10 ug L threshold at or below the maximum recommended dose require toxicology evaluation as described in this Annex R R4 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 R 4 2 Determination of swimming pool water concentrations Utilizing the formulation information and maximum dose rate provided under section R 3 1 the maximum residual concentration of each chemical constituent or contaminant in the product may be calculated as follows mg constituent X mg product mg constituent mg product L pool water L pool water formulation maximum dose rate maximum pool water concentration NOTE Unit conversions may be required in order to convert the provided maximum dose rate into mg product L pool water value The maximum pool water concentration of each chemical constituent or contaminant in the produc
273. on time if not designed for continuous operation and level of disinfection efficacy Information shall be provided to the user concerning the potential for off gassing of ozone and required ozone removal devices if applicable 13 23 Data plate Data plate s shall be permanent easy to read and securely attached cast or stamped onto the unit at a location readily accessible after normal installation Data plate s shall contain the following manufacturer s name and contact information address phone number website or prime supplier model number serial number or date of manufacture certification mark of the ANSI Accredited testing and certification organization electrical requirements volts amps hetz for operation type of feed gas rated feed gas flow rate SCFH and or LPM rated ozone production grams hour and or b day method of cooling and coolant flow rates level of disinfection certification Level 1 or Level 2 maximum daily operation time if not designed for continuous operation and caution statements prominently displayed including a statement that the unit is designed for supplemental disinfection and should be used with registered or approved disinfection chemicals to impart required residual concentrations 46 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 14 Ultraviolet UV light process equipment 14 1 General UV light process equipment covered by this section is intended for use in sup
274. on to the aforementioned Therefore the JC chair will be presenting an issue paper for consideration by the JC Committee regarding a language change to the standard 37 The information contained in this Annex is not part of this American National Standard ANS and has not been processed in accordance with ANSI s requirements for an ANS Therefore this Annex may contain material that has not been subjected to public review or a consensus process In addition it does not contain requirements necessary for conformance to the Standard Standarde The following standards established and adopted by NSF as minimum voluntary consensus standards are used internationally Food equipment 3 Commercial warewashing equipment 4 Commercial cooking rethermalization and powered hot food holding and transport equipment 5 Water heaters hot water supply boilers and heat recovery equipment 6 Dispensing freezers 7 Commercial refrigerators and freezers 8 Commercial powered food preparation equipment 12 Automatic ice making equipment 13 Refuse processors and processing systems 14 Plastics piping system components and related materials 18 Manual food and beverage dispensing equipment 20 Commercial bulk milk dispensing equipment 21 Thermoplastic refuse containers 24 Plumbing system components for recreational vehicles 25 Vending machines for food and beverages 29 Detergent and chemical feeders for commercial spray type dishwashing machines 3
275. onduit 2 49 freeboard Clear vertical distance in a sand type filter between top of filter media and lowest outlet of upper distribution system 2 50 free bromine Bromine that has not combined with ammonia nitrogen or other organic compounds 2 51 free chlorine Chlorine that has not combined with ammonia nitrogen or other organic compounds 2 52 friction loss Pressure drop expressed in feet meters of water or psi kPa caused by liquid flowing through the piping and fittings Friction loss tables may be used to estimate the actual friction loss in a system 2 53 head loss Total pressure drop in psi kPa or feet meters of water head between inlet and outlet of a component 2 54 high permeability element Mechanically interlocked nonwoven filter material designed to remove suspended solids 2 55 high rate Design filtration rate greater than 5 gal min ft 203 L min m for public and residential pools spas or hot tubs 2 56 hydrogen peroxide A compound consisting of two atoms of hydrogen and two atoms of oxygen H202 usually supplied in an aqueous solution 2 57 indoor use A product that is not designed tested or certified for use outside or to be exposed to the elements and weather 2 58 influent The water stream entering a unit system or process 2 59 integral Part of the device that cannot be removed without compromising the device s function or destroying the physical integrity of the unit 2
276. onform to 3 2 5 1 8 5 1 9 5 3 5 and 12 3 when tested in a representative sand type filter in accordance with Annex B sections B 3 B 4 and B 5 12 2 3 1 The manufacturer of sand and an alternate sand type filter media shall specify the particle size and uniformity coefficient for the media Particle size and uniformity coefficient shall be confirmed in accordance with ASTM C136 with sieves conforming to ASTM E11 12 2 3 2 The filtration rate and backwash rate for sand and alternate sand type filter media shall be as specified in 5 3 9 12 2 4 Installation and operating instructions The manufacturer of sand and alternate sand type media shall provide written instructions for the installation of the media in a filter including requirements for a different support media for any specific preparation of the media for operation and for the operation of filter with the media 12 2 5 Sand and alternate sand type media labeling requirements Sand and alternate sand type filter media shall contain the following information on the product packaging or documentation shipped with the product 40 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 manufacturers name and contact information address phone number website or prime supplier product identification product type and tradename net weight or net volume when applicable mesh or sieve size lot number or other production identifier such as a date code when appropriat
277. ons between 0 and 10 ppm available chlorine For example diluting the stock to 1 5 1 2 and 4 5 would provide the approximate concentrations of 2 ppm 5 ppm and 8 ppm these dilutions along with the stock solution would give four solutions in the required concentration range Using the spectrophotometer measure the available chlorine level for each sodium hypochlorite solution For bromine volumetrically dilute the stock bromine solution by the appropriate proportions to give four solutions between O and 20 ppm available chlorine For example diluting the 20 ppm stock to 1 10 1 4 and 1 2 would provide the approximate N3 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 concentrations of 2 ppm 5 ppm and 10 ppm these dilutions along with the stock solution would give four solutions in the required concentration range Using the analytical method referenced above measure the available bromine level for each solution e Place the sensor or influent tube of the controller in the mid range sample nominal value 5 ppm for chlorine 10 ppm for bromine Calibrate the automated controller so that the display registers the same reading as the analytical method from step d Place the sensor in each of the four solutions and record the readout of the sensor by starting with the lowest concentration solution and working up to the highest concentration rinsing the sensor between each reading N 2 3 2 2 Controller output accuracy a Using sodium hypochlorite a
278. onstituents or contaminants with concentrations in the swimming pool water that exceed 10 ug L at or below the maximum recom mended dose the following approaches may be utilized to determine the acceptability of the calculated exposure A determination shall be made as to whether a published publicly available in printed or electronic for mat and peer reviewed quantitative risk assessment for the chronic exposure to the substance is availa ble When a quantitative risk assessment is available the assessment and its corresponding reference dose shall be reviewed for their appropriateness in evaluating the human health risk of the swimming pool treatment chemical constituent or contaminant R1 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 As an alternative approach the Total Allowable Concentration TAC values as reported in NSF ANSI Standard 60 2013 and NSF ANSI Standard 61 2013 may be utilized if available for the specific chemi cal constituent or contaminant by converting the TAC value into a mg kg day rate by utilizing default body weight and drinking water consumption assumptions 70 kg and 2 L respectively The resulting mg kg day rate may be compared with the estimated exposure at the maximum recommended dose to determine acceptability If a TAC value or other published risk assessment value is unavailable a risk assessment for the specific chemical constituent or contaminant may be conducted in accordance with the procedures outli
279. oor installations should have adequate ventilation Q 10 Water replacement Water replacement in spas that have high bather use requires partial or complete replacement of water periodically Water replacement is necessary to dilute dissolved solids to maintain water clarity and to do necessary routine maintenance Adhere to your local regulations for frequency of water replacement Q 11 Oxidative reduction potential ORP Oxidation reduction potential ORP is a more qualitative measure of sanitizer activity in water of swimming pools and spas than free chlorine However ORP is not considered in some state pool codes Below are 4 citations to help operators maintain spa pool waters Germany The German guideline used for pool spa operation requires an ORP level of 750 mV millivolts as the minimum standard for public pools 1982 and spas 1984 MAHC In the 2014 Model Aquatic Health Code the following minimum and maximums are given as it relates to ozone system use 4 7 3 3 4 6 2 Minimum ORP Reading DWQ the minimum ORP reading shall be no less than 600 mV measured directly after 1 to 5 feet the ozone side stream remixes into the full flow of the RECIRCULATION System 4 7 3 3 4 6 3 Maximum ORP Reading DWQ the maximum ORP reading shall be no greater than 900 mV Q6 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 WHO In the 2006 World Health Organization book Guidelines fro safe recreational water environments volume 2 Swimming Pools an
280. operating temperature of 102 5 F 39 3 C and a minimum rated pressure of 50 psig 345 kPa 15 10 Operational protection Systems shall have an automatic mechanism for shutting off the electric power to the electrolytic cell whenever one or more of the following conditions exist loss of electric power to the recirculation pump or interruption of water flow through the electrolytic cell 15 11 1 Warning devices A visual and or audible alarm shall be provided to warn the user when the cell voltages are not within the 52 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 manufacturer s recommended range or when the salt concentration falls below the manufacturer s recommended minimum level 15 12 Chemical resistant materials Equipment parts shall incorporate materials that are resistant to the environment to which the parts will be subjected 15 13 Output rate 15 13 1 The output rate shall be adjustable in at least four increments over the full operating range Means for regulating shall be conveniently located when mounted according to the manufacturer s instructions 15 13 2 Delivery Units shall deliver chemicals at an output rate shown by the feed rate indicator 10 of the setting over deliveries from 25 to 100 rated capacity 15 14 Pressure requirements Units shall meet a hydrostatic pressure of 1 5 times the manufacturer s maximum pressure rating applied to all parts of the feeder subject to pressure during operation
281. operation 5 3 5 5 The filter bed of a pressure service filter shall not break down or channel when subjected to a pressure differential of 15 psi 103 kPa or the maximum recommended by the manufacturer whichever is 21 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 greater The filter bed of a vacuum service filter shall not break down or channel when subjected to a pressure differential of 16 in Hg 54 kPa or the maximum recommended by the manufacturer whichever is greater 5 3 6 Installation and operating instructions 5 3 6 1 The manufacturer shall provide a manual with each filter The manual shall include operating instructions installation instructions cleaning instructions design head loss curve and parts lists and any drawings or charts necessary to permit proper installation operation and maintenance 5 3 6 2 The manufacturer of an alternate sand type media shall provide written instructions for the installation of the media in a filter including requirements for a different support media for any specific preparation of the media for operation and for the operation of filter with the alternate sand type media 5 3 7 Data plate 5 3 7 1 sand type filter shall have a data plate that is permanent easy to read and securely attached to the filter tank at a readily accessible location The data plate shall contain the following information manufacturers name and contact information address phone number website or prime
282. or the duration of the shelf life After the shelf life time has elapsed open turn on etc and conduct testing with the product for the appropriate product types or parameters If product does not comply the manufacturer shall revise shelf life claims storage conditions etc as appropriate 016 2015 NSF Table 0 1 pH Testing Chart NSF ANSI 50 2015 pH Hydrochloric Total Alkalinity DI water mL Calcium CaCl Magnesium ee Temperature C acid sodium hy Sodium Bicar ppm MgCl2 ppm NaOCl ppm droxide bonate NaHCO HCI NaOH ppm 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 6 8 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 7 0 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 7 8 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 7 5 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 7 8 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 8 0 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 27 1 8 4 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 39 1 6 8 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 39 1 7 0 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 39 1 7 8 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 39 1 7 5 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 39 1 7 8 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 39 1 8 0 0 1 100 10 1000 220 30 80 10 2 0 0 2 39 1 8 4 0 1 100 10 NOTE 1 pH 8 4 is the upper limit of phenol re
283. organisms if applicable gt This product is designed for supplementary disinfection and is intended for use with appropriate residual levels of EPA registered disinfecting chemicals Specific residual levels of EPA registered disinfecting chemicals may be required by the regulatory agency having authority 149 Valve and component identification All valves and performance indication devices shall have a permanent easily legible and conspicuous label or tag identifying their operation 14 10 Operating temperatures The unit and all its components shall be designed to withstand a maximum operating temperature of 102 5 F 39 3 C 14 11 Operational protection Units shall be equipped with an automatic mechanism for shutting off the power to the UV light source whenever the cover is removed 14 12 Life Test When tested in accordance with the life test described in Annex a minimum of 8000 operating hours shall be accumulated among the three units no less than 3000 operating hours shall be accumulated on one of the three units At the conclusion of the testing the unit with 3000 operating hours shall be evaluated to the output pressure and disinfection efficacy requirements of this section Life testing shall be conducted within the operating temperatures of its intended end use swimming pool 75 10 F 24 6 C or spas and hot tubs 65 to 104 F 18 to 40 C Life testing is not required on UV units being tested for cryptospo
284. ormation and shall operate in accordance with 18 5 1 N 2 Performance N 2 1 Purpose The purpose of this annex is to determine if the automated controller responds with output signals that accurately correspond with the applicable input signals under normal operating conditions N 2 2 Test Water swimming 75 10 F water pools 24 6 C temperature 10245 F hot tubs spas 39 3 C N 2 3 Methods Prior to performing the described methods the automated controller shall be installed and prepared for operation according to the manufacturer s instructions The controller shall be tested to each method with four sensors Controllers without replaceable sensors like colorimetric analyzers shall have each test repeated four times N 2 3 1 pH N 2 3 1 1 Monitor display accuracy a Fill an appropriately sized container with the test water at the required temperature Annex N section N 2 2 b Calibrate a laboratory pH meter equipped with a pH electrode according to manufacturer s instructions using appropriate buffer solutions pH 7 and pH 10 c Attach the sensor under test to the automated controller d Place the laboratory pH electrode and the sensor attached to the automated controller or controller influent tube into the test water solution stir on a stir plate e Add 1 N sulfuric acid to lower the pH or 1 N sodium hydroxide to raise the pH as required to bring the test water solution
285. ormly distribute the backwash water 2 98 sand type filter upper distribution system influent Devices to distribute water entering a sand type filter to prevent movement or migration of the filter media This system also collects water during filter backwashing unless other means are provided 2 99 sealed Fabricated without openings to prevent entry of liquid 2 100 self contained spa hot tub swim spa therapy spa resistant system A factory built spa in which all control water heating and water circulating equipment is an integral part of the product Self contained spas may be permanently wired or cord connected 2 101 self priming centrifugal pump Pump after initial filling with water capable of priming and repriming a dry suction line up to 10 ft 3 m vertical lift without using foot or check valves or adding water 2 102 septum Part of a diatomite type filter element consisting of cloth wire screen or other porous material on which filter aid is deposited 2 103 service factor amps The current in amperes under the service factor horsepower at rated volts 2 104 service factor horsepower The motor data plate horsepower multiplied by the data plate service factor 2 105 set point The user established target level of a parameter pH ORP etc to be maintained by an automated controller 2 106 skid pack A separate collection of components that are not an integral part f a pool spa or hot tub such as but not limi
286. other valid biochemical tests H 1 5 2 Preparation of test challenge a From the stock cultures inoculate a tube of Tryptic Soy Broth TSB for P aeruginosa and a tube of Brain Heart Infusion Broth for E faecium b Inoculate the entire surface of ten fresh Tryptic Soy agar TSA slants with 1 mL of P aeruginosa broth culture Inoculate twenty Brain Heart Infusion BHI agar slants with 1 mL of E faecium Incubate 24 2 h at 95 2 F 35 2 C the day before testing c Suspend the growth from the agar slant of P aeruginosa and E faecium by adding 5 mL of sterile buffered distilled or deionized water SBDW and gently scraping using a sterile loop d Maintain the bacteria suspensions at 32 to 41 F 1 to 5 C no longer than 24 h before use e Perform standard plate count to determine cell density The standard plate count shall be performed within 1 h of use Both bacterial suspensions should be approximately 1 0 x 10 colony forming units CFU per mL H 1 5 3 Analyzing of samples obtained during testing Samples shall be analyzed in accordance with APHA Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater H 1 6 Evaluation H 1 6 1 Test apparatus a Calculate the water volume sufficient to provide at least five turnovers in 30 min through the unit under test If the unit under test does not turn the water over then use a volume that can be disinfected in 30 min based on the manufacturer s recommendation min
287. ow through feeder and its integral components shall not rupture leak burst or sustain permanent deformation G 3 Uniformity of output test G 3 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to determine the amount of chemical delivered by a flow through chemical feeder in order to verify the delivery rates claimed by the manufacturer G 3 2 Apparatus G2 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 pH indicating device accurate to 0 1 temperature indicating device accurate to 2 F 1 C tank with a supply pump titration device accurate to 1 of reading if none is commercially available with this accuracy the method inaccuracy shall be included in the tolerance of the output rate timing device accurate to 1 over test duration and flow meter accurate to 2 G 3 3 Test waters swimming pools 80 3 F 27 2 C spas 102 5 F 39 3 C Ca Na Li hypochlorites pH 7 2 7 6 ISOs pH 7 2 7 Ca Na Li hypochlorites 60 100 ppm CaCO3 ISOs 80 120 ppm CaCOs hardness pools spas 200 400 ppm CaCO3 combined chlorine pools spas lt 0 2 ppm ammonia pools spas lt 0 04 ppm as N temperature pH pools spas alkalinity pools spas G 3 4 Uniformity of output test method for feeder settings resulting in more than 5 0 Ibs d 2 27 kg d output G 3 4 1 Method NOTE The method described here is primarily intended for the testing of basic erosion type flow through chemi
288. oxide should be used only with PHMB sanitizers Hydrogen peroxide should not be used as an oxidizer for spas sanitized by chlorine or bromine Q 6 Remedial practices 1 Super chlorination Follow label directions Use a registered chlorine sanitizer Do not enter spa until water meets the prescribed values in section A Do not super chlorinate a spa treated by PHMB Some symptoms that may include a need for super chlorination are cloudy water slime formation Q4 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 high combined chlorine readings musty odors difficulty in maintaining sanitizer residuals algae and or high bacteria counts 2 Super chlorination To establish breakpoint dose in ppm at least 10 times combined chlorine level High dosage may be required to satisfy chlorine demand If combined chlorine persists water replacement should be considered If spa is treated with PHMB do not super chlorinate to establish breakpoint 3 Shock treatment ppm Some conditions that may indicate a need for shock treatment are cloudy water difficulty maintaining sanitizer residual periods after heavy bather use adverse weather and fecal accidents Non chlorine shocks are not sanitizers They are effective in oxidizing organic contaminants If the purpose of shock treatment is to treat bacteria or visible algae an EPA registered product for that use should be used follow label directions Spas should be shock
289. pa gov ncea bmds documentation BMDS240_manual pdf gt WHO World Health Organization 2008 Skin sensitization in chemical risk assessment Harmonization Project Document No 5 International Programme on Chemical Safety IPCS WHO Geneva Switzerland Available at lt http www inchem org documents harmproj harmpoj5 pdf gt R24 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Table R7 Quantitative risk assessment data requirements Required studies bacterial reverse mutation assay performed with and without exogenous metabolic activation using Salmonella typhimurium preferred strains are TA97 TA98 TA100 TA102 TA1535 and TA1537 or Escherichia coli preferred strains are WP2 uvrA or WP2 uvrA pKM101 chromosomal aberration assay in metaphase analysis in mammalian cells and without exogenous metabol vitro preferred ic activation in vivo metaphase analysis or micronucleus assay in mammalian species subchronic toxicity 90 d assay in rodent species by oral route of exposure Additional studies required as indicated reproduction assay two generation reproductive assay in a rodent species developmental assay e study two species one rodent and one non rodent are pre chronic study 2 yr bioassay in rodent species by oral route of exposure Supplemental studies mouse lymphoma SCE UDS HGPRT DNA binding post labeling assay gene mutation assay supplemental genotoxicity studies bioaccumulation potential ab
290. pas and hot tubs 20 1 General This section contains public health and performance requirements for public spas This section addresses manufactured self contained portable non portable and pre fabricated spas and hot tubs including requirements for the materials design and construction and performance of spa components This section does not establish requirements for the installation of spas or spa components 20 2 Materials Spa materials contacting spa water shall meet the health effects and corrosion resistance requirements of 3 of this Standard 20 2 1 Rigid plastic piping shall meet the requirements of NSF ANSI 14 20 2 2 Flexible reinforced helical or fabric plastic spa hose shall meet the requirements of this Standard and IAPMO PS 33 20 2 3 Flexible non reinforced plastic spa hose shall meet the requirements of 3 and Annex A of this Standard 20 2 4 Fittings shall meet the requirements of 3 and Annex A of this Standard or NSF ANSI 14 64 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 20 3 Electrical components All relevant electrical components shall meet the requirements of ANSI UL 1563 or other electrical standard as specified in this section 20 4 Design and construction 20 4 1 General Spas shall be designed and constructed to prevent the accumulation of dirt and debris and to facilitate inspection maintenance servicing and clearing of the spa shell and circulation equipment There shall be no protrusions extensions
291. peration and a warning if the potential exists for release of high dosages of substances that may endanger bathers 17 6 2 Caution statements shall be prominently displayed in the operation and installation instructions advising the user of the following materials not compatible with the system the potential of staining of pool materials if the system is not operated properly statement that the unit is designed for supplemental treatment and intended for use with registered or approved disinfection chemicals to impart required residual concentrations a description of the test method available through the manufacturer to measure the silver concentrations in the water the recommended pH range the electrode part number and caution statements that include the possibility of staining and the measures needed to avoid its occurrence 17 7 Data plate Data plate shall be permanent easy to read and securely attached cast or stamped onto the unit at a location readily accessible after normal installation Data plate s shall contain at least the following equipment name 57 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 manufacturer s name and contact information address phone number website or prime supplier model number electrical requirements volts amps and Hertz if applicable serial number and or date of manufacture caution statements referring user to oper
292. ple 2 960 h sample 3 1440 h sample 4 1920 h sample 5 2500 h sample 6 F2 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 F 2 4 2 Dry chemical feeders Follow the methods outlined in Annex F section F 2 4 1 using the applicable dry chemical Perform the test at atmospheric pressure F 2 5 Acceptance criteria The maximum output rate as measured in samples 1 through 6 shall be within 20 of the manufacturer s maximum output rate F 3 Chemical resistance F 3 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to determine whether mechanical chemical feeder components that are exposed to the maximum in use concentrations of the applicable chemical s will erode or sustain structural deformation Following chemical exposure the accuracy of the feed rate indicator is determined F 3 2 Test solutions swimming pools tottus spas _ water temperature 75 10 F 24 6 C 102 5 F 39 3 C the maximum in use concentration of the manufacturer s recommended chemical s the maximum in use concentration of the manufacturer s recommended chemical s test chemical All feeders except those labeled to be for swimming pools only shall be tested at the spa hot tub water temperature The test temperature may be obtained by heating or cooling the test water solution or by heating or cooling the ambient temperature around the chemical feeding equipment F 3 3 Method a Seal the inlet and discharge ends of the mechanical che
293. plemental treatment of circulation systems of public and residential swimming pools and spas hot tubs Since these products are not intended to produce residual levels of disinfectant within the body of the swimming pool or spa these products are intended for use with appropriate residual levels of EPA registered disinfecting chemicals Specific residual levels of EPA registered disinfecting chemicals may be required by the regulatory agency having authority The residual chemical shall be easily and accurately measureable by a field test kit 14 2 Cleanability Parts of process equipment requiring cleaning and maintenance shall be accessible 143 Design pressure pressure vessels Units and components of process equipment that are subjected to pressure shall meet a working pressure of 50 psi 33 kPa or be equipped with a pressure reducing valve set at the manufacturer s working pressure 14 4 Flow meter If the performance of a unit is dependent on a specified flow rate a means to monitor and control the flow shall be provided 145 Performance indication The process equipment shall be provided with an effective means to alert the user when a component of this equipment is not operating 14 6 Operation and installation instructions 14 6 1 Drawings and a parts list for easy identification and ordering of replacement parts shall be furnished with each unit and shall include model number of the unit instructions for proper size
294. r conditions shall be conducted due to specific water chemistry parameters and product related variables having an impact on results NOTE These specifications only apply to parameters that are not being varied for test purposes Standard Method for Parameter Suggested Value Adjustment Method Verification Alkalinity 80 120 ppm as CaCO NaHCO 3 2320B Calcium hardness 200 250 ppm as CaCO CaCl 2H20 2340B or 2340C TDS 1000 1500 ppm NaCl 2540C Acids or bases typically pH a used in the industry Fe O7 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 0 1 1 4 Accuracy At each parameter tested the average of the WQTD analyses at both temperatures shall meet the accuracy requirement in Annex O section O 12 based on the level of the WQTD 0 1 1 5 Repeatability At each parameter tested the average variance in the results for each unit of a WQTD shall meet the repeatability requirements of Annex O section 0 13 based on the level of the WQTD 0 1 1 6 Reproducibility At each parameter tested the average result for each unit tested shall be calculated The difference between the average results shall meet the reproducibility requirements of Annex O section 0 13 based on the level of the WQTD 0 1 1 7 Laboratory test equipment For each parameter to be controlled in the test solution s verification of each parameter shall be per formed using test equipment that is calibrated and or verified ac
295. r gravity dispersal onsite wastewater treatment and dispersal systems 245 Wastewater treatment systems nitrogen reduction 305 Personal care products containing organic ingredients 321 Goldenseal root Hydrasitis canadensis 330 Glossary of drinking water treatment unit terminology 332 Sustainability assessment for resilient floor coverings 336 Sustainability assessment for commercial furnishings fabric 342 Sustainability assessment for wallcovering products 347 Sustainability assessment for single ply roofing membranes 350 Onsite residential and commercial water reuse treatment systems 350 1 Onsite residential and commercial graywater treatment systems for subsurface discharge 355 Greener chemicals and processes information 358 1 Polyethylene pipe and fittings for water based ground source geothermal heat pump systems 358 2 Polypropylene pipe and fittings for water based ground source geothermal heat pump systems 359 Valves for crosslinked polyethylene PEX water distribution tubing systems 360 Wastewater treatment systems Field performance verification 363 Good manufacturing practices GMP for Pharmaceutical Excipients 372 Drinking water treatment system components Lead content 401 Drinking water treatment units Emerging compounds incidential contaminants 416 Sustainability Assessment for Wter Treatment Chemical Products 418 Residential wastewater effluent filters longevity testing 419 Public Drinking Wa
296. r to the residual disinfectant injection point J 6 4 Residual disinfection Ozone is a very efficient oxidizing agent However it is very difficult to maintain a measurable ozone residual in the pool water It is recommended that a chemical such as chlorine or bromine be added after treatment with ozone as a residual disinfectant at levels mandated by state and local regulations The oxidizing of organics by ozone prior to application of the residual disinfectant helps prevent the formation of undesirable halogenated byproducts There are ozone removal methods that may be considered prior to the addition of the chemical disinfectant degassing by means of aerated flow and granular activated carbon filter Ozone process equipment should be placed upstream of the ozone removal methods cited above Halogenation equipment should be placed downstream of ozone removal methods J 6 5 Off gassing Ozone is considered toxic above certain concentrations in air If the ozone concentration in the water exceeds the equilibrium state the excess ozone will be emitted into the air The Occupational Safety and Health Administration has set a short term exposure limit of 0 3 ppm 0 6 mg m and 0 1 ppm 0 2 mg m time weighted average over 8 h d 5 d week When the equipment is located in an enclosed room consideration should be given to having adequate exhaust in case of ozone releases The exhaust system should provide a minimum of three air c
297. ral exposure and dose estimate Age Adult 11 to lt 16 years 6 to lt 11 years Type of Swimmer Non Non Non Comp Comp Comp Comp Comp Comp IgR L hr 0 0125 0 025 0 025 0 05 0 05 0 05 ET hr day on TE 2 E 1 1 BW kg 70 54 29 IgR The ingestion rates are based on the values used in EPA s Residential SOPs U S EPA 2000 and an EPA pilot study as discussed in ACC s swimmer survey ACC 2002 P ET Competitive Swimmers The exposure times for competitive swimmers are based on the ACC s swimmer sur vey ACC 2002 ET Non Competitive Swimmers The exposure times for non competitive and or recreational swimmers are based on NHAPs 90 percentile exposure durations U S EPA 1996a BW Adult The average body weight of adult males and females is 70 kg which is the average of the median male and female body weights U S EPA 1997 BW Child The body weight is 54 kg for children age 11 to lt 16 years and 29 kg for children age 6 to lt 11 years based upon Tables 8 4 and 8 5 of the Child Specific Exposure Factors Handbook U S EPA 2008 These values are the average of the 50 percentile body weights for males and females R 5 4 2 Long term swimming pool oral exposures The following equation is taken from U S EPA SWIMODEL software 2003a and shall be used to calcu late post application long term oral exposures ADD CwxIRxETxEF BW x
298. ration measured by the appropriate analytical method used shall not exceed the tolerance level given in Table 17 1 N 2 5 1 3 ORP At each concentration none of the sensor display combinations shall deviate by more than 10 of the average of the four readings at that set point N5 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 N 2 5 2 Controller output accuracy For each of the applicable parameters tested under Annex N section N 2 3 the automated controller shall respond with output signals that accurately correspond with the varying input signals within the appropriate tolerance levels given in Table 18 1 N 2 5 3 Life test At the end of the test the resistive load should still be actuated on and off by the automated controller At least one of the automated controllers should complete 110 000 cycles and a minimum of 295 000 cycles shall be accumulated between the three automated controllers N6 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Annex O normative OI Test method for Water Quality Testing Devices WQTD 0 1 1 Purpose This annex gives instruction for the testing of test strips color comparator titration and electronic WQTD commercially available for determining water chemistry in swimming pools and spas In general synthetic pool water of specific characteristics Alkalinity pH Calcium Hardness and TDS is prepared using DI water and reagent grade chemicals Any of the above parameters or additional parameters such as chlorine
299. rculation water downstream of the ozone side stream loop and before the halogen feed location Minimum ORP reading should b 650 mV and maximum should be 900 mV J 6 7 4 The ozone generation system should be installed after the filtration and before halogen chemical dosing J 6 7 5 Ozone should be applied as a side stream to the pool s main recirculation flow For proper sizing determine the side stream flow F and dose D according to the Table J 1 for each pool type Higher doses may be applied Table J 1 Pool type Temperature Flow F Dose D recreation lap 78 85 F 78 85 F pool vol gal 1 440 min 1 6 ppm mg L 24 hr dose 26 29 C therapy swim school 78 85 F 86 94 F pool vol gal 720 min 1 6 ppm mg L 12 hr dose 30 34 C wading spray pad 78 85 F 80 88 F pool vol gal 240 min 1 6 ppm mg L 4 hr dose 27 31 C spa 78 85 F 94 104 F pool vol gal 120 min 1 6 ppm mg L 2 hr dose 34 40 C J5 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 Ozone efficacy is measured by the combination of applied ozone dose and retention time in the side stream CT Value Concentration X Time Retention time for all pool types is a minimum of one minute measured immediately at the injector outlet in the side stream inclusive of the volume of the degas tank volume of the sidestream plumbing and the volume of the mainstream plumbing just prior to the halogen fee
300. rding to the manufacturer s recommendations M 2 Operation and maintenance For maximum performance to be obtained from a sand type filter several factors should be monitored 33 The information contained in this Annex is not part of this American National Standard ANS and has not been processed in accordance with ANSI s requirements for an ANS Therefore this Annex may contain material that has not been subjected to public review or a consensus process In addition it does not contain requirements necessary for conformance to the Standard M1 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 M 2 1 Filtration rate The total output of sand type filters depends on the allowable filtration rate varying from 3 25 gal min ft 126 1050 L min m depending on use and design Too high a rate may shorten filtration run too low a rate may not give maximum use of the dirt holding capacity of filter media especially in high rate filters Optimum results may be obtained by using rates recommended by the manufacturer M 2 2 Filter aids The use of proper filter aids improves the efficiency of filtration The manufacturer s instructions should be followed carefully to gain maximum advantage of filter aids and pool spa or hot tub chemicals M 2 3 Routine cleaning Regular and thorough cleaning of the filter is necessary for maintenance of a pool spa or hot tub This should result in labor savings extended life of the equipment and water clarity The follow
301. rds containing oocysts shall be handled with gloves and the analyst technician shall never place gloves in or near the face after exposure to solutions known or suspected to contain oocysts Do not mouth pipette H 4 4 4 Laboratory personnel shall change gloves after handling filters and other equipment and reagents that may be contaminated Gloves shall be removed or changed before touching any other laboratory surfaces or equipment H 4 5 Apparatus See figure H2 in this annex H 4 6 Test waters The test water shall be balanced prior to the addition of challenge constituents and microorganisms The water shall have the following characteristics pH Pools spa 7 2 7 6 Alkalinity Pools spa 60 150 ppm CaCO3 Hardness Pools spa 200 400 ppm CaCO3 Temperature Pools spa 65 85 F 18 29 C Turbidity Pools spa lt 2 0 NTU Total free available chlorine Pools spa Non detect TDS Pools spa Per manufacturer s use instructions H 4 7 Analytical methods The analytical methods shall be those specified in Standard Methods H 4 8 Evaluation H 4 8 1 Test apparatus The required test apparatus is shown in figure H2 The pipe sizes in the main line of the apparatus shall be sized such that the water velocity is between 6 and 8 feet per second 1 8 and 2 4 meters per second The branch line piping for offline ozone systems shall be sized per the manufacturer s instructions
302. re Flow Ozone Generator Regulator Feed Gas Coolant In HA Ozonation live Cryptosporidium parvum oocysts reduction H 4 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to determine efficacy of an ozone generation system designed for secondary disinfection for swimming pools and spa hot tubs The ozone generation system shall reduce the number of live Cryptosporidium parvum oocysts from an influent challenge of at least 5 000 5 x 10 infectious oocysts per liter by at least 3 log 99 9 or greater H 4 2 Equipment mixer vortexer vacuum source incubator 99 F 37 C or slide warmer epifluorescence microscope with filters for fluorescein isothiocyanate FITC dye magnification 200x or 400x and 1000x pH meter plastic sample bottles 1 L slides glass microscope 1 in x 3 in cover slips 1 in 25 mm No 1 1 2 filters cellulose acetate 0 2 um pore size 1 in 25 mm diameter support filters ethanol compatible membrane any pore size 1 in 25 mm H11 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 fingernail polish clear latex gloves absorbent paper 1 L PFA polytetrafluorethylene PTFE separation funnel and well slide 0 47 in 12 mm diameter H 4 3 Reagents methanol phosphate buffered saline PBS a stock solution shall be prepared by dissolving 80 g sodium chloride NaCl 2 g potassium dihydrogen phosphate KH2PO 29 g hydrated
303. re through the filter and pressure measurement taps sized to the filter s inlet and outlet B 6 3 Challenge water fN swimming pool spa hot tub filters water temperature 75 10 F 24 6 C turbidity NI B 6 4 Precoat media type filters turbidity limits precoat operation test method a Install and condition the filter in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Establish a filtration rate of 2 gom ft 84 LPM m b Prepare a filter aid slurry as prescribed in the manufacturer s instructions Pour the slurry into the feed system reservoir B5 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 c Draw a sample from the filter influent line and determine the initial turbidity of the influent water d Open the slurry feed valve so as to introduce the filter aid slurry in a period of 10 s or less Close the feed valve so as not to introduce air into the suction line after the slurry has vacated the reservoir e Draw a sample from the filter effluent line at 15 s intervals for the first 1 min after closing the slurry feed valves for a total of four samples Measure the turbidity of each sample f Calculate the average turbidity of the four effluent samples Calculate the average turbidity contributed by the filter by subtracting the initial influent turbidity from the average turbidity of the four effluent samples B 6 5 Acceptance criteria The average turbidity contributed by the filter during the first 1 min of t
304. reduce water turbidity by 70 or more when tested in accordance with Annex B section B 5 5 2 Pre coat media type filters The requirements in this subsection apply only to pre coat media type filters utilizing diatomite or other pre coat filter media that conforms to 12 and their integral components designed for the filtration of swimming pool or spa hot tub water 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 5 2 1 Filtration area 5 2 1 1 The actual filtration area shall be within 5 of the effective filtration area specified on the filter data plate 5 2 1 1 1 For leaf or disc type pre coat media type filters the effective filtration area is equal to the total surface area of all septa minus the combined area of all septum support members wider than 0 25 in 6 4 mm in contact with the septum during filtration 5 2 1 1 2 For tube type pre coat media type filters the effective filtration area is equal to the total surface area of the pre coat filter media coated tubes minus the combined area of all septum support members wider than 0 25 in 6 4 mm in contact with the septum during filtration The effective filtration area shall be no more than 1 5 times the total surface area of the uncoated tubes 5 2 1 2 For wirewound and similar type elements the width of septum support members shall not exceed 0 25 in 6 4 mm The distance between adjacent septum members and the distance between adjacent openings shall not exceed 0 005 in 0 127 mm 5 2
305. repared by Richard Reiss Sciences International Inc December 19 2002 Barnes D G Daston G P Evans J S Jarabek A M Kavlock R J Kimmel C A Park C and Spitzer H L 1995 Benchmark Dose Workshop Criteria for Use of a Benchmark Dose to Estimate a Reference Dose Regulatory Toxicology and Pharmacology 21 296 306 Dang W 1996 The Swimmer Exposure Assessment Model SWIMODEL and its use in estimating risks of chemical use in swimming pools EPA Internal Guidance Document Dourson M L 1994 Methods for establishing oral reference doses RfDs In Risk Assessment of Essential Elements W Mertz C O Abernathy and S S Olin editors 51 61 ILSI Press Washington D C Dourson M L Felter S P and Robinson D 1996 Evolution of science based uncertainty factors in non cancer risk assessment Regulatory Toxicology and Pharmacology 24 2 108 120 Dufour A P O Evans T D Behymer and R Cantu 2006 Water ingestion during swimming activities in a pool A piloot study Journal of Water and Health 4 4 425 430 European Food Safety Authority EFSA 2005 Opinion of the Scientific Committee on a request from EFSA related to a harmonised approach for risk assessment of substances which are both genotoxic and carcinogenic The EFSA Journal 282 1 31 R21 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 International Programme on Chemical Safety IPCS 1994 Environmental Health Criteria No 170 Assessing human hea
306. requirement Filter tanks designed constructed evaluated and stamped with the appropriate Code Symbol Stamp in accordance with the American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII or X shall be exempt from this requirement 5 1 2 Filter tanks vacuum service 5 1 2 1 The design collapse pressure of a vacuum service filter tank shall be at least 1 5 times the pressure developed by the weight of the water in the tank e minimum safety factor 1 5 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 5 1 2 2 Vacuum service filter tanks whose inlets may be closed during filter operation shall not rupture leak collapse or sustain permanent deformation when subjected to a vacuum of 25 in Hg 85 kPa for 300 s in accordance with Annex B section B 2 5 1 3 Internal components 5 1 3 1 Internal components of a pressure service filter shall not sustain damage or deformation that may affect water flow characteristics when the filter is operated in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions and when operated under the test conditions in Annex B 5 1 3 2 Internal components of a vacuum service filter shall not sustain damage or deformation that may affect water flow characteristics when the filter is operated in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions and when operated under the test conditions in Annex B 5 1 3 3 Filter element components of a filter designed for pressure backwashing shall not sustain damag
307. rer s delivery output data plate f Note the weight IN on the scale while starting the stopwatch Allow the mechanical feeder to operate for 1 h 6 min Note the weight W23 on the scale g Calculate the delivery as follows Delivery gpm IO W2 8 33 Time or see Annex F section F 5 4 g F 6 5 Acceptance criteria Positive displacement pump mechanical feeders operating with a suction lift of 4 ft 1 2 m of water at 80 back pressure and 100 of their rated capacity shall deliver an output rate that is within 10 of the delivery specified by the manufacturer F7 This page is intentionally left blank 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 G 1 G 1 1 Annex G normative Test methods for the evaluation of flow through chemical feeding equipment NOTE The test conditions specified in this annex are not intended to represent recommended field use conditions Chemical resistance test Purpose The purpose of this test is to determine whether flow through chemical feeder components that are exposed to the maximum in use concentration of the applicable chemical s will erode or display structural deformation G 1 2 Test solution The test solution shall consist of the manufacturer s recommended maximum in use concentration of the chemical s specified for use with the feeders G 1 3 G 1 4 G 1 5 Ambient temperature swimming pools hot tubs spas 75 5 F 24 8 C 102 5 F 39 3 C NOTE
308. rer s installation orientation and plumbing design 22 3 Operation and installation instructions The manufacturer shall provide written operation and installation instructions with each unit The 80 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 instructions shall include drawings charts and parts list necessary for the proper installation operation repair and maintenance of the heater and its associated components The operation and installation instruction shall contain the following information a heaters maximum flow rating LPM GPM shall be specified to mitigate erosion damage as directed by the manufacturer a heaters minimum flow rating LPM GPM shall be specified to prevent overheating or scale formation as directed by the manufacturer a warning that the heater equipment shall be installed in full compliance with the manufacturer s recommendations as well as the local regulatory and building code requirements for gas supply plumbing electrical connections air exchange and ventilation Corrosive chemicals should be stored away from the heater to minimize potential danger to the exterior of the heater a Warning that the heater equipment shall not be installed immediately after the injection point for low pH or acidic chemicals to minimize potential corrosive damage to the inside of the heater reference to recommended use chemicals maximum and minimum concentrations i e salt level total alkalinity calciu
309. rer s recommended procedures for the cleaning of filter media and to verify that the cleanability of an alternate sand type media is at least equivalent to that of sand B 4 2 Apparatus pressure recording device required accuracy is 0 5 of the smallest division used in the manufacturer s claimed pressure loss turbidimeter required accuracy from 0 to 10 NTU is 0 5 NTU required accuracy above 10 NTU is 5 of the reading or 1 NTU whichever is greater temperature indicating device required accuracy is 2 F 1 C B2 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 flowmeter required accuracy is 1 gpm 4 LPM or 2 of reading whichever is greater water tank and pump system capable of delivering water at the design flow rate and proper temperature through the filter and pressure measurement taps sized to the filter s inlet and outlet For testing of the cleanability of an alternate sand type media the media shall be installed in a 24 n 624 mm diameter sand type filter that has previously passed the cleanability test with sand B 4 3 Challenge slurries PO swimming pool spa hot tub filters water temperature 75 10 F 24 6 C B 4 3 1 Swimming pool spa hot tub filter applications Tap water with 0 04 0 01 Ib 4 8 1 g of ball clay 189 mg baby ol and 0 04 0 01 Ib 4 8 1 g of diatomaceous earth for non DE filters added for every gallon per minute of flow rate at which the filter is
310. rican Natio g Ame nal so Stay lt G NSF International Standard American National Standard NSF ANSI 50 2015 Equipment for Swimming Pools Spas Hot Tubs and Other Recreational Water Facilities NSF International an independent not for profit non governmental organization is dedicated to being the leading global provider of public health and safety based risk management solutions while serving the interests of all stakeholders This Standard is subject to revision Contact NSF to confirm this revision is current Users of this Standard may request clarifications and inter pretations or propose revisions by contacting Chair Joint Committee on Recreational Water Facilities c o NSF International 789 Dixboro Road P O Box 130140 Ann Arbor Michigan 48113 0140 USA Phone 734 769 8010 Telex 753215 NSF INTL FAX 734 769 0109 E mail info nsf org Web http www nsf org Standard Developer NSF International Designated as an ANSI Standard January 26 2015 American National Standards Institute NSF ANSI 50 2015 NSF International Standard American National Standard Equipment for Swimming Pools Spas Hot Tubs and other Recreational Water Facilities Evaluation criteria for materials components products equipment and systems for use at recreational water facilities Recommended for Adoption by The NSF Joint Committee on Recreational Water Facilities The NSF Council of Public H
311. ridium inactivation 14 18 because the NSF ETV UV Protocol and US EPA UVDGM requires a 100 hour burn in for the lamp prior to testing 14 13 Cleaning 14 13 1 For systems utilizing quartz sleeves to separate the water passing through the chamber from the UV source the system shall be designed to permit cleaning of the lamp jackets and the sensor window or lens without mechanical disassembly All piping for in place cleaning purposes shall be entirely independent of the water piping system in and out of the unit and a drain shall be provided The chamber shall be designed so that at least one end can be dismantled for general and physical cleaning 14 13 2 For systems utilizing polytetra fluoroethylene PTFE surface materials to separate the water passing through the UV chamber from the UV lamps the unit shall be designed to be readily accessible to the interior and exterior of the PTFE The unit shall be designed to permit use of either physical or chemical cleaning methods 14 14 Ultraviolet UV lamps UV lamps shall be readily accessible for replacement and instructions for replacement shall be provided 49 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 14 15 Chemical resistant materials Internal surfaces exposed to direct ultraviolet light shall be resistant to use application conditions 14 16 Head loss The manufacturer shall make available a head loss claim for systems installed into the main line The actual head loss shall not exceed the cl
312. rocedure material samples shall be submerged for specific durations in water having defined characteristics exposure water Upon completion of the exposures the water extraction water shall be analyzed for the selected contaminants of concern The contaminant concentrations observed shall be normalized to represent exposure conditions in the field The normalized concentration estimated exposure level or remove this statement shall be compared to an established maximum contaminant level or a level of toxicological concern for drinking water Chemical feeders and generators may be tested according to the requirements of NSF ANSI 61 utilizing tap water and the manufacturer s recommended chemicals or specific components requiring testing may be evaluated to this annex 2 The information contained in this Annex is not part of this American National Standard ANS and has not been processed in accordance with ANSI s requirements for an ANS Therefore this Annex may contain material that has not been subjected to public review or a consensus process In addition it does not contain requirements necessary for conformance to the Standard Al 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 A 3 2 Selection of parameters for exposure testing The selection of potential contaminants for which testing is warranted shall be based on the review of the material formulation the toxicological significance of the ingredients and the likelihood of their migration
313. rominator process equipment 15 1 General In line electrolytic chlorinator or brominator process equipment covered by this section is intended for use in circulation systems of public and residential swimming pools and spas hot tubs Equipment shall produce a quantity of sodium hypochlorite or hydrobromous acid as stated by the manufacturer 15 2 Cleanability Parts of process equipment requiring cleaning and maintenance shall be accessible 15 3 Design pressure pressure vessels Units and components of process equipment that are subjected to pressure shall meet a working pressure of 50 psi 33 kPa or be equipped with a pressure reducing valve set at the manufacturer s working pressure 15 4 Flow meter If the performance of a unit is dependent on a specified flow rate a means to monitor and control the flow shall be provided 15 5 Performance indication The process equipment shall be provided with an effective means to alert the user when a component of this equipment is not operating 15 6 Operation and installation instructions Drawings and a parts list for easy identification and ordering of replacement parts shall be furnished with each unit and shall include model number of the unit instructions for proper size selection and installation operation and maintenance instructions a statement of the manufacturer s warranty applicable caution statements prominently displayed ventilation requireme
314. rrence of unsafe bacteria in your spa water or equivalent 20 10 7 Service information Service information shall include at a minimum 21 21 1 troubleshooting guide Warranty contact information for manufacturer list of serviceable components parts and statement that consumer should not attempt to repair non serviceable components Fittings for water park spray pad pool or spa Water inlet or water return fittings Fittings designed to return water to the pool shall comply with the material formulation and corrosion re sistance requirements of the material section of this Standard as well as the following Dimensional compliance with the referenced performance standard for those features intended to interface with industry standard piping including critical dimensions such as wall thickness socket dimensions thread dimensions or barb dimensions to ensure proper connection with piping Minimum working pressure of 50 psi 345 kPa hydrostatic pressure testing for public commercial use fittings and pressure testing at 1 5 times the manufacturer s rated working pressure install the fitting in accordance with the manufacturer instructions Condition the product at spa water temperature of 102 F 5 F 39 C 3C for 1 hr prior to testing Pressurize the fitting at its most closed setting as applicable for 1 min at 1 5 times the rated working pressure Then assess the product for
315. s 3 The entire system shall meet or exceed the 70 turbidity reduction requirement when tested using Sl co sil 106 140 silica after 5 volumetric turnovers in accordance with section 5 and annex B 4 The entire system shall also meet or exceed 70 reduction of challenge particles 20 micron and larger when tested using Arizona A3 medium test dust after 5 volumetric turnovers in accordance with section 5 and Annex B 20 5 2 Spa or swim spas utilizing a non self contained skid pack with a pump s shall comply with the requirements of this section 20 5 2 1 All pumps and filtration systems components shall be designed and sized to supply sufficient flow rate to operate the filter and meet the required 30 min turnover rate The water circulation pumps with a rating 5 HP 3 7 kW or less shall meet the spa requirements of this Standard and ANSI UL 1081 20 5 2 2 Labeling mounting access and support Pump horsepower rating and labeling shall not exceed the brake horsepower of the motor Pumps shall be mounted per pump manufacturer s specifications Pumps shall be accessible for inspection service and maintenance Pumps shall be supported to prevent damage to the pump and piping due to settling or other movements 20 5 3 SVRS suction outlets exercise resistance systems vacuum fittings and water return fittings 20 5 3 1 SVRS Spas that utilize a SVRS shall comply with ASME A112 19 17 or ASTM F2387 20 5 3 2 Suction outlet fitting used in
316. s and velocity head loss on suction side of pump 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 2 128 toxic Having an adverse physiological effect on humans 2 129 trimmer valve Flow adjusting device used to proportion flow between the skimming weir and main suction line from the main outlet or from the vacuum cleaning line 2 130 turbidity A measurement of suspended particulate matter in water expressed as nephelometric turbidity units NTU 2 131 turnover rate The time required to recirculate the entire volume of water in a swimming pool spa or hot tub 2 132 ultraviolet UV light The segment of the light spectrum between 100 300 nanometers nm 2 133 ultraviolet UV unit A device that produces ultraviolet light between 250 280 nm for the purpose of inactivation of microorganisms by UV radiation 2 134 user Any person using a pool spa or hot tub and adjoining deck area for the purpose of water sports recreation or related activities 2 135 vacuum Pressure lower than atmospheric pressure 2 136 vacuum cleaner connection Connection to attach a hose for cleaning 2 137 waterline Top of the overflow outlet of the spa 2 138 water quality testing device WQTD A product designed to measure the level of a parameter A WQTD includes a device or method to provide a visual indication of parameter level and may include one or more reagents and accessory items 2 139 working pressure Maximum operating pressure recommended by man
317. s intentionally left blank Q8 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Annex R normative Toxicology review and evaluation procedures for swimming pool treatment chemicals R 1 General Requirements This annex defines the toxicological review and evaluation procedures for the evaluation of the health effects of swimming pool treatment chemicals It is intended to establish the human health risk if any of chemicals imparted to recreational water under the anticipated use conditions of the product The toxicol ogy review procedure may be utilized to evaluate the chemicals and contaminants contained in the fin ished product Excluded from the scope of this evaluation procedure are contaminants produced as by products through reaction of the treatment chemical with a constituent of the treated water Also excluded from the scope of this evaluation procedure are the potential effects of the accumulation of pool treatment chemicals in the pool water based on multiple dosages over time The rationale for these exclusions is based on the varia bility of pool specific parameters that may influence such determinations which include but are not limited to water chemistry variability in recirculation different filtration rates types water replacement rates and splash out rates The following general procedure may be used to evaluate swimming pool treatment chemicals under Annex R of this Standard Detailed product formulation information shall be
318. s of water flow Electrolytic chlorinators should have the power source to the chlorinator interconnected with the power source for the pump For brine type systems the release of chlorine gas into the piping system may be prevented by the installation of an acceptable vacuum breaker downstream of the system J 5 3 Operation To ensure adequate operation of the system the user should clearly understand and follow the manufacturer s recommendations for monitoring of water chemistry and routine maintenance Whenever one is working with chlorine especially in the gas state it is important to follow proper safety precautions The user should refer to the manufacturer s recommendations and to the federal state and local regulations that may apply Chlorine gas is considered toxic Adequate ventilation should be provided when a system is located in an enclosed area J 6 Ozone process equipment J 6 1 Background There are two systems typically used for generating ozone O3 on site at the pool facility One system pumps air past ultraviolet light UV to generate the ozone The second system the corona discharge method utilizes an applied voltage across an air gap to ionize the oxygen molecules The type of system required will depend on the amount of ozone required Corona discharge units will typically generate larger quantities of ozone J 6 2 Pressurized Ozone generation systems J 6 2 1 Ozone shall be delivered to the pool recirculat
319. s outlet port c Fill the tank to the skimmer s normal operating level and set the flow at the maximum design flow rate Observe the return line to the test tank for any signs of air being admitted into the tank If any air is noted check the suction line for leaks d Lower the water level in the tank to 2 0 25 in 51 6 4 mm below the lowest overflow level of the weir There shall be no entrained air observed in the suction line after 30 s from the time the water level drops below the lowest overflow level of the weir Measure and record the flow rate in the suction line E 4 5 Acceptance criteria There shall be no entrained air observed in the suction line after 30 s from the time the water level drops below the lowest overflow level of the weir The flow rate in the suction line shall not deviate from the maximum design flow rate by more than 5 from the maximum design flow rate when the water level drops below the lowest overflow level of the weir E 5 Skimmer covers UV exposure polymer covers only and structural integrity E 5 1 Purpose To verify the skimmer cover material and design exhibits acceptable weather resistance and structural strength E 5 2 Ultraviolet light exposure test polymer covers only Six 6 new covers of each material color plating or finish shall be exposed to ultraviolet light and water spray in accordance with ASTM G154 using the common exposure condition Cycle 3 found in Table X2 1 of ASTM
320. s process In addition it does not contain requirements necessary for conformation to the Standard Based on atmospheric pressure at sea level P1 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 P 1 3 1 Controls Pump motor controls should be readily and easily accessible Controls mounted on walls should be clear ly labeled indicating which pump is controlled P 1 3 2 Environment Pump and motor control enclosure should be related for the installation environment P 1 4 Gauges and flow rate indicators Calibrated pressure gauges with an appropriate range should be provided on the effluent and influent lines of all filter systems A certified and or calibrated flow rate indicator with an appropriate range should be provided for public pools spas or hot tubs if such a flow meter is not present the procedure in P 2 1 may be followed as an estimate P 2 Operation The variable speed pump should be set at the lowest speed that delivers the design turnover rate when the filter is at maximum head differential P 2 1 Flow rate procedure The flow rate at any speed may be determined using TDH measurement and the pump curve using the Affinity Law It applies directly to the single level bodies of water it does not apply directly to multi level bodies of water The affinity laws apply only when the only variable is pump speed The system curve should be identical when calculating flows using the following procedure P 2 1 1 Measure TDG and determine f
321. s shall be exposed at the manufacturers recommended use ratio of weight of media per unit void volume Precoat media shall be exposed at 10 times the manufacturer s recommended use ratio A 3 6 Analytical methods Analyses of extraction water shall be conducted in accordance with the procedures in the following APHA Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater USEPA 600 4 79 020 Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes USEPA Methods for the Determination of Organic Compounds in Drinking Water Supplement 1 or A2 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 USEPA Methods for the Determination of Inorganic Substances in Environmental Samples A 3 7 Normalization The normalized extraction level for a contaminant shall be calculated by Ce C SAF VE V SAL where Cr Contaminant concentration in field CL Contaminant concentration in lab SAF Surface area of material in the field SA Surface area of material in the lab Ve Volume of water in the field Vu Volume of water in the lab If the surface area to volume ratio in the field is not known the normalized extraction level is calculated by dividing the concentration in the extraction water by a factor of 10 This is based on the assumption that the worst case surface area to volume ratio of the material is 25 in L All medias shall be normalized to the manufacturer s recommended use ratio A 3 8 Acceptance criteria The
322. s specified in Table 5 1 Table 5 1 Maximum design filtration rates for precoat media type filters Filter design intended application Maximum design filtration rate slurry feed residential pool or spa hot tub 3 gal min t 122 L min m slurry feed public pool or spa hot tub no slurry feed residential pool or spa hot tub no slurry feed public pool or spa hot tub 5 29 Precoat filter media Pre coat media shall conform to the requirements of 3 Materials 5 2 9 1 Pre coat media other than diatomaceous earth DE Pre coat media other than DE shall also conform to the requirements of Annex B sections B 3 B 4 B 5 B 6 and B 7 5 2 9 2 Pre coat media labeling requirements Pre coat media shall contain the following information on the product packaging or documentation shipped with the product 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 manufacturers name and contact information address phone number website or prime supplier product identification product type and trade name net weight or net volume when applicable mesh or sieve size lot number or other production identifier such as a date code when appropriate special handling storage and use instructions and the specific certification mark of the certifying organization for certified products 5 3 Sand type filters The requirements in this subsection apply only to sand type filters and
323. s within the formulations test both the highest and lowest colorant levels as well as the lightest and darkest colors The worst case recorded values shall be used for all further tests and calculations Fittings that are only rated for indoor use need not comply with the UV exposure requirements Manufactured sumps and other assembly components that are not exposed to natural UV radiation when fully assembled and installed according to manufacturer s instruction are not included in the Ultraviolet Light Exposure Test Products shall comply with the vertical load and deformation test of section 3 of ANSI APSP 16 or the manufacturer s claimed load requirements whichever is greater Products shall comply with the pull load requirements of section 3 of ANSI APSP 16 or the manufacturer s claimed load requirements whichever is greater and Products shall comply with the finger and limb entrapment requirements of Section 3 of ANSI APSP 16 Products that meet all requirements shall be marked in accordance with the following manufacturer s name or trademark model number or product designation standard reference NSF ANSI 50 and certification mark and use conditions indoor use only Indoor indoor and outdoor use Outdoor Product packaging installation or use instructions shall contain the following manufacturer s name or trademark model number or product description produ
324. set at the manufacturer s working pressure 16 4 Flow meter If the performance of a unit is dependent on a specified flow rate a means to monitor and control the flow shall be provided 16 5 Performance indication The process equipment shall be provided with an effective means to alert the user when a component of this equipment is not operating 16 6 Operation and installation instructions Drawings and a parts list for easy identification and ordering of replacement parts shall be furnished with each unit and shall include model number of the unit instructions for proper size selection and installation operation and maintenance instructions a statement of the manufacturer s warranty applicable caution statements prominently displayed ventilation requirements if applicable cross connection protection if the unit is physically connected to a potable water supply output rate in lbs or kg per day or hour maximum daily operation time if not designed for continuous operation and a warning if the potential exists for release of high dosages of substances that may endanger bathers 16 7 Data plate Data plate shall be permanent easy to read and securely attached cast or stamped onto the unit at a location readily accessible after normal installation Data plate s shall contain at least the following equipment name manufacturer s name and contact inform
325. shall be at least 4 in 102 mm wide If a circular weir is used there shall be a clearance of at least 2 in 51 mm between the weir lip and the side of the skimmer housing 9 2 Weir 9 2 1 A skimmer shall have a weir that operates freely with continuous action and adjusts automatically to variations in water level over a minimum range of 4 in 102 mm or 3 in 76 mm if an auto fill pool water level control device is used when operated at the maximum design flow rate see Annex E section E 2 9 2 2 Flap type weirs on swimming pool skimmers shall have a minimum unobstructed width of 7 25 in 184 mm over the full operating range Flap type weirs on spa hot tub skimmers shall have a minimum unobstructed width of 3 75 in 95 mm over the full operating range Flap type weirs shall be 31 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 buoyant and designed to develop an even flow over their full width The clearance between the weir and the housing side shall not exceed 0 125 in 8 mm at any point Hinge construction shall preclude leakage The weir shall be firmly attached to the housing and shall be accessible for cleaning and replacement in the field 9 2 3 Circular weirs shall have a minimum diameter of 4 in 102 mm They shall be buoyant and designed to develop an even flow on the water surface around the circumference The radial clearance between the weir float and the weir housing shall not exceed 0 079 in 2 mm The float or basket housing sha
326. sing HCl alkalinity may be consumed do not permit the alkalinity to go out of range b A sample of the test solution as required by the WQTD shall be taken and analyzed with one of the WQTD units under test in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions The pH shown by the lab meter at the time the sample was taken and the results of the analysis shall be recorded Another sample shall be taken and analyzed by the second unit under test The pH shown by the lab meter at the time the sample was taken and the results of the analysis shall be recorded c Using the same test units repeat the analysis of the test solution two additional times If applicable rinse the test units with de ionized water between tests d Adjust the pH to the next lowest level using acid and repeat b and c e Assess the results of testing based upon the resolution of the device f Average test results to determine compliance with each accuracy level in section O 12 Test procedure free chlorine a For each chlorine concentration to be tested i e 2 4 5 ppm prepare the appropriate test solution see Table O 1 Verify and record the test solution values for all parameters listed in the table The use of sodium hypochlorite or chlorine neutralizers during adjustment of the chlorine concentration may change the alkalinity and pH values of the test water Do not permit the alkalinity or pH to fall out of range b Verify and record the free chlorine
327. sorption distribution metabolism and excretion data in humans other mammalian species or both structural functional assessment structure activity relationship analysis acute or short term toxicity cell proliferation cell cycle assays pharmacokinetics sensitization in vivo gene mutation assay receptor binding transcriptional activation assays frog metamorphosis assay steroidogenesis assay human data epidemiological occupational or clinical studies The gene mutation assay the chromosomal aberration assay in vitro or in vivo and the subchronic toxicity study shall constitute the minimum data set required to perform a quantitative risk assessment When one or both in vitro genotoxicity studies are positive the in vivo assay shall be required to be reviewed endocrine disruption assays It is recommended that results of a screening assay such as OECD No 422 Combined repeated dose toxicity study with reproduction developmental toxicity screening test or data from other repeated dose assays that in clude histopathological examination of the reproductive tissues of each sex be reviewed prior to a determination that these assays are required for evaluation 3 A chronic study with evaluation of carcinogenic endpoints is required when review of the minimum data set con cludes that the substance is likely to be a human health hazard at exposures of 10 ug L or less Sister chromatid exchange assay SCEs are not considered to be
328. ssues of one or both sexes of experimental animals or the compound under evaluation is closely related to a known reproductive or developmental toxicant R 6 4 2 Risk estimation for new or updated risk assessments The method of risk estimation used for new and updated risk assessments shall be determined by the quantity and quality of toxicity data identified for the contaminant of concern see Annex R section R 6 4 When available toxicity data are sufficient to identify an appropriate Point of Departure for a chemical with a non carcinogenic endpoint the Point of Departure shall be determined by the toxicologic endpoint identified as the critical effect utilizing either the NOAEL LOAEL or BMDL approach Selected NOAEL LOAEL BDL values from animal studies shall be converted to human equivalent doses HEDs using a cross species weight scaling approach as outlined in U S EPA s guidance document 2011c This method to convert data between animal and human species for both cancer and non cancer endpoints should be used when physiologically based toxicokinetics PBPK modeling is not feasible and no chemical specific data on interspecies weight conversion are available R 6 4 2 1 NOAEL or LOAEL approach The substance data set shall be reviewed in its entirety and the highest NOAEL for the most appropriate test species relevant route of exposure study duration mechanism tissue response and toxicological endpoint shall be identified
329. structions installation instructions design head loss curve and parts lists and any drawings or charts necessary to permit proper installation operation and maintenance of the filter The manual shall also specify the recommended amount type and grade of filter aid 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 5 2 7 Data plate 5 2 7 1 A pre coat media type filter shall have a data plate that is permanent easy to read and securely attached to the filter housing at a readily accessible location The data plate shall contain the following information manufacturers name and contact information address phone number website or prime supplier filter model number filter serial number effective filtration area in square meters or square feet required clearance vertical and horizontal for service and maintenance design flow rate in liters minute or gallons minute working pressure if applicable and steps of operation The data plate shall indicate whether a filter is designed for swimming pool applications only or spa hot tub applications only A filter designed for both applications shall be exempt from this requirement 5 2 7 2 If provided with the filter each valve on the face piping of the filter shall have a permanent label or tag identifying its operation e g influent backwash bypass 5 2 8 Filtration rate The design filtration rate of precoat media type filters shall not exceed the value
330. supplier filter model number filter serial number or date code effective filtration area in square meters or square feet required clearance vertical and horizontal for service and maintenance design flow rate in liters minute or gallons minute design backwash flow rate in liters minute or gallons minute working pressure or design collapse pressure for vacuum filter tanks suitability for buried installation steps of operation filtration rate in gal min ft or L min m and special media specifications if any as required in 5 3 4 1 The data plate shall indicate whether a filter is designed for swimming pool applications only or spa hot tub applications only A filter designed for both applications is exempt from this requirement 5 3 7 2 H provided with the filter each valve on the face piping of the filter shall have a permanent label or tag identifying its operation e g influent backwash bypass 5 3 8 Effective filtration area The actual filtration area shall be within 5 of the effective filtration area specified on the filter data plate The actual filtration area is equal to the total area of the filter media bed minus the combined area 22 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 of any obstructions e g pipes headers air lines wider than 0 25 in 6 4 mm passing through the surface of the filter media bed 5 3 9 Filtration and backwash rates 5 3 9 1 The design
331. sure to pool treatment chemicals by skin contact and inhalation is potentially greater than from ingestion the 10 ug L Threshold of Evaluation level for pool chemicals allows for a margin that may account for this R 4 4 Comparison of maximum pool water concentrations to Threshold of Evaluation As an initial toxicity screen to determine the need for further toxicological assessment the maximum pool water concentrations of each chemical constituent and or contaminant in the product as calculated un der section R 4 2 may be compared against the Threshold of Evaluation limit of 10 ug L however this Threshold of Evaluation concentration of 10 ug L shall not apply to any substance for which available tox icity data and sound scientific judgment indicate that the potential for an adverse health effect is signifi cant at a swimming pool water concentration of lt 10 ug L NOTE When assessing whether the Threshold of Evaluation concentration of 10 ug L may be utilized emphasis should be placed on whether the chemical is a strong sensitizing agent a genotoxic agent or a potential human carcinogen Structure activity relationships may also be considered Therefore for any chemical constituent and or contaminant in a product formulation where use of the Threshold of Evaluation limit is appropriate and the maximum concentration in the swimming pool water is below 10 ug L no additional toxicology evaluation is required All chemical constituents
332. t Levels MCL Health Advisories and Integrated Risk Information System IRIS entries Health Canada or other regulatory entity risk assessments state or provincial drinking water standards and guidelines and World Health Organization WHO or other international drinking water standards and guidelines A point of departure shall be identified for each chemical of known toxicity that is being used to determine the class based point of departure Carcinogenic potential shall be evaluated using a quantitative struc ture activity relationship program to verify that the carcinogenic potential of the chemical of unknown tox icity is no greater than that of the chemicals being used to determine the class based point of departure R 6 4 3 3 Determination of the class based evaluation criteria After review of the available toxicity information specified in Annex R section R 6 4 3 2 the class based point of departure shall not exceed the lowest point identified for the chemicals of known toxicity in the defined chemical class The point of departure identified for the chemical class may then be utilized in performing the margin of exposure analysis as described in Annex R section 6 4 2 3 until such time as sufficient toxicity data are available to determine a chemical specific point of departure The class based point of departure shall not be applied to any substance for which available data and sound scientific judgment such as struc
333. t must be calculated and then initially compared to the Threshold of Evaluation as described in section R 4 4 R 4 3 Determination of a Threshold of Evaluation Under Annex A section A 7 1 1 of NSF ANSI 60 and NSF ANSI 61 a Threshold of Evaluation for chronic exposure to a chemical in drinking water was determined to be 3 ug L static conditions The use of the Threshold of Evaluation criteria under NSF ANSI 60 and NSF ANSI 61 is based on an assumed drinking water intake of 2 L day U S EPA 2012 For pool water a study by Dufour et al 2006 an oral exposure to pool water of 0 05 L per hour or swimming event was estimated for children of ages 6 11 Based on this intake a Threshold of Evaluation for chemicals found in pool water may be determined as follows FDA Threshold of Regulation Average food intake in children 6 11 Years Pool water ingested per swimming event 0 5 ug kg food from 21 CFR 170 39 1 118 kg day from EFH U S EPA 1997 0 05 L from Dufuor et al 2006 Threshold of Evaluation 0 5 g kg food x 1 118 kg food day 11 18 ug L 10 ug L 0 05 L pool water ingested NOTE While derived from an oral route of exposure only the resulting 10 ug L Threshold of Evaluation level for pool chemicals is only approximately three fold higher than the drinking water Threshold of Evaluation of 3 ug L from NSF ANSI 60 and NSF ANSI 61 despite the estimated oral intake of pool water being twenty fold less While expo
334. taining may occur water may discolor filter cycle may decrease and may indicate pH too low corrosion etc Q 3 Biological values NOTE Maintaining adequate sanitizer levels is critical to preventing growth of algae and bacteria 1 Visible algae If algae growth is observed recommendations include but are not limited to super chlorinate the spa use an EPA registered approved algicide according to label directions supplement with brushing and vacuuming some algicides may cause foaming 2 Bacteria Refer to local public health or spa and hot tub code Maintain proper sanitizer level and pH to control bacteria Q 4 Stabilizer Cyanic acid ppm a minimum 10 b ideal 20 30 c maximum 50 CYA and CYA containing disinfectants sold under many different names are typically only beneficial in pools spas that are outside and exposed to direct solar UV radiation CYA is not needed for most indoor water facilities If it is appropriate to use CYA as a sequestering agent of the disinfectant extra care should be taken to maintain the pH in the proper range If pH level is not properly maintained or if the CYA level gets too high it can undermine the functionality and activity efficacy of the disinfectant chemical If stabilizer is too low chlorine residual FAC is rapidly destroyed by sunlight If stabilizer is too high it reduces the chlorine efficacy upon micro organisms and creates risk for swimmers NOTE
335. taken away from the main unit without using tools 2 92 removable Capable of being taken away from the main unit using only simple tools screwdriver pliers open end wrench etc 2 93 repeatability The within run precision 2 94 reproducibility The between run precision 2 95 resolution The smallest discernible difference between any two measurements that can be made For meters this is usually how many decimal places and significant figures are displayed i e 0 01 For titrations and various comparators it is the smallest interval the device is calibrated or 13 Jeffery G H Basset J Mendham J Denney R C Vogel s Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis gh ed Longman Scientific amp Technical 1989 p 130 2 Statistics in Analytical Chemistry Part 7 A Review D Coleman and L Vanatta American Laboratory Sept 2003 p 34 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 marked to i e 1 drop 10 ppm 0 2 ppm for a Direct Read Titration DRT or half a unit difference for a color comparator or color chart 2 96 run A run is a single data set from set up to clean up Generally one run occurs on one day However for meter calibrations a single calibration is considered a single run or data set even though it may take 2 or 3 days 2 97 sand type filter lower distribution system underdrain effluent Devices in the bottom of a sand type filter to collect water uniformly during filtering and to unif
336. tal dose of interest U S EPA 201 1a R 2 8 model A mathematical function with parameters that can be adjusted so the function closely describes a set of empirical data A mechanistic model usually reflects observed or hypothesized biologi cal or physical mechanisms and has model parameters with real world interpretation In contrast statisti cal or empirical models selected for particular numerical properties are fitted to data model parameters may or may not have real world interpretation When data quality is otherwise equivalent extrapolation from mechanistic models e g biologically based dose often carries higher confidence than extrapolation using empirical models e g logistic model U S EPA 201 1a R 2 9 no observed adverse effect level NOAEL The highest exposure level at which there are no biologically significant increases in the frequency or severity of adverse effect between the exposed popu lation and its appropriate control some effects may be produced at this level but they are not considered adverse or precursors of adverse effects U S EPA 201 1a R 2 10 non regulated substance A substance for which a statutory concentration limit does not exist R 2 11 peer review A documented critical review of a scientific or technical work product conducted by qualified individuals or organizations that are independent of those who performed the work but who are collectively equivalent or superior in technical expertise
337. te through the equalizer pipe and the total flow rate through the skimmer Calculate the percentage of the total flow rate through the skimmer that is admitted through the equalizer pipe e If the skimmer has an equalizer valve block 75 of the strainer basket s open area and repeat the steps in Annex E sections E 3 4 c and d Acceptance criteria The flow rate through the equalizer pipe shall not exceed 10 of the total flow rate through the skimmer E 4 E 4 1 Flow to pump test equalizer performance Purpose The purpose of this test is to verify that a skimmer s equalizer device will prevent air from entering the suction line of the circulation system and will maintain the proper flow rate in the suction line when the water level drops below the lowest overflow level of the skimmer weir E 4 2 E 4 3 Apparatus turbidimeter scaled in NTU accurate to 2 NTU temperature indicating device accurate to 2 F 1 C adequately sized tank and pump to deliver required flow and flow measuring device accurate to 3 Test water pi swimming pools hot tubs spas water temperature 75 10 F 24 6 C 102 5 F 39 3 C turbidity lt 15 NTU lt 15 NTU E3 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 E 4 4 Flow to pump equalizer performance test method a Install the skimmer to the test tank in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions b Connect a flow meter to the skimmer
338. ted to filters pumps heaters controls fittings pipes and skimmers that are to be installed in accordance with the manufacturer s specifications 2 107 skimmer cover Device or lid to close deck opening to the skimmer housing 2 108 skimmer equalizer pipe Connection from skimmer housing to the pool spa or hot tub below the weir and sized to satisfy pump demand and prevent air lock 2 109 skimmer equalizer valve Device on the equalizer line that opens when water level inside skimmer tank drops below operating level and remains closed during normal skimming 2 110 skimmer housing Structure that attaches to or contains skimmer weir strainer basket and other devices used in the skimming operation 2 111 skimmer weir assembly Floating device over which water from the pool spa or hot tub passes during skimming along with its means of guiding or attachment to the skimmer 2 112 slurry feed Refer to body feed definition see 2 12 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 2 113 spa hot tub exercise spa swim spa therapy spa resistance system A unit which is not usually drained cleaned or refilled for each individual It may include but is not limited to hydro jet circulation hot water or cold water mineral baths air induction bubbles or any combination thereof A portable or non portable water basin intended for the total or partial submersion of persons in temperature controlled water circulated in a closed system and not inten
339. tenance medium The remaining suspension shall be transferred to another sterile 50 mL tube containing 47 5 mL of pre warmed maintenance medium h 6 drops of suspension shall be placed into each well of chamber slide using a 10 mL pipette i Slides shall be incubated for 48 hr prior to infection Slides that leak or get contaminated shall be discarded H 4 8 3 3 Cell infection H 4 8 3 3 1 Bleach treatment a If oocysts are in something other than PBS or are in solution of more than 0 5 mL the samples shall be centrifuged and supernatant aspirated b Oocysts shall be re suspended in 900 uL of sterile 1 X PBS and 100 uL of cold sodium hypochlorite 2 4 vortexed for 30 sec and incubated at room temperature for 8 min c Oocysts shall be centrifuged at 12 000 RPM for 4 min and supernatant removed from pellet d 1mLof pre warmed growth medium shall be added and vortexed for 1 min e Oocysts shall be counted on a hemacytometer 8 replicate squares for all samples H 4 8 3 3 2 Dilution Tubes Sterile micro centrifuge dilution tubes shall be labeled and placed in a rack Serial dilutions shall be 10 to 10 10X dilutions 900 uL of pre warmed growth medium shall be dispensed in each tube except the first 5X dilution 800 uL of pre warmed growth medium shall be dispensed in each tube except the first H15 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 H 4 8 3 3 4 Cell infection a Slides shall be removed from incubator and
340. ter Equipment Performance Filtration 14159 1 Hygiene requirements for the design of meat and poultry processing equipment 14159 2 Hygiene requirements for the design of hand held tools used in meat and poultry processing equipment 14159 3 Hygiene requirements for the design of mechanical belt conveyors used in meat and poultry processing equipment 38 The information contained in this Standards page is not part of this American National Standard ANS and has not been pro cessed in accordance with ANSI s requirements for an ANS Therefore this Standards page may contain material that has not been subjected to public review or a consensus process In addition it does not contain requirements necessary for conformance to the Standard THE HOPE OF MANKIND rests in the ability of man to define and seek out the environment which will permit him to live with fellow creatures of the earth in health in peace and in mutual respect
341. ter criteria mg L x DWI L day Comparison Criteria mg kg day BW kg Where DWI Drinking Water Intake verify assumptions used in deriving the drinking water criteria BW Body Weight verify assumptions utilized in deriving the drinking water criteria After obtaining the Comparison Criteria value it shall be compared with the PDD systemic all routes calculated under Annex R section R 5 to determine acceptability If the PDD exceeds the Comparison Criteria value the ADD may be used in place of the PDD for evaluation purposes however the PDD must also then be evaluated against a short term effect level criteria as established under section R 6 4 4 R 6 2 3 Risk estimation for published assessments carcinogenic endpoints If a carcinogenic endpoint has been identified as the critical effect in the available published peer reviewed risk assessment the Point of Departure from the risk assessment shall be utilized to perform a Margin of Exposure MoE analysis with the ADD calculated in Annex R section R 5 The MoE shall be calculated as follows R15 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 MoE Point of Departure mg kg day ADD mg kg day systemic all routes If the calculated MoE is greater than or equal to 10000 the exposure to the chemical of concern shall be acceptable NOTE The use of an acceptance MoE of 10000 for carcinogenic compounds is based on the opinion EFSA Scientific Committee 2005 A 6 3 Utili
342. test vessel with deionized water the volume specified in Annex H section H 1 6 1 a Condition per Annex H section H 1 3 a i Condition per Annex H section H 1 3 a ii Measure and record pH free chlorine and turbidity Do not add microorganisms to test water until the turbidity is less than 2 0 NTU H 1 6 2 Procedure a Use the test apparatus and water volume specified in Annex H section H 1 6 1 b Activate circulation and heater systems to attain a stabilized temperature of 65 to 85 F 18 to 29 C c Ensure that the system under test is operating per the manufacturer s instructions Operate ion generation systems per manufacturer s instructions to obtain recommended concentrations of specific ion at the minimum end of the manufacturer s specified range d Turn off the system under test e Collect three test water samples see Annex H table H 1 and determine the background concentrations of P aeruginosa and E faecium or other organisms using methods described in Standard Methods All microbiological samples shall be collected using sterile sample bottles containing appropriate neutralizing solution NOTE Example neutralizers such as but not limited to the following shall be considered appropriate Halogen based disinfectants utilizing Sodium thiosulfate or Letheen broth Metal ion based disinfectants utilizing Chambers solution 5 thiosulfate and 7 3 thioglycollate f The constituents specified in
343. testing the unit with 3000 operating hours shall be evaluated to the delivery pressure and operational protection requirements of this section 17 Copper silver and copper ion generators 17 1 General 17 1 1 Electrolytic copper silver and copper ion generation systems are intended for supplemental treatment of water in public and residential pools and spas hot tubs These products are intended for use with appropriate residual levels of EPA registered disinfecting chemicals These systems are typically designed to operate with no less than 0 4 ppm free chlorine or 0 8 ppm free bromine Additional levels of EPA registered disinfecting chemicals may be required by the regulatory agency having authority The residual chemical shall be easily and accurately measured by a field test kit Levels of copper silver should not be imparted into pool or spa water in excess of the USEPA Primary and Secondary National Drinking Water Regulations The system shall conform to this Standard 17 1 2 Alternate systems Systems using ion treatment other than copper or silver may be considered for conformance with this Standard if scientific evidence supporting the efficacy of the system is provided Scientific evidence shall be in the following form published peer reviewed literature data supporting conformance of the system to the requirements of this section data supporting the efficacy of the system in an actual field application s or ration
344. the elevation above sea level increases The performance of an ozone generator that uses air as the feed gas decreases with decreasing oxygen concentration in the feed gas The manufacturer shall provide information about the performance of the ozone generator with feed gas oxygen concentration different from test conditions in this Standard H 3 2 4 UV Ozone generators UV ozone generators shall be tested under ambient air conditions at the laboratory All test conditions including ambient temperature relative humidity and ambient oxygen concentration shall be documented Ozone production from a UV ozone generator changes as operating conditions vary from test conditions Ozone production decreases with higher ambient temperature higher relative humidity and lower oxygen concentration H 3 3 Apparatus and analytical devices The test apparatus shall be set according to figure A1 H 3 4 Ozone production procedure H 3 4 1 An ozone generator shall be set up and conditioned according to the manufacturers specifications Prior to testing the ozone generator shall be purged using the feed gas at the design flow rate for a minimum of 2 h or as specified by the manufacturer or until the specified dew point and oxygen concentration are achieved The generator cell pressure range shall be measured and reported 1 The generator cell pressure operation range shall be specified by the manufacturer The generator cell pressure shall be reported 2 The
345. the feed rate indicator At any setting between 25 and 100 the feeder output shall be reproducible within 10 or 0 1 mg L whichever is greater 17 16 Head Loss The manufacturer shall make available a head loss claim for systems installed into the main line The actual head loss shall not exceed the claimed head loss by more than 10 18 Automated Controllers 18 1 Scope Automated controllers are used to monitor water conditions such as pH ORP free chlorine and or other parameters specified by the manufacturer and to control equipment such as chemical feeders and pumps Equipment covered by this section includes the controller and the chemical probes and or flow cells Water contact components and materials of automated controllers shall be evaluated to the health effects criteria of 3 Mechanical Chemical Feeders are covered in 9 and Flow through Chemical Feeders are covered in 10 18 2 Chemical resistant materials Parts normally in contact with the chemically treated water shall be resistant to the solutions specified in Annex N section N 1 2 18 3 Monitor display The automated controller shall be equipped with a display that indicates operation status if the parameter is above or below set point whether the automated controller is working properly as specified in 18 6 if an automated controller has a digital or analog display then applicable parameter levels pH ORP etc shall be displayed using the follo
346. the identified LOAEL is for a reversible or minimally adverse toxic effect a factor value of 3 shall be considered When the identified LOAEL is for a severe or irreversible toxic effect a factor value of 10 shall be used Dourson et al 1996 R 6 4 3 Procedure for identifying a class based point of departure If insufficient toxicology data exists for the chemical of concern to identify a point of departure a point of departure may be identified based on a chemical class based approach R 6 4 3 1 Establishment of the chemical class The chemical class for which the class based evaluation criteria are to be established shall consist of clearly defined and closely related group of substances and shall be defined according to chemical structure e g aliphatic or aromatic primary chemical functional group s e g alcohol aldehyde or ketone and molecular weight or weight range R19 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 R 6 4 3 2 Review of chemical class toxicity information Once the chemical class has been defined according to Annex R section R 6 4 3 1 information on chemicals of known toxicity that are included in the defined chemical class shall be reviewed An appropriate number of chemicals of known toxicity shall be reviewed to confirm the class based evaluation approach Sources of data for chemicals of known toxicity shall include but not be limited to the following U S EPA risk assessments including Maximum Contaminan
347. the influent water before it reaches the filter cartridges 5 4 4 Cartridge alignment stacked multi cartridge filters Stacked cartridges shall be securely fastened to one another They shall be aligned to ensure a proper seal and to maintain the required clearance between adjacent cartridges Devices used to align cartridges shall not obstruct the filtration area 5 4 5 Removal of waste from filter tank A filter shall be designed so that wash water and dislodged dirt may be removed from the filter tank 5 4 6 Removal of cartridges Cartridges shall be readily removable If cartridge stacks are so long that lower cartridges cannot be removed by hand the manufacturer shall provide a device for lifting them out of the filter tank 23 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 5 4 7 Installation and operating instructions The manufacturer shall provide a manual with each filter The manual shall include operating instructions cleaning instructions installation instructions design head loss curve and parts lists and any drawings or charts necessary to permit proper installation operation and maintenance The manual shall also include the recommended size number and type of cartridges or high permeability elements If the reuse or replacement of cartridges or high permeability element is recommended the manufacturer shall provide printed removal and cleaning instructions 5 4 8 Data plate 5 4 8 1 A filter shall have a data plate that is per
348. their integral components designed for the filtration of swimming pool or spa hot tub water 5 3 1 Upper distribution system influent Components of the influent distribution system shall be designed so that they do not become clogged during filtration The system shall distribute incoming water during the filter cycle to prevent appreciable movement or migration of filtering media at the design flow rate 5 3 2 Lower distribution system effluent Components of the effluent distribution system shall be designed so that they do not become clogged during filtration The system shall provide adequate flow and distribution to expand the filtering bed uniformly during backwashing 5 3 3 Accessibility of internal components Internal filter components shall be accessible through an access opening in the filter tank Filters having dome type or similar underdrains with openings at least 0 189 in 4 8 mm wide are exempt from this requirement 5 3 4 Filter media 5 3 4 1 Filter sand shall be hard silica like material that is free of carbonates clay and other foreign material The effective particle size shall be between 0 016 in 0 40 mm and 0 022 in 0 55 mm and the uniformity coefficient shall not exceed 1 75 Filters intended for use with an alternate media that does not conform to these requirements shall specify the alternate media on the data plate The filter and the alternate media shall conform to the other applicable requirements of
349. this Standard 5 3 4 2 If a different media is used to support the filter media it shall be rounded material that is free of limestone and clay and installed according to the manufacturer s instructions When the support media and the filter media are installed in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations the filter media shall not intermix with the support media when operated and backwashed at least three cycles in accordance with Annex B section B 4 5 3 4 3 Alternate sand type media A material that is marketed or claimed to replace sand directly as a filter media in a sand type filter shall 20 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 conform to 3 2 5 1 8 5 1 9 5 3 4 3 and 5 3 5 when tested in a representative sand type filter in accordance with Annex B sections B 3 BA and B 5 5 3 4 3 1 The manufacturer of an alternate sand type media shall specify the particle size and uniformity coefficient for the media Particle size and uniformity coefficient shall be confirmed in accordance with ASTM C136 with sieves conforming to ASTM E11 5 3 4 3 2 The filtration rate and backwash rate for an alternate sand type media shall be as specified in 5 3 9 5 3 4 3 3 Sand type media labeling requirements Sand type media shall contain the following information on the product packaging or documentation shipped with the product manufacturers name and contact information address phone number website or prime supplier produ
350. thod The following procedure shall be used for the valve or manufactured manifold in the filter position a Connect the pressure source to the return to pool port Place the valve or manufactured manifold in the filter position b Seal the filter inlet and outlet ports and the valve or manufactured manifold inlet port c Fill the valve or manufactured manifold with water at the applicable temperature specified in Annex D section D 5 3 and bleed off any remaining air d Set the level in the sight glass approximately 2 in 51 mm above the valve or manufactured manifold center line and record the height e Apply a pressure of 10 0 5 psi 69 3 4 kPa at a rate of 2 psi min 13 8 kPa min to the return to pool port and hold for no less than 5 min 5 s Observe the valve for leakage D 5 5 Acceptance criteria Leakage through the waste port up to 10 psi 70 kPa or during the 5 min static test shall not exceed 3 mL Table D 1 Piping requirements A B CG D At least 18 nominal pipe diameters of straight pipe 6 nominal pipe diame 6 nominal pipe diame At least 1 nominal pipe ters of straight pipe ters of straight pipe diameter of straight pipe 2015 NSF differential pressure indicator temperature Vi Incicator test section test specimen Figure D1 Valve differential pressure test D10 NSF ANSI 50 2015 2015 NSF differential pressure
351. tic pressure test G 2 1 Purpose The purpose of this test is to ensure that a flow through chemical feeder and its components can withstand hydrostatic pressure 1 5 times the manufacturer s working pressure G 2 2 Apparatus hydrostatic pressure station pressure gauges meeting ANSI ASME B40 100 Grade 3A specifications and sized to yield the measurement within 25 to 75 of scale and thermometer accurate to 1 F 0 5 C G 2 3 Water temperatures swimmingpools hot tubs spas 75 5 24 3 102 5 F 39 3 C G 2 4 Hydrostatic pressure test method NOTE The method described here is primarily intended for the testing of basic erosion type flow through chemical feeders Some modification may be required when evaluating differing types of flow through chemical feeder designs However the intent of the method shall be maintained when these modifications are made a Install the feeder in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions b Fill the feeder with water conditioned to the applicable temperature specified in Annex G section G 2 3 and bleed off any entrapped air c Uniformly increase the pressure to obtain 1 5 times the working pressure to the filter housing and components and hold the pressure for no less than 5 min Examine the feeder and components for signs of leakage during the test period d Slowly release the pressure and examine the unit G 2 5 Acceptance criteria The fl
352. tion RSC must be applied to account for exposure to the chemical from other sources outside of swimming pool water Default RSCs are used in the absence of quantitative data to determine the swimming pool water contribution of a substance Thus a default RSC of 80 shall be applied to the RfD if no other uses for the chemical outside of pool water uses can be identified If other uses can be identified a default RSC of 20 shall be used Therefore the acceptability of exposure may be determined based on the following If RfD mg kg day x RSC 2 PDD mg kg day systemic all routes then acceptable If RfD mg kg day x RSC lt PDD mg kg day systemic all routes then unacceptable If the PDD exceeds the RfD x RSC value the ADD may be used in place of the PDD for evaluation purposes with the additional requirements that the PDD value must then be evaluated against a short term effect level criteria The short term effect level STEL criteria may be calculated under section R 6 4 4 or may be obtained from published risk assessments As an alternate approach if the published peer reviewed risk assessment has derived a drinking water criteria mg L for the chemical being assessed the drinking water criteria may be converted into a mg kg day dose which shall then be compared to the PDD systemic all routes calculated utilizing the equations in Annex R section R 5 again assuming that local adverse effects are not anticipated Drinking wa
353. tions are to be performed the principal analyst supervisor shall prepare a slide containing 40 to 100 oocysts The total number of oocysts determined by each analyst shall be within 10 of the number determined by the principal analyst supervisor If the number is not within this range the principal analyst supervisor and the analyst shall resolve how to identify and enumerate oocysts and the principal analyst supervisor shall prepare a new slide and the test shall be repeated H 4 10 2 The laboratory shall document the date name of principal analyst supervisor name s of analyst s number of total oocysts placed on the slide number determined by the principal analyst supervisor number determined by the analyst s whether the test was passed failed for each analyst and the number of attempts prior to passage H 4 10 3 Only after an analyst has passed the criteria in H 4 10 1 shall oocysts in blanks standards and samples be identified and enumerated PUMP TS S TEST WATER TANK FLOWMETER Influent sampling location A me ozonator FLOWMETER gt Daje Haon THIS BRANCH ONLY IF unr inline mixer IS DESIGNED FOR SIDE STREAM Effluent sampling location B 30 feet Effluent Sampling location C Figure H2 Crypto test setup H19 This page is intentionally left blank 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 Annex I Normative Life test
354. to a 1 L volumetric flask and dilute to volume using de ionized water The resulting stock solution should contain approximately 10 ppm available chlorine b Volumetrically dilute the stock sodium hypochlorite solution by the appropriate proportions to give the following four solutions 1 ppm 3 ppm 5 ppm and 7 ppm chlorine c Place three ORP sensors in the solution in b and connect them to the displays automated controllers or place the influent tubes from three controllers in the solution actual samples under test so that there will be three independent senor display setups Calibrate them per the manufacturer s instructions d At each concentration record the readings of the three ORP sensors Calculate the average N4 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 of the readings at each concentration N 2 3 3 2 Controller output accuracy a Using sodium hypochlorite prepare a test solution with a chlorine concentration of 2 mg L as Cl2 ppm b Attach the sensor under test to the automated controller per manufacturer s instructions c Attach two indicators sized for the appropriate voltage into each output terminal of the automated controller d Place the sensor under test or the influent tube of the controller in the 2 ppm sodium hypochlorite solution e Set the automated controller set point to just activate controlled output verify output Reduce set point to just deactivate controller output verify output Record ORP
355. trogen or other organic compounds 2 21 comply complies compliance Meeting the requirements of the standard which includes standards incorporated by reference in the text 2 22 contaminant Undesirable organic and inorganic soluble and insoluble substances in water including microbiological organisms 2 23 controller Component of an automated controller that receives signals from chemical probes or sensors and sends an output signal to actuate equipment 2 24 corrosion resistant Capable of maintaining original surface characteristics under prolonged contact with the use environment 2 25 cover mounting ring Fitting containing a recess located in the deck to receive the cover of a surface skimmer 2 26 dead weight Mass expressed typically in pounds kg per square foot meter to assist in as sessment of use relative to floor strength and loading requirements The intrinsic invariable weight of a structure such as a Spa including the water and bather weight 2 27 depth type cartridge Filter cartridge with media relying on penetration of particles into the media for removal and providing adequate holding capacity of such particles 2 28 diatomite filter element Device in a filter tank to trap solids and convey water to a manifold collection header pipe or similar conduit Filter elements usually consist of a septum and septum support 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 2 29 disinfection Killing of pathogenic agents b
356. ts parts 6 5 Shaft seals The pump shaft shall be sealed by packing or a mechanical seal If packing is used there shall be a means for its periodic lubrication Instructions on maintenance and lubrication shall be provided 6 6 Pump performance curve 6 6 1 For each pump model or model series the manufacturer shall provide a pump performance curve that plots the pump s total dynamic head versus the discharge flow rate The manufacturer shall also have a curve available that plots the net positive suction head NPSH or total dynamic suction lift TDSL brake horsepower and pump efficiency in relation to the performance curve Pumps with a rating of 5 HP 3 7 kW or less are not required to have a NPSH curve 6 6 2 The actual pump curve as determined in accordance with Annex C section C 1 shall be within a range of 3 to 5 of the total dynamic head or 5 to 5 of the flow whichever is greater indicated by the performance curve Data taken above 90 full flow shall not be judged to the acceptance criteria Pumps with more than one operating speed shall be tested as documented below fixed multispeed pump or motor assemblies test at each speed or variable speed pump or motor assemblies test at 100 50 and the lowest speed 6 7 Operation and installation instructions 6 7 1 The manufacturer shall provide a manual with each pump The manual shall include written instructions for the proper installation operation and
357. ts per Liter H 4 8 3 Sample analysis H 4 8 3 1 Samples shall be analyzed in accordance with Standard Methods A cell culture focus detection method FDM MPN assay shall be used for enumeration of infectious Ceryptosporidium parvum oocysts PL Slifko T R Huffman D E and Rose J B 1999 A most probable number assay for enumeration of infections Cryptosporidium parvum oocysts ApplEnvironMicrobio 65 3936 41 H14 2012 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2012 4 8 3 2 HCT 8 cell slides NOTE Each HCT 8 cell flask T 75 can make 100 mL of cell suspension which in turn produces 16 slides a The cell culture medium shall be aspirated from the flask b The cell monolayer shall be rinsed with 20 mL of warm 98 6 F or 37 C sterile 1 X PBS c 5 mL of sterile PBS with EDTA PBS E shall be added to the flash rocked back and forth over cells to spread over monolayer and allowed to sit for 2 min NOTE Trypsin EDTA may be used instead of PBS E add 5 mL of 0 25 Trypsin warmed Rock back and forth to mix Place in incubator for 5 min d Cell suspension shall be transferred to a sterile 15 mL centrifuge tube containing 5 mL pre warmed maintenance RPMI 1640 medium e Cells shall be centrifugal for 5 min at 1000 X RPM Supernatant shall be aspirated f Cells shall be re suspended in 5 mL of pre warmed RPMI 1640 maintenance medium g Half of suspension shall be transferred to a sterile 50 mL tube containing 47 5 mL of pre warmed main
358. tub bathing load and use in the following ranges heavily used public pools not more than 6 h other public pools not more than 8 h residential pools not more than 12 h public spas or hot tubs not more than 30 min and residential spas or hot tubs not more than 2 h P 1 2 Pump use conditions Pumps should be selected to meet the highest head and flow conditions Sufficient reserve head should be provided to overcome static lift friction losses in piping and appurtenances through which water flows after discharge from the pump and returning to the pool spa or hot tub P 1 2 1 Pressure filters Pumps should be matched to the filter units Sufficient reserve head should be provided to overcome worst case filter loading and meet minimum backwash flow requirements P 1 2 2 Vacuum filters Pumps should be capable of delivering the net positive suction head NPSH design flow rate at a suction of at least 20 in 508 mm of mercury without cavitation P 1 3 Location Pumps should be readily and easily accessible for maintenance and repair When the pump is below the waterline check valves should be installed on the effluent and influent lines 34 The information contained in this Annex is not part of this American National Standard ANS and has not been processed in accordance with ANSI s requirements for an ANSI Therefore this Annex may contain material that has not been subjected to public review or a consensu
359. ture activity relationship considerations indicate that adverse health effects may result If after a chemical class is defined and its point of departure established a substance of greater toxicological significance is identified within the class the class based evaluation criteria shall be re evaluated and revised to the acceptable concentrations of the new substance R 6 4 4 Procedure for identifying a short term effect level R 6 4 4 1 Data requirements for evaluating short term exposures Short term exposure paradigms appropriate for potentially high initial substance concentrations shall be used to evaluate potential acute risk to human health of short term exposures Sound scientific judgment shall be used to determine whether calculation of a Short Term Exposure Level STEL is appropriate for a given contaminant The NOAEL or LOAEL for the critical short term hazard of the substance shall be identified The following types of studies shall be considered for identification of short term hazard short term less than 90 d duration toxicity study in rodents or other appropriate species with a minimum of 14 d post treatment observation period clinical observations hematology and clinical chemistry and gross pathology preferably an oral study in rodents reproduction or developmental assay for substances that have these endpoints as the critical effects or R20 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 subchronic 90 d study in
360. ublished risk assessments are reviewed and are determined to be of equivalent quality the following hierarchy shall be used to select the appropriate assessment based on sponsoring organization 1 U S EPA 2 Health Canada 3 International bodies such as the World Health Organization WHO or the International Programme on Chemical Safety IPCS R14 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 4 European bodies such as the Drinking Water Inspectorate DWI and KIWA or 5 Entities such as other federal or state regulatory agencies private corporations industry associations or individuals R 6 2 2 Risk assessment for published assessments non carcinogenic endpoints As described in Annex R section R 5 the equations utilized to estimate exposures attributable to demal oral and inhalation routes excluding local effects facilitate the determination of a total systemic exposure in mg kg day If route specific sensitization and irritation effects are not anticipated based on the available data an oral reference dose RfD obtained from a published peer reviewed risk assessment may be used to evaluate the estimated systemic exposure to the chemical being assessed The RfD is an estimate of a daily exposure to the human population that is likely to be without an appreciable risk of deleterious effects during a lifetime Before comparing the RfD with the estimated systemic exposure for the chemical being assessed a Relative Source Contribu
361. uction line and or equalizer line The maximum velocity for any nominal pipe size shall not exceed 6 FPS 1 83 MPS 9 9 Data plate A skimmer shall have a data plate that is permanent easy to read and securely attached cast or stamped into the cover or skimmer housing at a location readily accessible after installation The data plate shall contain the following information manufacturer s name and contact information address phone number website or prime supplier skimmer model number minimum design flow rate in gallons minute liters minute and maximum design flow rate in gallons minute liters minute 10 Mechanical chemical feeding equipment This section contains requirements for mechanical chemical feeders that are used to dispense solutions slurries or solids in public or residential pools and spas hot tubs Components of mechanical feeding equipment such as strainers tubing connectors and injection fittings supplied by the manufacturer as part of the chemical feed system are also covered under this section This section applies to fixed rate or single rate mechanical feeding equipment for use with automatic control systems and mechanical feeding equipment with adjustable output rates This section does not contain requirements for chemical feeding equipment that relies on the flow rate of water in the recirculation system 34 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 10 1 General 10 1 1 Mechanical chem
362. ufacturer 2 140 zeolite Hydrated aluminosilicates that contain sodium potassium magnesium and calcium 3 Swimming pool water contact materials and swimming pool treatment chemicals 3 1 Swimming pool water contact materials Materials shall not sustain permanent damage or deformation when subject to repeated handling associated with the routine operation and maintenance of the equipment Materials intended to be in contact with swimming pool or spa hot tub water shall not impart undesirable levels of contaminants or color to the water as determined in accordance with Annex A The following items are exempt from the material review procedures described in Annex A swimming pool and spa hot tub components with a surface area less than 100 in 650 cm in direct contact with water swimming pool components with a mass less than 1 4 oz 40 g spa hot tub components with a mass less than 0 07 oz 2 g components made entirely from materials acceptable for use as a direct or indirect food additive in accordance with 21 CFR 170 199 Food and Drugs 12 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 glass virgin not recycled series AISI 300 stainless steel titanium alloy grade 1 and 2 coatings and components made from materials acceptable for use in contact with potable water in accordance with NSF ANSI 14 potable water material requirements NSF ANSI 42 NSF ANSI 51 or NSF ANSI 61 In order to be quali
363. wing units of measurement as applicable 59 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 ORP millivolts mV pH pH units temperature F or C turbidity Nephelometric Turbidity Units NTU free available chlorine or bromine ppm or mg L total chlorine or bromine ppm or mg L 18 4 Life test Three automated controllers shall be evaluated per Annex N section N 2 4 A minimum of one of three controllers shall complete 110 000 actuation cycles and a minimum of 295 000 cycles shall be accumulated between the three controllers None of the controllers shall fail at or below 80 000 cycles Each cycle shall consist of operating the controller for 1 sec on 9 sec off at the manufacturer s maximum rated load The life test is independent of other tests The display tests shall be performed after the chemical resistance tests 18 5 Performance 18 5 1 Operating conditions The automated controller shall respond with output signals that accurately correspond with the varying input signal when tested per Annex N at four increments between 0 and 100 of the operating ranges specified in Table 18 1 The automated controller may be tested at four increments between 0 and 100 of the manufacturer s full operating range if it is more restrictive than a range listed in Table 18 1 The automated controller shall meet the requirements of this section before and after the chemical resistance test Table 18 1 Oper
364. with pool or spa hot tub product water do not impart undesirable levels of contaminants or color to the product water It is recognized that the product water is not intended for human consumption that it is not feasible or cost effective to identify every contaminant that might be contributed to the product water and that there may not be complete toxicological information available on each contaminant identified Therefore these methods are designed to determine from the material formulation those contaminants of toxicological concern likely to be contributed to the product water determine the general level of contaminants contributed to the product water by the material using screening tests and determine the levels of specific contaminants particularly regulated metals and organics contributed to the product water by the material A 2 Formulation review Where required for conformance to 3 2 complete material formulation information shall be reviewed to determine whether a material is suitable for contact with the product water to assess the potential for contaminants to be contributed to the product water from the material to determine whether extraction testing is warranted and to select the appropriate extraction testing parameters A 3 Exposure testing A 3 1 General description When extraction testing is warranted based on a material formulation a multiple exposure procedure shall be followed Under this p
365. y chemical or physical means directly applied 2 30 easily cleanable Manufactured so that dirt and debris and other soiling material may be removed by manual cleaning methods 2 31 effluent The treated stream emerging from a unit system or process 2 32 electronic water quality test device A device that requires power supply such as line current or a battery to yield a result 2 33 electrolytic chlorinator A device that converts dissolved chloride salt sodium chloride into chlorine and its reaction products 2 34 equalizer line An automatically operating line from below the pool surface to the body of a skimmer designed to prevent air being drawn into the filter when the water level drops below the skimmer inlet 2 35 filled weight Mass expressed typically in pounds kg to explain the total weight of a product when operating at capacity Filled weight of a product or structure such as a spa including the water and bather weight 2 36 filter aid Finely divided medium diatomaceous earth processed perlite etc used to coat a septum of a diatomite type filter 2 37 filter design flow rate Flow rate of a filter determined by multiplying the total effective filter area by the allowable filtration rate expressed in gal min L min 2 38 filter media The material that separates particulate matter from the water passing through 2 39 filtration cycle filter run Operating time between filter cleanings 2 40 filter cartr
366. ystem curve is calculated separately from the static head portion Static head is subtracted from the measured TDH prior to the friction loss calculation and then added back in The Affinity Law cannot be applied directly to this system curve as it is with those of single level bodies of water A schematic of multi level bodies of water is shown on the next page P3 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Static head er Body of water NZ Figure P4 Multi level bodies of water Body of water P4 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 Annex OT Informative Recommended water quality maintenance for spas Q 1 Sanitizer levels 1 Free chlorine ppm a minimum 2 0 b ideal 3 0 5 0 c maximum 10 0 Maintain these levels continually during hours of operation Test water before use During extended use test water hourly Shock treat water after use 2 Combined chlorine ppm a ideal 0 0 0 2 High combined chlorine results in reduced sanitizer efficacy Take remedial action to reduce combined chlorine Other signs of combined chlorine sharp chlorinous odor and eye irritation e g mucous Membranes 3 Total bromine ppm a minimum 30 b ideal 30 50 c maximum 50 Hot water heavy use may require operation at or near maximum levels Regular oxidation is recommended Test water before use During extended use test water hourly Shock treat water after use 4 PHMB ppm Polyhexamethylene biguanide Certain cl
367. zation of total allowable concentration TAC If a published peer reviewed risk assessment is unavailable for the chemical of concern a Total Allowable Concentration TAC as determined by Annex A under NSF ANSI Standard 60 2013 and NSF ANSI Standard 61 2013 may be utilized if available and sensitization or adverse local effects are not anticipated The TAC value may be converted into a mg kg day dose which may then be compared to the PDD systemic all routes calculated utilizing the equations in Annex R section R 5 Drinking water criteria mg L x DWI L day Comparison Criterion mg kg day BW kg Where DWI Drinking Water Intake 2 L for an adult BW Body Weight 70 kg for an adult After obtaining the Comparison Criterion value it shall be compared with the PDD systemic all routes calculated under Annex R section R 5 to determine acceptability If the PDD exceeds the Comparison Criteria value the ADD may be used in place of the PDD for evaluation purposes however the PDD must also then be evaluated against a short term effect level criteria as established under section R 6 4 4 R 6 4 Risk estimation using new or updated risk assessments R 6 4 1 Data requirements for new or updated risk assessments For each substance requiring a new or updated risk assessment toxicity data to be considered shall include but not be limited to assays of genetic toxicity acute toxicity 1 to 14 d exposure short term toxicity 14
368. zone generation system NOTE It has been reported that the oocyst wall of viable oocysts may deform Excystation is performed as an indication of the potential of the oocyst wall to deform and is not done to measure the infectivity of the organism The process equipment shall be provided with an effective means to alert the user when a component of this equipment is not operating 13 21 Operation and installation instructions Drawings and a parts list for easy identification and ordering of replacement parts shall be furnished with each unit and shall include model number of the unit The in vitro excystation method is specificed in Development of a Test to Assess Cryptosporidium parvum Oocysts Viability Correlation with Infectivity Potential American Water Works Association Research Foundation 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver CO 80235 lt www waterresearchfoundation org gt 45 2015 NSF NSF ANSI 50 2015 instructions for proper size selection and installation operation and maintenance instructions a statement of the manufacturer s warranty applicable caution statements prominently displayed ventilation requirements if applicable cross connection protection if the unit is physically connected to a potable water supply a warning if the potential exists for release of high dosages of substances that may endanger bathers 13 22 output rate in lbs or kg per day or hour maximum daily operati

ANSI/NSF 50 – 1999 - NSF International

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

ANSI/NSF 50 &ndash; 1999 - NSF International

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

ANSI/NSF 50 – 1999 - NSF International